CR85-X - Manual - 2007-12-07 3.0

HEALTHCARE ReadeMeFirst
Imaging Services
How to print and add Comments
1 Printing single Pages, Chapters or the complete Manual
IMPORTANT:
This PDF manual is screen optimized – nevertheless it is possible to print single pages,
single chapters or the complete manual on paper size DIN A4 or Letter.
Some pages – especially circuit diagrams for equipment – have been created on paper
size larger than DIN A4/Letter. Printing these pages on DIN A4/Letter may result in
reduced legibility.
Preferably print circuit diagrams on a DIN A3/ANSI B (Ledger) printer, if available.
1.1 Printing single Pages or Chapters

To print single chapters or pages of a chapter proceed as follows:
(1) Click the bookmark of the desired chapter
(2) Write down or remember the shown page number
(3) Go the end of the section or desired range of pages
(4) Select "Print"
(5) Select the page range
(6) Select "Reduce to printer margins" and "Auto-rotate and Center".
(7) Select “OK”
NOTE:
“Reduce to printer margins” may be named on other Adobe Reader versions
“shrink to printable area” or “shrink oversized pages to paper size”
2007-05-10 printed in Germany

Document Node ID: 16099429
Agfa Company Confidential Copyright © 2006 Agfa-Gevaert HealthCare
ReadeMeFirst
1.2 Printing the complete Service Manual

To print the complete service manual proceed as follows:
(1) Select "Print"
(2) Select “All”
(3) Select "Reduce to printer margins" and "Auto-rotate and Center".
(see NOTE previous page)
(4) Select “OK”
2 Adding Comments
• If this file is opened in an Adobe Reader version ≥ 7, the comment toolbar will
show-up.
• This allows to add comments, to highlight or underline text and many more text
manipulations.
2.1 How to export your Comments

(1) In the drop down menu “Comment & Markup” select "Show comments List"
(2) Select the desired comments: Press the CTRL-key for multiple selection.
DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.
Revision 0 How to print and add Comments Page 2 of 3

2007-05-10 Agfa Company Confidential
ReadeMeFirst
(3) Select “Options - Export Selected Comments”

(4) Save the file with any name
2.2 How to import Comments

(1) In the drop down menu “Comment & Markup” select "Show comments List"
(2) Select “Options - Import Comments”
(3) Browse for the comments file and press “select”
NOTE:
The imported comments possibly appear on different pages, if the file where the
comments have been imported has a different number of pages.

Revision 0 How to print and add Comments Page 3 of 3

2007-05-10 Agfa Company Confidential
HEALTHCARE
Imaging Services Service Manual
Document No: DD+DIS378.05E
CR 85-X
Type 5148/100
CR 75.0
Type 5146/105
(as of SN ≥ 6000)
2nd Edition
CR 85-X CR 75.0
Type 5148/100 Type 5146/105
(as of SN ≥ 6000)
CONFIDENTIALITY NOTE:
Use, dissemination, distribution or reproduction of this document by unauthorized personnel is not permitted and may be unlawful.
02-2007 printed in Germany Document Node ID: 10028251

eq_00_about manual_e_template_v02
DD+DIS378.05E About this Manual
► Manufacturer
Agfa-Gevaert HealthCare GmbH
Tegernseer Landstraße 161
D - 81539 München
Germany
WARNING:
Improper operation or service activities may cause damage or injuries.
INSTRUCTION:
(1) Read the "Generic Safety Directions" document
(see MEDNET GSO => General Info => Agfa HealthCare => Publications =>
Service Manual) prior to attempting any operation, repair or maintenance task on
the equipment.
(2) Strictly observe all safety directions within the "Generic Safety Directions" and on
the product.

Edition 2, Revision 0 CR 85-X Type 5148/100 Chapter 0 / 2

02-2007 CR 75.0 Type 5146/105 (as of SN ≥ 6000) Agfa Company Confidential
► Purpose of this document

This document provides information on the structure and contents of the Service Manual.
► Document History
Edition. Release Changes

Revision Date compared to previous version 1.0
2.0 02-2007 • Only layout changes as this Service Documentation is
also valid for CR 75.0 Type 5146/105 (as of SN ≥ 6000).


► Chapter Overview
Chapter
Order List
0
About this Manual
Controls, Connections and Set Up Procedures

1
Site and System Data / Installation Report
2 Functional Description
3 Repair and Service
3.1 Machine specific Safety and Repair Information
3.2 Machine specific Tools, Software Tools and Auxiliary Equipment

3.3 Troubleshooting
3.4 Electrical and Mechanical Codes, Fuses, LEDs
3.5 Replacement of Parts
3.6 Adjustments and Calibrations
3.7 Software Menus and Setting
3.8 Software Releases, Patches
3.9 FAQ - Frequently Asked Questions
4 Reference and Circuit Diagrams
5 Spare Parts List
6 Accessories
7 Field Modifications
8 Manufacturing Standard Modifications
9 Maintenance
10 Service Bulletins
11 Installation Planning 1 2 3
12 Glossary


► Explanation of notes
This documentation uses:

Safety relevant notes
Icon Signal Word Situation
CAUTION: Possible dangerous situation: Light injuries or damage to the

equipment described in the manual and/or damage to any other
equipment or goods and/or environmental pollution can be the
consequence.
WARNING: Dangerous situation: Potential serious injury to a user, engineer,
patient or any other person and possible mistreatment of patients
can be the consequence.
DANGER: Direct, immediate danger: Death or serious injuries can be the
consequence.
Not-safety relevant notes

Icon Name Type of Information
INSTRUCTION: Indicates an instruction where it is important to follow literally the
described actions.
IMPORTANT: Highlights very important actions which have to be carried out to
prevent malfunction.
NOTE: • Indicates advice to facilitate the following step or action without

having a direct influence on the step or action.
• Highlights unusual points
• Indicates background information
• Can be used to explain or highlight displays of the graphical user
interface.
► Conventions
Actions Way of writing Sample

Action, Switch the machine on Switch the machine on
explanation
Action with the mouse or the <omni-cd.exe> Double-click the
"Return" key <omni-cd.exe> icon
Required text input via the vips Enter vips and click on
keyboard <Continue>


1 About this Manual
2nd Edition CR 85-X Type 5148/100 – CR 75.0 Type 5146/105

Service Documentation (DD+DIS378.05E)
IMPORTANT:
The 2nd Edition of the Service Documentation for
CR 85-X Type 5148/100 and CR 75.0 Type 5146/105 , DD+DIS378.05E is valid for:
• CR 85-X – Type 5148/100
• CR 75.0 – Type 5146/105 (as of SN ≥ 6000)
Explanation:
The improved detector unit (light guide and photomultiplier) from CR 85-X Type
5148/100 is integrated in CR 75.0 and hence the new subtype CR 75.0 Type
5146/105 has been created.
The improvement is not available for:
• ADC Compact Plus Type 5146/100
• CR 75.0 Type 5146/101
• Centricity CR MP3510 Type 5146/200 and 201
The Digitizer CR 75.0 Type 5146/105 has been introduced in production and can be
distinguished from ADC Compact Plus Type 5146/100, CR 75.0 Type 5146/101 and
Centricity CR MP3510 Type 5146/200 and 201 by the type label:
• Type: 5146/105
• Serial Number SN: ≥ 6000
Note that the CR 85-X / CR 75.0 Type 5146/105 Service Documentation

(DD+DIS378.05E) is not valid for:
• ADC Compact Plus Type 5146/100
• CR 75.0 Type 5146/101
• Centricity CR MP3510 Type 5146/200 and 201
For the ADC Compact Plus Type 5146/100, CR 75.0 Type 5146/101 and
Centricity CR MP3510 Type 5146/200 and 201 only the
CR 75.0 Service Documentation, DD+DIS002.04E and Spare Part List,
DD+DIS007.04M must be used.


Reason The 2nd Edition of this Documentation has been released due to the fact that the
for the CR 85-X Service Documentation from now on is also valid for
2
nd
Edition
CR 75.0 Type 5146/105.
Only the layout of the Service Documentation and product specific safety notes have
been adapted. No other changes of the content have been made.
Product The CR 85-X Type 5148/100 digitizer is the follow-up model of the
Description CR 75.0 Type 5146/100 digitizer.
It has been designed for General Radiology environments and, particularly, for the
CR Mammography 1C Solution.
The main changes between CR 75.0 Type 5146/100 and
CR 85-X Type 5148/100 are:
• Acrylic light guide with glued PMT (PhotoMultiplier Tube) is used instead of
optical fibers.
Download This Service Documentation is available on the MedNet GSO Library.

from
MedNet Path: Computed Radiography / CR Digitizers / CR 85-X
Features of The CR 85-X Type 5148/100 (CR 75.0 Type 5146/105) scans the exposed
the CR image plate, converts the information into digital data and automatically transfers
Digitizer
the image to the image processing station for further processing and visualization.
The digitizer requires but little manual interaction. All you have to do, after exposure
and identification of the cassette, is to place it in the input buffer of the digitizer. You
can deposit up to 10 cassettes of different sizes simultaneously in the input buffer.
The Digitizer takes in the cassettes one by one. The Digitizer reads the demographic
data and routing information from the memory chip in the cassette, opens the
cassette, removes the image plate and scans the latent image by means of a
sweeping laser beam.
Once the image is digitized, the cassette is returned to the output buffer to be used
for new exposures. After a full Digitizer cycle, the plate has turned 180° in the
cassette.
Depending on the X-ray intensity which has affected the phosphor during the
exposure, more or less light will be emitted during laser scanning. The light is
converted into an electrical signal. This signal is then converted into a digital bit
stream.
Once converted into digital form, the digitized image is transferred to the image
processing station for further processing and visualization.


Further features of the digitizer include:
• The digitizer permits assigning the status “emergency” to an image. An

emergency image will be given priority by the image processing station.
• The digitizer permits re-erasing an image plate before re-using it. In specific
cases, this is necessary to prevent ghost images caused by previous
exposures or stray radiation from interfering with the image of interest. You can
erase a batch of
up to 9 image plates.
Intended This device must only be used to scan exposed X-ray cassettes, containing an
Use of the erasable image plate (IP).
Digitizer
This device is part of a system, consisting of X-ray cassettes with erasable phosphor
image plates, an identification station for the cassettes and a workstation where the
resulting digital image information is further processed and routed.
It is intended that this device is only operated in a radiological environment by
qualified staff.


Copyright  2007 Agfa-Gevaert HealthCare
All rights reserved.
Technical modifications reserved.
Published by
D - 81539 München
Germany
AGFA and the Agfa-Rhombus are trademarks of Agfa-Gevaert NV

Agfa Company Confidential

Order List for Documentation
Order List for Documentation CR 85-X

Type 5148/100
CR 75.0
Type 5146/105
(as of SN ≥ 6000)
NOTE:
Daily updated order lists are available in MedNet.
Order number for a complete Service Manual:
Order number Edition
DD+DIS378.05E Complete Service Manual 2

replaces 1st Edition
Order numbers for separately available chapters of the Service Manual:
Order number Contents Revision Approval Date

of document
DD+DIS180.05M Chapter 06: Spare parts List: n.a. 2007-03-20

CR User Station, Type 5157/100
DD+DIS021.07E Chapter 11: Installation Planning 0 2007-02-21
DD+DIS092.06M Chapter 05: Spare Parts List 0 2007-02-19
DD+DIS020.07E Chapter 09: Maintenance Instructions 0 2007-02-16
DD+DIS025.05E Chapter 06: Technical Documentation: n.a. 2006-03-27
CR User Station, Type 5157/100
Access to MedNet GSO Library:

• *IntraNet: http://docs.agfanet/mednetcso-library
• *ExtraNet: http://extranet.agfa.com/bu/mi/mednet/mednetcso.nsf
* to request an account to the MedNet GSO Library go to:
http://intra.agfanet/bu/mi/mednethelp.nsf/EN/gettingaccess.htm
Inquiries:
• Phone + 49 89 6207 3949 Fax +49 89 6207 7274

2007-12-07 printed in Germany Document Node ID: 14874740

eq_00_orderlist_e_template_v04
Agfa Company Confidential Copyright © 2007 Agfa HealthCare N.V.
Checklist for Completeness
Checklist for Completeness CR 85-X

Type 5148/100
CR 75.0
Type 5146/105
(as of SN ≥ 6000)
NOTE:
Verify latest level and completeness of your Service Manual by means of this checklist
for completeness.
Only the document numbers listed here are valid. Discard documents with different
numbers if necessary.
Chapter Order number / Designation Revision Approval date Pages

of document
0 Cover sheet 0 2007-02-09 1 page
About this manual 0 2007-02-16 0/2-8
Order list --- 2007-12-07 0/1
Checklist for completeness 0/2-3
List of Service Bulletins 0/4
Generic Safety Directions 0 2006-07-05 Cover sheet, pages 1-20
1 DD+DIS378.05E 0 2007-02-16 Cover sheet, 1/2-36
DD+DIS018.06E --- 2006-02-02 2 pages
Installation Report
3.1 DD+DIS378.05E 0 2007-02-16 Cover sheet, 3.1/2-17
3.7 Not applicable --- --- ---
3.9 Not applicable --- --- ---
Circuit Diagrams 0 2007-02-16 Sheets 1-7
5 DD+DIS092.06M 0 2007-02-19 Cover sheet, 5/2-97
6 DD+DIS378.05E 1 2007-03-21 Table of Contents
DD+DIS025.05E 14 2006-03-27 pages I-II, pages 1-31
DD+DIS180.05M 14 2007-03-20 Cover sheet, 5/II, 5/3-17

2007-12-07 CR 85-X Type 5148/100 Chapter 0 / 2

CR 75.0 Type 5146/105 (as of SN ≥ 6000) Agfa Company Confidential
Checklist for Completeness
Chapter Order number / Designation Revision Approval date Pages

of document
7 DD+DIS378.05E --- 2007-04-25 Table of Contents
DD+DIS203.06E 1 2007-04-25 Cover sheet, 7/2-16
Maintenance Checklist 0 2007-02-16 9/1-5
10 SB 04 DD+DIS278.07E 0 2007-09-24 Page 1-4
SB 03 DD+DIS088.07E 0 2007-04-25 Page 1-5
SB 02 DD+DIS201.06E 0 2006-06-30 Page 1-2
SB 01 DD+DIS230.06E 0 2006-06-13 Page 1-5

2007-12-07 CR 85-X Type 5148/100 Chapter 0 / 3

List of Service Bulletins
List of Service Bulletins CR 85-X

Type 5148/100
CR 75.0
Type 5146/105
(as of SN ≥ 6000)
The following SB's are valid:

SB Document number Contents Revision
of document
01 DD+DIS230.06E New Spare Part “Reader with Antenna” available 0

02 DD+DIS201.06E Digitizer Software ACP_4007 is available 0
03 DD+DIS088.07E Release of ACPL1004 Language Files for 0
Digitizer User Interface of CR85-X
04 DD+DIS278.07E New vacuum pumps for installations higher than 0
2000m above sea level to avoid vacuum
problems with Error Code “24AB4”
The following SB's are no longer valid

(integrated in the chapters of the Service Manual, or technically obsolete):
SB Document number Contents Revision
of document
--- --- --- ---

2007-12-07 CR 85-X Type 5148/100 Chapter 0 / 4

HEALTHCARE Generic Safety Directions
Global Services Organisation
Safety Directions
for HealthCare Imaging Products
Purpose of this document:

This document lists generic safety directions valid for all
HealthCare Imaging Products.
Revision History
Revision Change Date Author Approver
0 Initial Revision 2006-07-03 Hermle Van Houdt
Kulik
1 Extension after review of all 2007-01-18 Hermle Van Houdt
product specific safety notes in Kulik
GSO
Document Node ID: 11849633
printed in Germany
AGFA Company Confidential Copyright © 2006 Agfa-Gevaert HealthCare
Generic Safety Directions
Purpose of this Document
This Generic Safety Directions document is valid for all Agfa HealthCare
Imaging Products.
It is part of each Service Documentation and Installation Planning document.
The latest version is available via

MEDNET => GSO Library => General Info => Agfa HealthCare =>
Publications => Service Manual
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
1. Read this document prior to attempting any operation, repair or
maintenance task on the equipment.
2. Strictly observe all safety directions within this document and on the
product.

01 - 2007 Safety Directions for HealthCare Imaging Products Page 1

Agfa Company Confidential Document number: DD+DIS238.06e
This document is structured as follows:
Content Page
1 Disclaimer Legal text which describes items for 3
which Agfa HealthCare cannot take
responsibility.
2 Used Icons Description of the icons used in the 4
Service Documentation and where
they are applied.
3 Labels General statement concerning labels 5
in and on the equipment.
4 Product Complaints General description how to proceed in 7
case of complaints about the
equipment.
5 References References how to obtain the Service 7
Documentation.
6 Intended Use and General description about the purpose 8
Users of the equipment and who may use it.
7 Qualifications for Description of qualifications for 8
Operation and operation, installation, maintenance
Service Tasks and repair.
8 Connections to other General statement about what to 9
Equipment observe before establishing
connections to other equipment.
9 Accessories and Safety directions concerning use of 9
Spare Parts spare parts and accessories.
10 Compliance Description about standards and 10
directives the product is compliant to.
11 Safety Directions for Safety directions concerning operation 12
Operation of the equipment.
12 Safety Directions for Safety directions concerning cleaning 12
Cleaning and and disinfection of the equipment.
Disinfection
13 Safety Directions for Safety directions concerning 13
Service Activities installation, maintenance and repair of
the equipment.
14 Waste Disposal Information concerning waste disposal 20
and recycling.

Page 2 Safety Directions for HealthCare Imaging Products 01 - 2007

1 Disclaimer
The installation and service of equipment described herein is to be performed

• by qualified personnel who are employed by Agfa HealthCare or one of its
affiliates
• or who are otherwise authorized by Agfa HealthCare or one of its affiliates
to provide such services.
Fitters, engineers and other persons who are not employed by or otherwise
directly affiliated with or authorized by Agfa HealthCare or one of its affiliates
are directed to contact one of the local offices of Agfa HealthCare or one of its
affiliates before attempting installation or service procedures.
No part of this document may be reproduced, copied, adapted or transmitted

in any form or by any means without the written permission of
Agfa HealthCare.
Agfa HealthCare makes no warranties or representation, expressed or

implied, with respect to the accuracy, completeness or usefulness of the
information contained in this document and specifically disclaims warranties of
suitability for any particular purpose.
Agfa HealthCare shall under no circumstances be liable for any damage
arising from the use or inability to use any information, apparatus, method or
process disclosed in this document.
Agfa HealthCare is not liable for resulting consequences, damages or injuries
if you don’t operate the product correctly or if you don’t have it serviced
correctly.
Agfa HealthCare reserves the right to change the product, the characteristics
and its documentation without further notice to improve reliability, function or
design.


Document number: DD+DIS238.06e Agfa Company Confidential
2 Used Icons
The table below lists the icons, their name and circumstances:
Icon Name and Circumstances

CAUTION: Possible dangerous situation: Light injuries or
damage to the equipment described in the manual and/or
damage to any other equipment or goods and/or
environmental pollution can be the consequence
WARNING: Dangerous situation: Potential serious injury
to a user, engineer, patient or any other person and
possible mistreatment of patients can be the
consequence.
DANGER: Direct, immediate danger: Death or heavy
injuries can be the consequence.
INSTRUCTION:
• If used in combination with the warning or caution
sign: Indicates a specific instruction, which if followed
exactly, avoids the subject of the warning or caution.
• If used without warning or caution sign: Indicates an
instruction where it is important to follow literally as
described.
IMPORTANT:
Highlights very important actions which have to be
carried out to prevent malfunction.
NOTE:
• Indicates advice to facilitate the following step or
action
• Highlights unusual points
• Indicates background information
• Can be used to explain or highlight displays of the
graphical user interface.
• Is additional information without influence on the
action or step!


3 Labels
3.1 CE Mark
CE Mark This product carries the CE Mark. The CE Declaration

(CE Conformity) becomes invalid if the product is
changed without explicit consent of the manufacturer!
This applies to all parts, not only to safety elements.
3.2 System Labels

All system labels and software version number locations are referred to within
this service document in the appropriate section.
Enclosed an overview of common labels, according to ISO 3864.
This list is not complete.
Hot Surface Laser Beam Magnetic Field Ionizing Radiation
Obstacles Corrosive Liquid High Voltage Hand Injuries

C&W_005.cdr


3.2.1 System Labels concerning Laser Radiation

According to its classification, laser radiation can lead to eye and skin injuries.
Each laser source is classified from class 1 to class 4.
The table below lists the meaning of the different laser classes. Note the
detailed instructions in the user manual and technical documentation.
Class 1: Not dangerous to the human eye.

Class 2: Laser units having a maximum output of 1 mW. The accessible
laser radiation only lies within the visible range of the spectrum
(400 nm to 700 nm). With brief exposure times (up to 0.25 s)
there is no danger due to the blink reflex.
Class 3A: Laser units having a maximum output of 5 mW. The accessible
laser radiation becomes dangerous for the eye, if the cross
section of radiation is reduced by optical instruments. If this is
not the case, the emitted laser radiation in the visible region of
the spectrum, with short exposure times (up to 0.25 s), is not
dangerous in the spectral regions, even for long irradiation
times.
⇒ Proper use must be observed.
⇒ Required safety equipment must be used.
Class 3B: Laser units having a maximum output of 500 mW. Dangerous to
the human eye and in particular cases to the skin.
Class 4: Laser units having a higher output than 500 mW. Extremely
dangerous to the human eye and dangerous to the human skin.


4 Product Complaints
Any service person who has any complaints or has experienced any
dissatisfaction in the quality, durability, reliability, safety, effectiveness or
performance of this product must notify Agfa HealthCare by the Agfa
HealthCare complaint procedure.
If the product malfunctions and may have caused or contributed to a serious
injury of a patient or an accident or if there are any hazards which may cause
an accident Agfa HealthCare must be notified immediately by telephone, fax
or written correspondence to the following address:
Agfa Headquarters
Septestraat 27
2640 Mortsel, Belgium.
Tel +32 3 444 2111
Fax +32 3 444 7094
Further Agfa service support addresses all over the world are accessible on
the web site, www.agfa.com.
5 References
Technical Documentation is available via MedNet (PDF) and your local Agfa
HealthCare support organisation (Paper).
Access to MedNet:
IntraNet: http://docs.agfanet/bu/mi/mednet/mednetcso.nsf
ExtraNet: http://extranet.agfa.com/bu/mi/mednet/mednetcso.nsf


6 Intended Use and Users
6.1 Intended Use

This Agfa HealthCare product should only be operated in a hospital or clinical
radiological environment by qualified staff.
It must only be operated according to its specifications and its intended use.
Any operation not corresponding to the specifications or intended use may
result in hazards, which in turn may lead to serious injuries or fatal accidents
(for example electric shocks). AGFA will not assume any liability whatsoever in
these cases.
Make sure that the product is constantly monitored in order to avoid
inappropriate handling, especially by children.
The product must only be installed and put into operation under the specified
conditions.
CAUTION: (U.S.A. only):

Special qualification required for operation of the product. Improper
operation possible.
In accordance with U.S. Law, this product can only be sold to or ordered by a
licensed physician.
6.2 Intended User

This manual is written for Agfa trained Field Service engineers and Clinical
Application Specialists, trained users of Agfa HealthCare products and trained
diagnostic X–Ray clinical personnel who have received proper training. Users
are considered as the persons who handle the equipment as well as the
persons having authority over the equipment.
7 Qualifications for Operation and Service Tasks
This Technical Documentation describes adjustments and routines which must

only to be performed by qualified technical personnel.
The Agfa (trained) Field Service engineers and Clinical Application Specialists
must have received adequate Agfa HealthCare training on the safe and
effective use of the product before attempting to work with it. Training
requirements may vary from country to country.
Agfa (trained) Field Service engineers and Clinical Application Specialists
must make sure that training is received in accordance with local laws or
regulations that have the force of law.
Your local Agfa HealthCare representative can provide further information on
training.


8 Connections to other Equipment
Agfa HealthCare equipment must only be used in combination with other Agfa
HealthCare equipment or components if these are expressly recognized by
Agfa HealthCare as compatible. A list of such equipment and components is
available from Agfa HealthCare service on request.
Changes or additions to the equipment must only be carried out by persons
authorized to do so by Agfa HealthCare. Such changes must comply with best
engineering practice and all applicable laws and regulations that have the
force of law within the jurisdiction of the hospital.
The Agfa HealthCare products are designed to communicate with other
devices in the hospital network using DICOM protocols.
Warning:
Accessory equipment not complying with the safety requirements of
this product may lead to a safety hazard.
INSTRUCTION:
Consult the Technical Documentation before making any connections to
other equipment.
Consideration relating to the choice of accessory equipment shall include:
• Use of the accessory equipment in the patient vicinity
• Evidence that the safety certification of the accessory equipment has
been performed in accordance with the appropriate IEC 60601-1 and IEC
60601-1-1 harmonized national standard.
In addition all configurations must comply with the medical electrical systems
standard IEC 60601-1-1. The party that makes the connections acts as
system Configurer and is responsible for complying with the systems
standard.
If required, contact your local service organization.
9 Accessories and Spare Parts
WARNING:
Hazards may be introduced because of component failure or improper
operation.
INSTRUCTION:
• Replace defective parts with Agfa HealthCare original spare parts.
• Use only tools and measuring instruments which are suitable for the
procedure.
• Only approved Agfa HealthCare accessories must be used. For a list of
compatible accessories contact your local Agfa HealthCare organization
or www.agfa.com


10 Compliance
Directive:
Council Directive 93/42/EEC of 14 June 1993 concerning medical devices
(OJ No L 169/1 of 1993-07-12)
• ANNEX I - ESSENTIAL REQUIREMENTS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

The products are designed and manufactured in such a way that, when
used under the conditions and for the purposes intended and, where
applicable, by virtue of the technical knowledge, experience, education or
training of intended users, they will not compromise the clinical condition
or the safety of patients, or the safety and health of users.
• ANNEX II - EC DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY Full quality assurance

system ISO 13485
• ANNEX X - CLINICAL EVALUATION The clinical evaluation follows a

defined and methodologically sound procedure.
Standards:
IEC 60601-1, Ed. 3: Medical electrical equipment - Part 1: General

requirements for basic safety and essential performance
ISO 14971:2000, Medical devices – Application of risk management to

medical devices
IEC 60601-1-2 It specifies the MANUFACTURER of the ME EQUIPMENT or

ME SYSTEM provides information to the RESPONSIBLE ORGANIZATION
that is essential in determining the suitability of the ME EQUIPMENT or ME
SYSTEM for the electromagnetic environment of use, and in managing the
electromagnetic environment of use to permit the ME EQUIPMENT or ME
SYSTEM to maintain BASIC SAFETY and provide its ESSENTIAL
PERFORMANCE without disturbing other equipment.
Additional standards for documentation:-
IEC 62079 Ed. 1: Preparation of instructions - Structuring, content and

presentation
Harmonization:
Global Harmonization Task Force (GHTF) www.ghtf.org/


• This document been has prepared to comply with Study Group 1

guidance document of the Global Harmonization Task Force (GHTF)
www.ghtf.org/ to assist development of a consistent, harmonized definition
for a medical device that could be used within a global regulatory model
would offer significant benefits to the manufacturer, user, patient or
consumer, and to Regulatory Authorities and support global convergence
of regulatory systems.
IECEE CB SCHEME www.iecee.org
The IECEE CB Scheme is the world's first truly international system for
acceptance of test reports dealing with the safety of electrical and electronic
products. It is a multilateral agreement among participating countries and
certification organizations. Agfa has produced a CB test report and claims
national certification in all other member countries of the CB Scheme.
CAUTION: For USA only:

This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency
energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the service
manual, may cause interference to radio communication.
Note:
This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class
A computing device pursuant to Subpart B of Part 15 of FCC Rules, which
are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference
when operated in a commercial environment.
Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause
interference.
The user will be required to take all necessary measures to correct the
interference at his own expense.


11 Safety Directions for Operation
CAUTION:
Do not obstruct the mains power switch.
Position the Agfa HealthCare product so that it is possible to disconnect the
mains power connection.
• Under certain conditions the Agfa HealthCare product will show a display
containing a message. This message will show that either a problem or
action has occurred or that a requested action is required or cannot be
performed. The user must read these messages carefully they will provide
information on what to do. This will be either performing an action to
resolve the problem or to contact the Agfa HealthCare service
organization. Details on the contents of messages can be found in this
Technical Documentation.
• All images created using any image technology can show artifacts which
could be confused with diagnostic t information. If there is any doubt that
the diagnostic information could be corrupted, Additional investigations
must be performed to get clear diagnostic information.
• Ventilation openings must not be covered.
• If you notice conspicuous noise or smoke, disconnect the product
immediately from the mains.
• Do not pour water or any other liquid over the device.
• If a system malfunction causes an emergency situation involving the
patient, operating personnel or any system component, activate the
emergency stop for the system concerned. All motor driven system
movements will be stopped.
• Do not store any magnetic media near or on devices, which produce
magnetic fields, since stored data may be lost.
DANGER:
Risk of explosion.
Never operate this device in zones where there are flammable anesthetics or
oxygen which may cause an explosion.
Warning:
Images can be lost due to power failure.
Connect the equipment to an un-interruptible power supply (UPS) or an
institutional standby generator.


11.1 Radiation Protection
Only qualified and authorized personnel shall operate any X-Ray system. In
this context qualified means those legally permitted to operate this X-Ray
equipment in the jurisdiction in which the X-Ray equipment is being used,
and authorized means those authorized by the authority controlling the use
of the X-Ray equipment. Full use must be made of all radiation protection
features, devices, systems, procedures and accessories.
• Ionizing radiation can lead to radiation injuries if handled incorrectly.

When radiation is applied, the required protective measures must be
complied with.
12 Safety Directions for Cleaning and Disinfection
• Details about cleaning and disinfection or sterilization methods that may

be used on SYSTEM parts or ACCESSORIES that can become
contaminated through contact with the PATIENT or with body fluids, are
referred to within the individual service documents.
• Disconnect the power supply from the equipment prior to cleaning the
equipment.
13 Safety Directions for Service Activities
13.1 General Safety Directions for Service Activities
• This system uses high voltage. Please consider the respective safety
regulations.
• Electrical repairs and connections must only be performed by a qualified
electrician
• Mechanical repairs and connections must only be performed by a
qualified technician.
• The safety directions for operation (see section 11) are also valid for all
service activities.
• During all service activities observe prescribed local and country-specific
requirements (e.g. occupational safety and accident prevention
regulations).
• All existing screw connections must be tightened sufficiently firmly, but
they may not be overstressed when tightening. There must always be
compliance with stated torque values!
• Damaged or missing screws may be replaced only with the same screw
types that have the specified hardness rating. Unless a different value is
listed in the instructions, all Allen screws used must be hardness
rated 8.8.


• All screws must be secured in accordance with the corresponding data.

If "Loctite" has to be used to secure screws, this is stated in the text.
• Any Agfa service PC or tool which is to be connected via RS232 ,RJ45,
USB or other interface to an Agfa device must not be connected to the
mains but must be operated on its internal battery or indirect supply (low
voltage).
• When handling printed circuit boards (abbr.: PCBs) the following points
must be observed:
o Always switch off the equipment and unplug the power cord, before
you disconnect or connect cables on printed circuit boards.
o When working on PCBs, always wear an anti-static wrist strap. Never
touch any parts or components on PCBs with your bare fingers.
o PCBs have to be kept or transported in their protection bags. Never
carry a PCB without protection bag and walk on carpet or plastic floor
covering (electrostatic charge).
o Once the PCB is taken out of its protection bag, it has to be protected
from electrostatic charge by a grounded mat.
CAUTION:
Static discharge! Electrical components may be destroyed:
For the repair on electrical components, wear a grounding strap
(CM+9 9999 0830 0) around the wrist and connect the other end of this strap
on a grounded conducting metal piece.
13.2 Safety Directions for Installation Planning Activities
Warning:
Electrical device. Shock possible.
INSTRUCTION:
• Do not position Agfa EQUIPMENT so it is difficult to operate the
disconnection device when an APPLIANCE COUPLER or separable plug
is used as isolation.
• Local and International wiring regulations must be observed. Check all
supplies and voltages, currents, trips and fuses with the Hospital facilities
department or their engineers.


• The device complies with the EN 60601-1, 2006 standard for Information
Technology. This means that, although it is absolutely safe, patients may
not come in direct contact with the equipment. Therefore the operator
console must be placed outside a radius of 1.5 m around the patient.
R = 1.5m
1.5m
1.5m
Patient environment
• This device should be installed behind the institution firewall for network
security and anti-virus protection. No ongoing computer virus protection or
network security for this medical device is provided (e.g. a computer
firewall). Network security and anti-virus provisions are the ongoing
responsibility of the user or institution.
Safety Note for fixing equipment at the wall or floor:

Warning:
Unknown composition of wall or floor structure: Risk of injury or
damage:
Hospital management is responsible for the position, location and fixing of all
equipment.
CAUTION:
Heavy device may damage the floor covering.
Make sure that the floor covering is solid enough to stand the weight of the
device.
CAUTION:
Ceiling construction may be inadequate for fixing of equipment: Risk of
injury or damage:
Hospital management is responsible for the position, location and fixing of all
equipment.


13.3 Safety Directions for Installation Activities

• If not otherwise stated, installation and configuration is performed by Agfa
HealthCare trained personnel.
• If damage of the package is visible from the outside contact your local
AGFA representative.
• Apart from wearing the required protective clothing, e.g. safety boots and
gloves, care must be taken that heavy loads are correctly lifted/carried to
avoid injury. The relevant instructions must be complied with. Heavy or
awkward loads must be moved by mechanical means or by several
people.
• When installing the product be sure that there is either a mains plug or an
all-cable disconnecting device in the internal installation fitted near the
product and that it is easily accessible.
• Defective covers, sharp edges or protruding parts of equipment can cause
injuries, if accidentally knocked into. Route cables and position equipment
safely.
• This device should be installed behind the institution firewall for network
security and anti-virus protection. No ongoing computer virus protection or
network security for this medical device is provided (e.g., a computer
firewall). Network security and anti-virus provisions are the ongoing
responsibility of the user or institution.
CAUTION:
Risk of damaging the device by using the wrong power supply:
INSTRUCTION:
Prior to connecting the device to the mains ...
• Compare the power requirements indicated on the type label with the
available power supply in the installation room.
• Check the service manual for the type of input voltage selection, manual or
automatic: If manual, select the appropriate voltage and fuses.
• Confirm to use the correct socket and plug for the required power supply.
• Check the equipment will work with the power supply available.


CAUTION:
To comply with ISO 60601-1 (annex I) all computers and peripherals must be
connected to the same power source.
INSTRUCTION:
• Always connect the associated monitor to the same Uninterruptible Power
Source as the PC.
• When different combinations of equipment are used in various medical
environments a potential difference (V) can exist between the protective
earths in different localities. If the protective earthing fails this potential
difference can cause a HAZARD for the OPERATOR or for the PATIENT.
13.4 Safety Directions for Maintenance and Repair Activities

• This Technical Documentation identifies the parts on which preventive
inspection and maintenance shall be performed by Agfa HealthCare
service personnel, including the periods to be applied.
• In general the device has to be switched off during service activities.
Exception: If the device is switched on to perform tests pay particular
attention to any hazards due to moving and rotating parts. Avoid lose
clothing or finger traps. Switch off the device immediately after the tests.
• Do not turn motors manually. If required, first disconnect the motor from
the motor control board.
• Make sure that the power cord does not show any signs of damage.
• After repair work always check that the integrated safety features are not
overridden or disconnected.
• If there is any visible damage to the machine casing do not hand-over the
product to the customer. First repair the machine casing.
CAUTION:
Image artifacts possible after cleaning optical elements.
When cleaning optical elements follow the service manual precisely.
CAUTION:
Opening screws secured by red lacquer may misalign important device
adjustments:
Do not open screws that are secured by red lacquer.
CAUTION:
Sharp edges inside the device: Cut or abrasion possible.
Be careful at maintenance and replacement of parts.


WARNING:
Battery can explode, causing chemical burns.
INSTRUCTION:
• Check that batteries are inserted with correct polarity.
• Only use batteries of the same type or an equivalent type as specified by
the manufacturer.
• Dispose of empty batteries in compliance with the specifications of the
manufacturer.
WARNING:
Improper ground connection of the digitizer metal housing may lead to
electric shocks.
In case of power supply replacements or maintenance check the protective
earth resistance according to the national regulations.
Make sure, that all grounding connections to metallic covers are present
Safety Note for PCs and Workstations in the system:

Warning:
Electrical shock and damage to the equipment possible.
Only open the PC or workstation if explicitly stated in the service manual.
Unplug before opening.
Observe anti-static safety regulations.
Warning:
Replacing fuses by wrong type may lead to fire hazard!
Use only fuses of the exact value and characteristics stated in the service
manual or on the device.


13.5 Safety Directions for remote Service Activities
Warning:
During remote service activities images can be lost.
Inform the customer prior to remote service activities to finish the current
work and to stop working on the system.
13.6 Safety Directions for Transport and Shipment of Spare Parts,

Accessories and Devices
• In compliance with transport regulations, all uninterruptible power

supplies (UPS) must be shipped with batteries disconnected.
• Use the original packing when returning spare parts, accessories or
devices.
13.7 Safety Directions concerning Modifications

Modifications made in products/systems shipped by Agfa HealthCare must not
be implemented without written permission from Agfa HealthCare.
This applies in particular to changes which may affect the mechanical and/or
electrical safety or radiation-protection properties of a product (e.g. changing
of safety distances, removal of locks/instructions etc.).
13.8 Safety Directions concerning Hazardous Materials

'Hazardous materials' is the designation for substances which can ignite or
explode or which are toxic, injurious to health, corrosive or irritating. The
“Hazardous Material” instructions must be read and the required protective
measures must be complied with when performing work to avoid health risks.
Their properties together with the hazards and protective measures connected
with them are identified clearly by symbols and described by the instructions
appertaining to the hazardous substances.


14 Waste Disposal
The Directive on Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment

(WEEE), which entered into force as European law on 13th
February 2003, resulted in a major change in the treatment of
electrical equipment at end-of-life. The purpose of
this Directive is, as a first priority, the prevention of WEEE, and in addition, to
promote the reuse, recycling and other forms of recovery of such wastes so as
to reduce the disposal of waste.
The WEEE logo on the product or on its box indicates that this product must
not be disposed of or dumped with household waste. The owner of the
equipment is liable to dispose of all electronic or electrical waste equipment by
delivering to the specified collection point for recycling of such hazardous
waste, collection and proper recovery of electronic and electrical waste
equipment at the time of disposal will allow the producer to help conserve
natural resources. Recycling of the electronic and electrical waste equipment
will ensure safety of human health and the environment. For more information
about electronic and electrical waste equipment disposal, recovery and
collection points, please contact your local, waste disposal service or producer
/ distributor of this equipment.
If your equipment or replaced spare parts contain batteries or accumulators

please dispose of these separately according to local regulations.
14.1 Recycling
Recycling pass see http://intra.agfanet/cd/ep/ehs.nsf
14.2 Erasing Protected Health Information (PHI)
AGFA HealthCare Field Service Personnel or its authorized affiliates are

responsible for the removal of Protected Health Information (PHI) patient data
from devices, modules or parts that are removed from the customer’s site.
This also applies to the exchange of spare parts, especially to parts that are
returned to central warehouses for repair or refurbishing. Examples for parts
or modules that may contain Protected Health Information (PHI) are:
Computer hard disks, CD-ROMS, backup tapes, archive tapes.


Chapter 1
HEALTHCARE Controls, Connections,
Imaging Services
and Setup Procedures
CR 85-X
Type 5148/100
CR 75.0
Type 5146/105
(as of SN ≥ 6000)

This document contains:
• all important routines to be carried out prior to putting the machine in operation
• location and function of the controls and connectors of the machine
• all routines necessary to put an unpacked machine in operation

► Referenced Documents
Document Title
Service Bulletin CR 75.0 Type 5146/105 (as of SN ≥ 6000) introduced,
DD+DIS028.07E


eq_01_setup_procedure_e_template_v02
DD+DIS378.05E Controls, Connections, and Setup Procedures
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
the equipment.
(2) Strictly observe all safety directions within the "Generic Safety Directions" and
on the product.


LIST OF CONTENTS
1 INTENDED USE OF THE DIGITIZER ......................................................................................5

2 PREPARATIONS BEFORE INSTALLATION ...........................................................................6
2.1 Inspection of Packing................................................................................................................6
2.2 Unpacking the Components......................................................................................................7
2.3 Checking the Accessory Kit ......................................................................................................8
2.4 Removing the Shipping Brackets..............................................................................................9
2.5 Installing the Base Plate .........................................................................................................19
3 CONTROLS AND CONNECTORS.........................................................................................22

4 OPERATION TERMINAL DIGITIZER.....................................................................................23
5 REQUIREMENTS FOR INSTALLATION................................................................................24
5.1 Preconditions ..........................................................................................................................24
5.2 Required Service Programs....................................................................................................24
5.2.1 CCM-Tool................................................................................................................................24
5.2.2 Error Message Program..........................................................................................................25
5.3 Preparations for the Installation ..............................................................................................25
6 INSTALLING THE DIGITIZER................................................................................................26

6.1 Electrical Connection ..............................................................................................................26
6.1.1 Connecting the Power Cord....................................................................................................26
6.1.2 Voltage Adjustment.................................................................................................................26
6.2 Start-up Procedure..................................................................................................................27
6.2.1 Mechanical Start-up ................................................................................................................27
6.2.2 Integrating the Digitizer into an independent, pure ADC Network ..........................................28
6.2.3 Integrating the Digitizer into an existing Network....................................................................29
6.2.4 System Check .........................................................................................................................30
6.3 Backup of the machine specific Data......................................................................................31


7 CONCLUDING THE INSTALLATION.....................................................................................32

7.1 Performing a Handling Cycle ..................................................................................................32
7.2 Erasing image plates ..............................................................................................................32
7.3 Checking the technical Image Quality of the System .............................................................32
7.3.1 Exposure and Evaluation of a Flatfield ...................................................................................33
7.3.2 Evaluation Criteria...................................................................................................................35
7.4 Last Steps ...............................................................................................................................35
8 INSTALLATION OF CR WORKSTATIONS............................................................................36
9 INSTALLATION CHECKLIST .................................................................................................37


NOTE:
The Installation Checklist in the appendix of this chapter gives an overview of all steps
and guides through the complete installation process.
1 Intended Use of the Digitizer

This device must only be used to scan exposed X-ray cassettes, containing an
erasable image plate (IP). This device is part of a system, consisting of X-ray cassettes
with erasable phosphor image plates, an identification station for the cassettes and a
workstation where the resulting digital image information is further processed and
routed. It is intended that this device is only operated in a radiological environment by
qualified staff.


2 Preparations before Installation

2.1 Inspection of Packing
The following actions should be taken upon delivery of the system components,
preferably by the customer:
• Completeness check of the shipment by means of the bill of material (number of
pallets).
• Comparison of the labels on the boxes with the customer's order list and the
shipping papers.
• Checking of the packing material for visible transport damage such as
• dented edges
• damage on the box
• torn fixing elements (metal straps, screws).
NOTE:
In case of damage visible from the outside turn to your local AGFA representative.
• Checking of the attached safety indicators on the packing boxes.
oben - top
white field, if o.k.
450034BM.cdr
figure 1
If the machine was tilted, the arrow head in If the machine was subjected to
the circle of the TILTWATCH changes from shocks, the square field in the
white to red. middle of the SHOCKWATCH
changes from white to red.


2.2 Unpacking the Components

The following actions should be taken by the forwarder upon delivery of the system
components.
• Removal of the outer packing material.
NOTE:
The individual boxes inside must not be opened by the forwarder.
• Taking out the accessories or boxes and storing them in a safe place.
• The digitizer must be taken off the pallet and transported to the installation site.
• Disposal of the packing material.
NOTE:
For unpacking the machine, an area of minimal 200 x 350 cm
(78.8 x 137.89 in) is required.
For lifting the machine off the pallet an area of minimal 100 x 500 cm
(39.4 x 197 in) is required.
If the available space at the installation site is limited, the machine can be unpacked
beforehand and rolled to the installation site.


2.3 Checking the Accessory Kit

The following actions have to be done by the FSE (Field Service Engineer) at the
customer site.
• check the scope of delivery:
Compare the inventory of every component with the packing list which specifies the
complete scope of delivery.
Pieces Description
1 Digitizer
1 base plate
1 installation instructions
1 installation report
1 CR 85-X user manual information (on CD)
1 certificates
6 floppies
1 UTP network cable (2 x RJ45 connection)
1 Allen key, size 8 with extension
1 connection cable (Europe: CEE(7) VII 250 V/16 A)
1 connection cable (USA, Japan: Nema 6-15 P)
2 adjustable bases, riveted


2.4 Removing the Shipping Brackets
CAUTION:
Transportation parts can damage the product.
Remove all transportation parts prior to first operation.
Required Tools:
• Allen key, 8 mm, with extension (included in accessory kit)

• Phillips screw driver, medium size
• Socket wrench, 7 mm
• Scissors
• Wrench, 17 mm


Removing the screws securing the doors
B
514601eg_ab.cdr
figure 2
(1) Unscrew the locking screws at the front of the digitizer (A)
(8 mm Allen key with extension).
(2) Remove the blind flange protecting the RS232 connector. (B)
(3) Then open the doors of the digitizer by turning the handle.


Removing shipping brackets of cassette unit and buffers
7 mm
C
B B
8 mm A
7 mm
514601EC.cdr
figure 3
(1) Remove the metal plate (4 screws, 7 mm socket wrench). (A)

(2) Unscrew the cassette unit from the frame (B) (2 screws, 8 mm Allen key).
(3) Turn the cassette units through 90°. (C)
(4) Remove the two metal brackets (D)
(6 screws on the front and rear side of the cassette units, 7 mm socket wrench).


B C
514601EB.CDR
figure 4
(1) Cut the cable ties on both cassette units. (A)

(2) Cut the cable tie on the deflector of the output buffer. (B)
(3) Cut the cable tie on the feed gate of the input buffer. (C)
(4) Screw on the two adjustable bases (7 mm socket wrench) (D).


Removing shipping brackets of transport units
514601EE.cdr
figure 5
(1) Cut and remove the cable tie (A).

(2) Unscrew two metal plates (2 x 3 screws, 8 mm Allen key) (B).


A
514601ej.cdr
figure 6
(1) Remove the cushioning block between IP transport unit postscan and scan unit
(hardly visible) (A).


Removing shipping brackets from the scan unit
B 5148_Chap01_002.cdr
figure 7
(1) Remove the two Allen screws at the rear of the machine which secure the scan
unit (A). Allen key size 8.
(2) Mount the light-tight tin plate (included in accessory kit) by fastening six Phillips
screws (B).


Sliding Out the Scan Unit
Scan Unit
figure 8
CAUTION:
Risk of injury when removing the scan unit!
To remove the scan unit safely, use the digitizer ramp.
Check that both adjustable feet are touching the ground before removal of the scan unit.
(1) Unlock the scan unit by loosening two quick action closures (1) - only half a
turn.
(2) Slide the scan unit out to its stop


1
5148_Chap01_001.cdr
figure 9
(1) Cut and remove two cable ties. Remove two vibration absorbers at the
photomultiplier 1
(2) Re-insert scan unit and fasten the two quick action closures


5148_Chap01_005.CDR
2
2
figure 10
(1) Unplug the two cables at both IP transport units.

(2) Loosen screws at the securing bar, then press securing bar down.
(3) Slide out the IP transport unit left (postscan), cut the three cable ties and
remove the plastic plate. 1
- Slide out the IP transport unit right (prescan).
(4) Remove the polystyrene blocks from both transport units
very cautiously. 2


2.5 Installing the Base Plate
(1) Mount the base plate with four screws on the floor (recommended, but
not mandatory), see arrows.
514601AC.cdr
figure 11
(2) Move the digitizer onto the base plate.
Take care that the rollers are guided by the rail!
Move the rollers of the digitizer gently to the stop.
514604ae.cdr
figure 12


(3) Turn screws (on both sides, left and right) by hand to their stop, then
screw it in one more turn. Do not give more turns!
514601af.cdr
figure 13
(4) Put the plastic caps on the screws to protect them.
514601ag.cdr
figure 14


(5) Adjust the two bases (17 mm socket wrench).
5148_Chap01_004.CDR
figure 15


3 Controls and Connectors
3 2
5
VDE
UL
4
Twisted Pair
6
5148_Chap01_003.cdr
figure 16
(1) Status indicator

(2) Line switch Digitizer
(3) Port (RS 232 - 25-pin D connector, female D) for the Service PC
(4) Network connection (Twisted Pair)
(5) Mains cable VDE/UL
(6) Supplementary Grounding cable connection
Potential Equalization


4 Operation Terminal Digitizer
515502aa.cdr
figure 17
Display Functions
The key operator level is intended to be used by the normal operator. He uses the
system only to produce diagnostic usable images without the requirement for special
technical skill or background.
Key Function Key Function
• Gives an image the status of • Starts erasing images without

emergency when sending it to the scanning them
Processing Station
• Provides access to advanced key- • Gives access to service level
operator functions functions
• Exits the service level
• Quits the current function, exits a • Confirms the keyboarded input
menu without saving modifications • In case of some non-fatal errors,
• Exit from key-operator mode and confirms that you have noticed this
service level state
• Proceeds with the Digitizer operation
when "LOCKED" condition has
occurred.
• Moves the cursor one position up to • Moves the cursor one position down
previous edit field to next edit field
• Scrolls upwards or increments digits • Scrolls downwards or decrements
in a numeric entry field digits in a numeric entry field
• Scrolls backwards through multiple • Scrolls backwards through multiple
choices within a field choices within a field
• Moves the entry position in a • Moves to entry position in a
numerical field in descending order numerical field in ascending order
(from right digit to left digit) and (from left digit to right digit) and
toggles between values in a field toggles between values within a field.

5 Requirements for Installation

5.1 Preconditions
• the digitizer is at its installation site
• finished pre-installation as described in 5.3
NOTE:
When integrating the digitizer into an existing network, it is necessary to create a
CPF– file beforehand (see Chapter 11, Installation Planning, checklist).
With a pure ADC Network (1 Digitizer, 1 Image Processing Station,
1 Preview/ID Station), the shipment configuration can be used.
5.2 Required Service Programs

The following Software has to be installed on:
• your Service PC or
• the PC of the ID / Preview -Station.
5.2.1 CCM-Tool
The latest version of the CCM - Tool can be downloaded from MedNet.
The CCM - Tool is needed to create and modify the configuration file (adc.cpf) for the
CR 85-X and the other ADC System Components.
IMPORTANT:
Possibility of incorrect software performance.
If there is already a previous version installed on your Service PC, remove the complete
directory as well as the icons.
Installation:
Install by executing "setup.exe"
The CCM Tool will be

installed in directory
"IMOS" or any directory of
your choice.


5.2.2 Error Message Program

The "SHOW ERROR PROGRAM" with the "ERROR.MSG file" translates the CR85-X
error codes into clear text.
The "SHOW ERROR PROGRAM" is a part of IMOS, the "ERROR.MSG file" is loaded
in the Digitizer.
5.3 Preparations for the Installation

The following work should be performed before the system components are installed:
• Laying of the network cables (Ethernet).

• Creation and adaptation of the configuration file adc.cpf, together with the
application specialist.
NOTE:
We recommend, creating and adapting the configuration file adc.cpf, before starting the
installation. This allows you a smooth installation.
For detailed information see ADC System Components, DD+DIS198.00E, chapter 6.2.


6 Installing the Digitizer

6.1 Electrical Connection
6.1.1 Connecting the Power Cord
The digitizer comes with a UL and a VDE power cord.
• Connect the power cord to the machine and to the power supply.
6.1.2 Voltage Adjustment

The digitizer has an automatic voltage selector.
Voltage is adapted automatically as soon as the machine is switched on.
The selected voltage is displayed on a LED at the inner side of the right door.
• Check the correct voltage by means of the LEDs.
GS100-MULTI-
Supply-BD
5146_reg02_008.cdr
figure 18


6.2 Start-up Procedure

6.2.1 Mechanical Start-up
NOTE:
The digitizer must not be connected to a network during the start-up process.
Mechanical Start-Up
Start-Up:
(1) Switch on the digitizer.
(2) Check the operation terminal during the initialization.
While booting for the first time, the message
<Installation not yet confirmed> appears.
(3) Confirm with OK.
(4) After a successful start-up <ready> appears.
(5) Check/adjust date and time in key operator mode.
(6) Choose terminal language in the service menu
<Configure>
<User terminal language>
(7) Store the modified machine-specific data.
Check:
(8) Open the service menu
<Maintenance>
<Handling Cycle>
and check the function of cassette- and plate operation with the machine open.
Each size should run at least one time.
(9) Erase all image plates.
End of Mechanical Start-Up (approx. 30 min.)
NOTE:
In case of any problems during the installation, consult Chapter 3.3 (Troubleshooting)


6.2.2 Integrating the Digitizer into an independent, pure ADC Network
Pure ADC Network (minimum configuration)

• 1 Digitizer
• 1 Processing Station
• 1 Preview/ID Station
In this case the ex factory settings for the IP address (adcc1 192.9.200.200)
are being used.
A new configuration of the machine is not required.
Measures:
Connect the Ethernet.
figure 19
The Digitizer is now integrated to the Network (approx. 15 min).

Proceed with 6.2.4


6.2.3 Integrating the Digitizer into an existing Network
NOTE:
In this case the IP-address has to be adapted to an existing network.
This happens by means of the cpf–file created beforehand.
The following procedure will take approximately 15 minutes.
Integrating into Existing Network

(1) Insert the floppy disk with the configuration file ” adc.cpf”.
(2) Select:
<Install from floppy>
<cpf-File>
(3) Choose a name suggested on the display.
(4) Follow the online instructions.
(5) Connect CR85-X to the Ethernet.
The Digitizer is now integrated into the Network. Proceed with 6.2.4
NOTE:
The cpf – file has to be installed on every device of the system.


6.2.4 System Check
Precondition
The destinations, i.e. Processing Stations, intended for the digitizer, have to be put into
operation and must be obtainable via Ethernet.
System Check
(1) Check whether the Processing Station(s) is/are obtainable.
Service menu:
<Checks>
<Check destinations>
(2) Send a test image to the Processing Station(s).
Key operator menu:
<Send test image>.
End of System Check.


6.3 Backup of the machine specific Data
Backup
(1) Insert a new formatted floppy.
(2) Start the service program.
(3) Select:
<save on floppy>
<Machine specific data>
(4) Start the backup procedure.
(5) Label the floppy as follows:
S/N: <XXX>
Date: <date>
Software- ACP_xxxx
version:
End of Backup.


7 Concluding the Installation

7.1 Performing a Handling Cycle
Perform a handling cycle to check the function of cassettes and image plates.
7.2 Erasing image plates

Erase all image plates prior of first use.
7.3 Checking the technical Image Quality of the System

The hard disk of the digitizer contains three samples showing the minimal required
image quality (2x flatfield).
Two flatfields (Banding, Calibration) can be sent to a printer via Service-Menu
<CHECKS>
<SEND FLATFIELD>
Compare the samples with the images created by you.


7.3.1 Exposure and Evaluation of a Flatfield
Expose a gray field (flatfield) and evaluate the image on the Image Processing Station
and the laser printer.
Criteria: homogenous field, no stripes or other artifacts
Have a new plate of every format exposed twice as follows:
Rotating
Anode x-ray tube
Cathode
514003pm.cdr
figure 20
For exposure, place the cassette in length direction to the X-ray tube, see figure above.
(1) Take 1st exposure

parameters: 12 mAs-75 kV-1.3 m distance, 1.5 mm Cu filter
(2) Turn cassette through 180°.
(3) Take 2nd exposure

parameters: 12 mAs-75 kV-1.3 m distance, 1.5 mm Cu filter
(4) Identify the cassette on the ID Viewer (figure 21):

• In the <Patient name> field, type a name and a cassette format,
e.g. Flatfield 18 x 24.
• In the <First name> field, type the serial number of the digitizer,
e.g. SN1356.
• In the <Birth date> field, type the current date,
e.g. 02012001 (use date format DDMMYYYY for day/month/year).
• In the <Study Group> list, click <SERVICE>.
• In the <Study Type> list, click <system diagnosis>.
• In the <Substudy> list, click <Flatfield>.
• Confirm the Exposure class <200>.


(5) Insert the cassette into the digitizer and print the image on a printer with
a Window Setting of 0.6 without changing the Level Setting.
figure 21 5155_reg09_013.jpg


7.3.2 Evaluation Criteria
Banding Fine white or gray lines in fast-scan direction

Aim: no lines visible or effect revealed less than on sample
Quality less than sample: contact Support Center
NOTE:
Fine white or gray lines can also appear, if there is dust on the scanner
(in slowscan direction) - use the scan-brush for cleaning the scanner.
Calibration / Dark lines or stripes in slowscan direction

Shading Aim: no lines visible or effect revealed less than on sample
Calibration
Quality less than sample: contact your Support Center
7.4 Last Steps
(1) Dispose of all packing material (depending on the country, by the forwarding agent
or by the hospital).
(2) Complete the Installation Report (enclosed to every device) for all system
components and forward it to the regional CSO Manager.
(3) Fill in the enclosed forms "Installation Report" and "Site and System Data".
Forward the filled in installation report and site and system data sheet to your local
data administrator within your NSO.
(4) Hand over the ADC System to the application specialist.
NOTE:
Now the technical part of the installation is finished and the application part begins.
Activities beyond the Checklist for Installation/Machine-Start-up must not be booked on
Task Code INS.


8 Installation of CR Workstations
NOTE:
For detailed information on the installation of CR Workstations see:
NX 1.0 DD+DIS396.06E
CR QS 3.5 DD+DIS302.05E
CR QS 3.0.xx DD+DIS273.04E
ADC QS 2.1.xx DD+DIS135.02E, chapter 1
ADC VIPS DD+DIS198.00E, chapter 3


9 Installation Checklist
No. Step OK
Digitizer Installation and Start-up
1. Confirm installation prerequisites
2. Check consignment of all devices for damage and completeness
3. Remove shipping brackets and install base plate
4. Connect the power cord
5. When first booting: Confirm installation with OK
6. Check date and time in key operator mode
7. Choose terminal language in service menu
8. Make a backup of the machine specific data
9. Check the mechanic components
Perform a "Handling Cycle" to check the function of IPs and cassettes
10. Erase all image plates
11. Network Integration
load the adapted configuration file adc:cpf
select a station name for the digitizer from the display
make a backup of the machine specific data
connect the digitizer to the Ethernet
12. System Integration
- check whether the Processing Station is obtainable:
<Checks> <Check destinations>;
- send a test image to Processing Station: "Send test image" in key
operator menu
13. Check the image quality
send flatfield to a printer:
<Checks> <Send flatfield>
expose two flatfields (calibration and banding)
print flatfields (calibration and banding), compare and evaluate the
printouts
14. Check "Fast Preview" option, if activated
15. Perform system test with practical exposures
16. Hand over the ADC system to the application manager
17. Fill in the form "Site and System Data" and send it to HE-GSO
18. Send the completed "Installation Reports" to the regional service
manager
Remote Access
19. Make connection to Service Host


DD+DIS018.06E (F7.0345.0024.0)
Job No. Installation Report Page 1/2

Customer / Site Technician name Subsidiary
Zip/City Mobile phone: Phone:

Fax:
Product name Type No XXXX / XXX Serial number XX.XX XXXX Software Version
Total installation time Date of installation
Functional troubles / missing parts see page 2
Transport damages (type of transport)
Processed films - used chemicals
Host Modality / Configuration (System components)
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To be filled by the local Customer Support Manager (if there is no access to PowerHelp): To be filled by HE/GSO:
This report describes a complaint: yes no Logistic, delivery, country,

site problem
Damage to persons or property, risks (further specification with check list)
DOA (technical)
Consider this report locally (subsidiary)
Complaint (technical)
This complaint will not be considered, reason: ................................................................
................................................................................................................................. Signature __________________
................................................................................................................................. Complaint report

Date: ............................................. Signature: ............................................... yes, Key-No.: _________________
no, reason:__________________
Any further information required from HE/GSO: yes no
Please forward info to the
Complaint Manager in HE/GSO
To be sent to: AGFA-GEVAERT HealthCare GmbH Department: HE/GSO

D-81536 Munich
Fax + 49 89 6207 7710
DD+DIS018.06E (F7.0345.0024.0)
Installation Report Page 2/2

Functional troubles
Please indicate Serial numbers if accessory types are affected
Missing parts
Source of troubles
Replaced Spare Parts

Please list all defective spare parts, which are considered to be "dead on arrival", on this form.
Add the "Return Label" (Order No.: DD+Return-Tag03), fill in all requested information's including the Job No., mark the "dead on arrival" field
and send the part with the “Return Label” back for return via your logistic department.
Returned spare parts:
Remedy/solution
To be sent to: AGFA-GEVAERT HealthCare GmbH Department: HE/GSO

D-81536 Munich
Fax + 49 89 6207 7710
HEALTHCARE Chapter 2
Imaging Services Functional Description
CR 85-X
Type 5148/100
CR 75.0
Type 5146/105
(as of SN ≥ 6000)

This document explains the functional principle including the functions of the individual
assemblies always under normal conditions without any problems (nominal functional
sequence).
Furthermore it describes the structure and function of specific individual assemblies.

Document Title
DD+DIS028.07E


eq_02_functional_e_template_v02
DD+DIS378.05E Functional Description
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
the equipment.
on the product.


LIST OF CONTENTS
1 DIGITIZER AS A PART OF THE CR SYSTEM ........................................................................6

1.1 CR System Components ..........................................................................................................6
1.2 Work Flow of the CR System....................................................................................................9
2 IMAGE PLATES .....................................................................................................................10

2.1 ADC MD30 Image Plate Principle...........................................................................................10
2.2 CR MD40 General Plate .........................................................................................................11
2.3 CR MM3.0 Image Plate – special Treatments ........................................................................12
3 CASSETTES ..........................................................................................................................13
3.1 CR MD4.0 General Cassette ..................................................................................................13
3.2 CR MD 4.1 FLFS (Full Leg Full Spine) Cassette....................................................................14
3.3 Asymmetric Cassette ..............................................................................................................15
3.4 CR Mammography Cassette...................................................................................................15
3.5 CR MD4.2 Extremities Cassette .............................................................................................17
4 MODULAR STRUCTURE OF THE DIGITIZER......................................................................20

4.1 Overview of Modules ..............................................................................................................20
4.2 Input Buffer..............................................................................................................................21
4.3 Power Unit...............................................................................................................................22
4.3.1 Multi Supply Board..................................................................................................................23
4.3.2 Erasure Control Board ............................................................................................................25
4.4 Output Buffer...........................................................................................................................25
4.5 cPCI-Rack ...............................................................................................................................26
4.5.1 CPU-OBERON........................................................................................................................27
4.5.2 Scan Master Board .................................................................................................................28
4.5.3 cPCI Power Supply .................................................................................................................29
4.5.4 Hard disk .................................................................................................................................30


4.6 Cassette Unit 1 / 2 ..................................................................................................................31
4.7 IP Transport Unit Prescan.......................................................................................................32
4.8 Rotation Unit ...........................................................................................................................33
4.9 Scan Unit.................................................................................................................................34
4.9.1 Optic Module ...........................................................................................................................35
4.9.2 Photomultiplier with acrylic Light Collection Module ...............................................................36
4.10 Erasure Unit ............................................................................................................................37
4.11 IP Transport Unit Postscan .....................................................................................................38
5 CYCLE OF A CASSETTE IN THE DIGITIZER.......................................................................39

5.1 Input Buffer..............................................................................................................................39
5.1.1 Starting the Machine Cycle by inserting a Cassette ...............................................................39
5.1.2 Identification of the Cassette and reading the ID-Data...........................................................39
5.2 Cassette Unit 1/2 ....................................................................................................................40
5.2.1 Taking Cassette in the Cassette Unit .....................................................................................40
5.2.2 Clamping the Cassette............................................................................................................40
5.2.3 Opening the Cassette .............................................................................................................41
5.3 IP Transport Prescan ..............................................................................................................41
5.3.1 Positioning of the Transport Robot .........................................................................................41
5.3.2 Taking out the IP.....................................................................................................................42
5.3.3 Transporting IP to the Scanner ...............................................................................................42
5.4 Rotation Unit ...........................................................................................................................43
5.5 Scan Unit.................................................................................................................................43
5.5.1 Positioning of the IP ................................................................................................................43
5.5.2 Scanning the IP.......................................................................................................................44
5.5.3 Unloading the IP from Scan Unit.............................................................................................45
5.6 IP Transport Postscan / Erasure Unit .....................................................................................46


5.6.1 Positioning of the Robot..........................................................................................................46
5.6.2 Transporting the IP to Erasure Unit ........................................................................................47
5.6.3 Putting the IP back into the Cassette......................................................................................48
5.7 Cassette Unit...........................................................................................................................49
5.7.1 Moving Cassette to Output Buffer...........................................................................................49
5.8 Output Buffer...........................................................................................................................49
5.8.1 Transporting the Cassette to output .......................................................................................49
5.8.2 Putting out the Cassette..........................................................................................................50
6 SOFTWARE ARCHITECTURE ..............................................................................................51

6.1 Diagnostics Software ..............................................................................................................51
6.2 Web Pages..............................................................................................................................53
6.3 Hardware Modification Floppy of Spare Part ..........................................................................53
6.4 Data Flow ................................................................................................................................55
7 CALIBRATION PRINCIPLE....................................................................................................56
7.1 IP Center Calibration (BOL/BOS Adjustment) ........................................................................56
7.1.1 BOL .........................................................................................................................................56
7.1.2 BOS.........................................................................................................................................56
7.1.3 Calibration Procedure .............................................................................................................57
7.2 Shading Calibration.................................................................................................................57


1 Digitizer as a Part of the CR System
1.1 CR System Components
ADC Cassette with image plate inside

The ADC cassette is the “container” for the image plate. During the handling outside the
Digitizer (e.g. exposing the plate) the image plate is in the cassette. It is only opened
inside the Digitizer.
The ADC cassette has an internal chip card which holds the cassette, patient,
examination and routing data belonging to a certain X-ray exposure. The data put
together are called demographic data.
The image plate takes the place of the X-ray film in a conventional system. It receives
the X-Ray radiation and “stores” a latent image. The image plates can be reused
thousands of times. The actual restriction of utilization is the mechanical robustness.
Identification Tablet – CRUS (CR User Station)

The Identification Tablet is used to write the cassette, patient, examination and routing
data to the cassette chip. This data can be entered manually or by retrieving the data
from a Hospital or Radiology Information System (HIS/RIS).
Writing and reading is done by means of radio frequency in a contact less manner.
The Identification software is an AGFA product and implemented in the ADC QS

software.


Digitizers (CR 85-X / CR 75.0 / ADC Compact Plus / CR 25.0 / ADC Solo)
The Digitizer reads the latent image in the image plate. After the ADC cassette is
exposed and identified it is inserted into the Digitizer. The Digitizer reads the data on the
cassette chip, opens the cassette, takes out the image plate and scans it.
The latent image on the image plate is stimulated by means of a laser beam to emit light
according to X-ray exposure.
The data from the cassette chip is used to set the scan parameters correctly (e.g. speed
class, image plate size, etc.) for this individual X-ray exposure.
The emitted light is converted into voltage and then digitalized into a 12/14bit, square
root compressed raw image. This image is transmitted together with the chip data on the
fly via Ethernet to the Processing Station. A backup of that image is made on the internal
hard disk in parallel to retransmit the image in case of transmission problems. The output
format of the Digitizer is DICOM SCU-CR.
After scanning / transmitting is finished the image plate is erased with very bright light to
make it ready for the next exposure. It is put back into the cassette and a status flag on
the cassette chip is set from “EXPOSED” to “ERASED”. The cassette is returned to the
user and is ready for the next examination.


CR Workstations
QS Server Station
The ADC QS 2.0.x/2.1.x (Quality System) Server Station is a Windows NT4.0 based
Workstation with the ADC Quality-System software installed.
The CR QS 3.x (Quality System) Server Station is a Win2000Server or

Win XP-based Workstation with the CR Quality-System software installed.
The QS Server Station receives the raw image from the Digitizer. Every incoming image
runs through an image processing. The processed images are stored on the internal
hard disk(s) of the Server station. The QS Server station only provides short term
storage. The final archiving must be realized either by hardcopies or a PACS.
The QS Server station decodes the routing data and sends the image data to the
selected destinations (e.g. Printer, PACS)
A Softcopy can be sent to an Archive with 8 or 12 bit. To print a Hardcopy a 8 bit format
is used.
For the QS Server station a lot of licensed software options (e.g. Annotation, Print
Composer, etc.) exist.
QS Client Station
The QS (Quality System) Client Station allows identification and basic viewing.


1.2 Work Flow of the CR System
X-ray device
ID-tablet - CRUS
ADC Cassette
with image
plate inside
ID-Data
Digitizer
ID- and Image Data

CR QS
Server/Client
Station
Archive Station
5148_reg02_006.cdr
Printer
figure 1


2 Image Plates
The CR plate can be identified by the plate type and sensitivity code printed on the
back.
2.1 ADC MD30 Image Plate Principle

The image plate lying in the cassette consists of five different layers:
Legend figure 2: Image Plate Structure

1 Protective EBC 1
(electron-beam-cured) top coat 2
5146_reg02_003.CDR
3
2 Phosphor layer 4
3 Anti-halo layer, blue
5
4 Support P.E.T, white
5 Laminate
figure 2
The phosphor layer is “storing” the picture information as energy.

The EBC top coat provides a smooth surface of the image plate to reach a good signal-
to-noise ratio.
Combination of white support layer and blue anti-halo layer increases the sensitivity.
The anti-halo layer lets through the stimulated light but blocks laser light.
The laminate is needed as base material.


2.2 CR MD40 General Plate

CR MD40 Plates are initialized with code 15.
The fourth-generation imaging plate is composed of the following six layers:
figure 3
Improved phosphor layer

The storage phosphors used in the phosphor layer provide high absorption efficiency
and excellent homogeneity, while their short response time ensures the fading of the
previous pixel before stimulating the next one.
A high level of sharpness at all spatial frequencies is thus secured.
Since the phosphor layer has been improved, the ADC MD40 imaging plates ensure
increased image quality for lower doses, such as the 400 speed class.
Additional adhesion layer

Another new feature of the ADC MD40 imaging plate is the introduction of an additional
adhesion layer. This gives the ADC MD40 imaging plate better mechanical stability
than its forerunners, and prevents peeling at the corners.
EBC top-coating technology

Agfa's long experience and extensive research into plate abrasion resistance has led to
a dramatic improvement in EBC top-coating technology. This improved technology has
been used for the ADC MD30 as well as for
the ADC MD40.


White support layer and anti-halo layer

The use of a white support layer in combination with an anti-halo layer gives high
sensitivity. The anti-halo layer is an Agfa-patented blue layer that forms a perfect
barrier against laser light, but lets through the stimulated light.
Downward compatibility
Each ADC MD40 imaging plate is identified by a code on the back.
The ADC MD40, ADC MD30 and ADC MD10 plates can be used together without any
problem.
2.3 CR MM3.0 Image Plate – special Treatments
CAUTION:
Wrong screen cleaner may damage the Image plate.
Do not use the AGFA CR phosphor plate cleaner to clean the CR MM3.0 Mammo
image plates. Use PROSAT wipers instead.
• CR MM3.0 Mammo image plates require dedicated wipers.

• These wipers can only be used once, but different CR MM3.0 Mammo image
plates can be cleaned one after the other with one wiper.
• Storage of the PROSAT wipers:
carefully close the bag of wipers and keep in a cool place (< 25 °C).
• When cleaning CR MM3.0 Mammo image plates, leave the plate surface to dry
for about one (1) minute before putting the plate back into the casette.


3 Cassettes
The principle function of the digitizer is close connected to the structure of the CR
Cassettes. The digitizer accepts only CR Cassettes. All other cassettes, e.g. ADC 70,
are refused.
3.1 CR MD4.0 General Cassette
NOTE:
The cassette must always be inserted into the digitizer in the correct orientation to
make it possible to identify and handle the cassette!
1 2 3
Legend figure 4:
1 ADC label
4
2 ID-Chip carries demographic data
3 Label showing size of Image Plate 5
4 Sliders to prevent from usage in film handling

devices
5 Metal label – silver dot – identifies an 6
ADC Cassette
4
6 ADC Image Plate (gray surface up, white
surface down) figure 4
The ADC label and the label, showing the size of the contained image plate, are put on
for the identification by the user.
The metal label is detected by the digitizer to identify the cassette as an ADC cassette.
The demographic data is at the ID-Station transferred by no-touch radio frequency

tagging to the ID-Chip and is read out in the digitizer. The data is in that way always
linked to the image.
For protection against electrostatic charging and mechanical damage the inner lining of
the cassette is made of felt.


3.2 CR MD 4.1 FLFS (Full Leg Full Spine) Cassette

Specification
To improve the image quality with Full Leg Full Spine (FLFS) images
a FLFS CR Cassette was introduced.
Identification
The FLFS CR Cassettes are with exception of two major differences identical to the
current standard ADC Cassette (35 cm x 43 cm).
The differences are:
• Reduced backscatter protection (minus 1.5 cm at locking and
hinge side)
• Specific FLFS labeling
figure 5
Further points of identification

• All labels are yellow, which is unique for FLFS
• Labeling “FLFS” to identify cassette as type FLFS
• Yellow dots to recognize cassette as FLFS also in buffer or stack I
Format
The FLFS Cassette is available in format 35 cm x 43 cm.


3.3 Asymmetric Cassette

Specification
The Asymmetric Cassette is dedicated for X-ray exposures where no centered

positioning of the part of the body is possible (e.g. side view of a spinal column).
Identification
A cassette for asymmetric scanning

can be identified by a red hatching
covering less than the half of the
cassette side. (see beside) 5146_reg02_004.cdr
figure 6
Formats
The ADC Asymmetric Cassette is available in:

• 21 cm x 43 cm (asymmetric partial scan of dedicated 35 cm x 43 cm cassettes)
3.4 CR Mammography Cassette

Specification
The CR Mammo Cassette is a dedicated cassette for use in combination with CR

Mammo Plates 2.00 for dedicated mammography applications. It features a narrow
hinge to allow scanning right up to the chest wall.
A distinctive feature of the CR Mammo Cassette, in comparison with general ADC

cassettes, is the narrower hinge. This means that there is a closer contact with the
skinline, offering an increased amount of information during scanning.
The CR Mammo Cassette contains a CR Mammo image plate. This type of image plate
has a special phosphor layer which results in reduced noise and increased sharpness.
The cassette is equipped with a positioning mechanism in order to ensure the chest
wall distance to the image plate.


Identification
The cassette is labeled with “Mammo” on both sides.

The cassette is pre-initialized as a Mammo Cassette, but if the identification is lost, it
can be given via the ID Station.
figure 7
1 positioning mechanism for IP (2 x, left and right cassette side)

2 passive suction cup, keeping the IP in place inside the cassette
Formats:
The CR Mammo Cassette is available in two formats:
• 18 cm x 24 cm
• 24 cm x 30 cm


3.5 CR MD4.2 Extremities Cassette
Specification
The CR MD4.2 Extremities system is foreseen for X-ray images of the distal extremities
and adjacent joints (hands and feet) and provides a spatial scan resolution of 50 µm.
Initialization:
• Scan size: 18 x 24 or 24 x 30 cm
• Scan resolution: Very high resolution
The CR MD4.2 Extremities cassettes can only work when digitizer software ACP_4005
or higher is installed on the CR 85-X.
WARNING:
Poor image quality caused by incorrect cassette initialization.
Initialize the cassette/plate as described in the corresponding user manual.
Identification
CR MD4.2 Extremities cassettes can be recognized by the code label
“Extremities - code XX”
The light green dots are dedicated only to the CR MD4.2 Extremities cassette. This
makes it easy to distinguish the cassette from others when stored in a rack.
CAUTION:
Image quality may be inadequate when using wrong cassettes:
Only cassettes with both labels “CR MD4.2 Extremities” and “Extremities code XX” must
be used for the Extremities application
(XX depends on the plate sensitivity SAL).
Other cassettes must not be used.


a b
CR MD4.2 Extremities 2 green dots on side
1 silver dot
Extremities - code XX 1 green dot
5156_dis307.05_001.cdr
Cassette formats
2 green dots 18 x 24 cm or 24 x 30 cm
figure 8: Labeling of the CR MD4.2 Extremities cassette
Formats
New CR MD4.2 Extremities cassettes (available formats 18 x 24 cm and
24 x 30 cm) are delivered with the appropriate initialization:
• Scan size: 18 x 24 or 24 x 30 cm
• Scan resolution: Very high resolution


System Preparation
• Ensure the correct digitizer software has been installed: see Software
Requirements.
You can check this via the digitizer display.
• Ensure the additional shading calibration for Extremities (75 kV,
2 x 10 µGy, Cu filter 1.5 mm as for GenRad) has been performed with a GenRad
cassette 35 x 43 cm
(in the same digitizer sub-menu as for the other shading calibrations)
• Installation of the Extremities-testimage on the digitizer in E:/extremity
The test image is an Extremity image of a hand with wrist. The image
(30 MB) will be provided first via Service MedNet Library:
Path: GSO Library / Computed Radiography / CR Digitizers / CR 25.0 /
Freeware/Extremities testimage
Later on it will additionally be available on a new CR test images CD. Further
information will be distributed.
CR QS software version 3.0.207 or higher must be installed
(check via the Help menu of the CR QS software)
Using the Extremities System
Radiographer
• Cassette should be erased before first usage after delivery
• Same handling as for normal GenRad cassettes in respect of:
o X-ray exposure technique
o Identification of cassette
o Workflow
o Erasure
o According to good radiographer practice - lead markers indicating Left/Right
should be applied
o Cassettes have to be erased if they were not used for 1 - 2 days
(e.g. over weekend)
o Cleaning of image plate with ADC - Screen cleaner, frequency as for GenRad
cassettes or on demand
• Digitizers which do not fulfill the requirements will reject the Extremities cassette
• Dose indicator (lgm value) can be 0.15 points lower than on the same image done
on a GenRad cassette. This is because the phosphor layer of the image plate is a
bit thinner.
Radiologist
• Improved sharpness of the trabecular structure of the bone because of
50 µm pixel size.


4 Modular Structure of the Digitizer

4.1 Overview of Modules
Input Buffer
Power Unit
Output Buffer
cPCI-Rack
Cassette Unit 1 / 2
IP Transport Unit Prescan
Rotation Unit
Optic Module
Erasure Unit
figure 9


4.2 Input Buffer
figure 10
The Input Buffer has a capacity of 10 cassettes which can be queued in front of the
feed gate. The first cassette is detected and the machine cycle starts. To transport the
cassette inside the digitizer the transport belt (1) shifts the cassette, the feed gate
opens and the RF-tag reader reads out the ID- and image specific data.
After the data is read out, the transport roller of the cassette module takes over the
movement of the cassette.


4.3 Power Unit
4
3
figure 11
1 Main switch with over current protection

2 LEDs of Multi Supply Board
3 Interlock switch
4 Transformers
5 Filter of power unit fan
The power supply of the Power Unit is a single phase System, means the cable
connection is a common inlet connector for non-heating apparatus.
The supply voltage for the Power Unit is automatically detected. Therefore for
installation it is not necessary to change any setting manually, but has to be checked
before the first use.
If the interlock switch is active, all the power supplies of mechanical parts and the laser
are interrupted, for safety during service interventions. The power supply of the cPCI-
Rack is placed in the rack itself, so e.g. software updates can be done although the
right door of the power unit is open and the interlock switch is active.


The Power Unit consists of the following main components:

• Multi Supply Board
• Erasure Control Board
• Current Sense Board
• Stepper Motor Transformers
• Erasure Transformer
4.3.1 Multi Supply Board
The Multi Supply Board (MS-Board) controls the mechanical periphery of the digitizer
and protects the stepper motor cards. The supply voltage is detected by the board and
errors are displayed by LEDs.
The following components are controlled by the IO-Bus of the board: The two vacuum
pumps with two magnetic valves on the IP transport units, the parking position function
by using solenoids at the IP transport unit postscan, the fan of the erasure unit and of
the power unit and the voltage selection between 200 V, 208 V and 230/240 V.
LEDs on the inner side of right door at the power unit show the status of the supply
voltages of the power unit:
GS100-MULTI-
Supply-BD
5146_reg02_008.cdr
figure 12
D 42 green LED on:

D 42 yellow LED on: Supply voltage is 230/240 V
D 42 red LED on: Supply voltage is 208 V
Supply voltage is 200 V
D 14 red LED on:
D 14 yellow LED on: Fuses of stepper motor boards Si 1 – Si 12 are okay
D 14 green LED on: +24 V from simple switcher
+5 V from IO-Bus
Additional LEDs are visible if right door and power unit housing is open:


D19 – D32 red LEDs are corresponding to stepper motor fuses where they are placed
next to. The stepper motor supply is protected with a fuse on every stepper motor
board itself (12 in total). The status is shown with a green LED on the side of the power
unit (see figure 11).
D 33 green LED is corresponding to the fuse (Si13) of power supply of simple switcher,
which is placed next to the fuse.
Normal status:
The status of the LEDs, after switching on the digitizer with active interlock switch and
without any error, is:
D19 to D33 LED on immediately,

D14 yellow LED on immediately,
D14 red LED on immediately,
D14 green LED on six seconds after switch on.
D42 green LED on immediately, but after initialization of the supply voltage of the
digitizer one of the three D42 LEDs is on, but always only one.
Example:
Status of the LEDs after initialization of

the supply voltage of 208 V and more
than six seconds after switch on.
GS
5146_reg02_009.cdr
Sup
figure 13


4.3.2 Erasure Control Board

The Erasure-Control-Board controls five transformers to supply the erasure lamps with
power. The lamps are controlled in pairs, so one transformer supplies two lamps. Also
the temperature of the erasure unit is controlled, if the detected temperature is lower
than 85 °C (185 °F), the erasure process can start. If the temperature is higher than 85
°C (185 °F), the process is delayed until temperature has dropped below 75 °C (167
°F). During the delay the erasure unit fan cools the module.
The failure of a lamp is detected by the current sense board, which is also part of the
power unit and is connected to the Erasure-Control-Board.
4.4 Output Buffer
figure 14
The Output Buffer has a capacity of 10 cassettes. The transport rollers at the gate
move the cassette outside. To avoid blocking a lever (1) pushes the cassette aside
which rests in the buffer.
The cassettes which are released are monitored. After the last one the machine cycle
stops.


4.5 cPCI-Rack
7
6
5
4
3 2
figure 15
1 cPCI Rack Fan
2 cPCI Power Supply
3 CPU Oberon
4 Scan Master Board
5 Backplane
6 Hard disk
7 Floppy drive
The cPCI-Rack (compact Peripheral Component Interconnect) consists of the

processing unit CPU, the Scan Master Board, the Power Supply of the cPCI-Rack, a
floppy drive and a hard disk. On top of the rack the fan for cooling the cPCI-Rack is
mounted and on the back the backplane with all the connectors is placed.


4.5.1 CPU-OBERON
The CPU (Central Processing Unit) is a Power PC and is working with an operating
system called Oberon. The interfaces to the service and the Ethernet are placed on the
front plane.
Connector (female) to Service:

Service Interface Serial debug port connector,
(RS232) SuperIO and DUART
Fast Ethernet Controller:

RJ45 connector, Fast Ethernet with
Connector to Fast
10 to 100 Mbit/s
Ethernet
LED (3 green, 2 yellow, Software controllable with Portex

1 red) Software control tool
2
3
LED (FPGA NOT Conf. Hardware related signaling:

Green, TRAFFIC
Ethernet Traffic – yellow LED
yellow, Ethernet LINK
red) Hardware control Ethernet linked – red LED
FPGA not configured – green LED
Halt Switch HALT: Abort action
Reset Switch RESET: Global reset
figure 16


4.5.2 Scan Master Board

The Scan Master Board controls the main functions of the digitizer which are related to
the image data acquisition. The board has to support two operating levels, low
resolution and high resolution. Therefore timing, frequency and converters need to be
controlled.
Photomultiplier Tube Control:

Controls the Photomultiplier itself, the
Connector (female)
high voltage settings and receives the
to Photomultiplier
current/voltage (I/V) converter signal.
Tube
Polygon Control:
Controls via the Polygon the deflection
Connector (female)
of the laser beam on the image plate,
to Polygon
controls the rotational speed and
detects the facets.
RF-Tag Reader Control:
Controls the transmitter and receiver
Connector (male)
signals for reading out demographic
to RF-Reader
data of the ADC Cassette.
User terminal Control:
Controls the user terminal via a 20 mA
Connector (female)
interface.
to User terminal
Connector (female) IO-BUS Control:
to IO-Bus Provides the IO-BUS with power and
is connected via eight data lines and
three control lines to the IO-BUS.
Connector (male) Laser diode Module Control:

to Laser Diode Controls the power supply of both laser
Module diodes of the laser module, controls
the power switch of the laser diodes,
5146_reg02_013.cdr
controls Begin-of-Line Signal and
Laser-Power-Monitor board.
figure 17


4.5.3 cPCI Power Supply
Legend to the LEDs

below, showing the
Output voltages
Green LEDs to
monitor power supply
5146_reg02_014.cdr
figure 18
During normal operation the LEDs monitor 5.1 V and 3.3 V voltage levels.
The power supply of the cPCI Rack is not interrupted by the interlock switch. This
independent supply makes it possible to update software or work out other actions at
the rack while both doors of the digitizer are open.


4.5.4 Hard disk

The gray rectangle in the partition map marks the directories which are only necessary
for remote control via http access.
Directories and
Partitions Files Annotations
subdirectories
*.BAT
batch and
C: *.SYS
STARTUP.COM
system files
*.PRG program files
ERROR.MSG error message files
*.ESX tables
CGI-BIN *.PRG program files
DL *.zip zip files
PUBLIC *.html html files
*.GIF
IMAGES *.JPG
AOS.LOG current log file

D: ADC.CPF
*.AXX
*.CXX configuration files
*.UXX
ICN_XXXX.DAT infocounter (binary form)
ICN.DAT
5148<S/N>.ICN infocounter (text form)
*.TBL tables
*.SHD calibration files
*.SWP sweep curve
*.TEMP
temporary files
HTTPTEMP.OUT
E:
FLATFLD CONTROL.DAT
IMAGE.DAT
FLATFLD2 CONTROL.DAT
IMAGE.DAT
TESTIMG CONTROL.DAT test image

(Collection of diagnostic images)
IMAGE.DAT
TSHEET CONTROL.DAT testsheet of the optimum

IMAGE.DAT image quality
FLD00001 CONTROL.DAT image control file + demographic data

IMAGE.DAT image data
STATUS
TAGFILE change of status
STATUS only when emergency mode is activated

STATUS only when emergency mode is activated
LOG *.SES session files
temporary directory
SCCTEMP 5146_reg02_015.cdr
figure 19


4.6 Cassette Unit 1 / 2
4
2
3
figure 20
1 5fold stepper motor boards (inside)

2 Cassette Module 2
3 Cassette Module 1
4 Opener mechanism
5 Transport roller
6 Transport belt
The Cassette Unit 1 or 2, depends on which one is at the input buffer, fixes and holds
the cassette during the IP is taken out and scanned. An opener mechanism for the
cassette is also part of each unit. The Cassette Units 1and 2 together are supported
and turned by the rotation unit.
On the inner side of each of the Cassette Units is a 5fold stepper motor board placed,
which controls the motors of the corresponding unit.


4.7 IP Transport Unit Prescan
1
2
figure 21
1 Vacuum unit
2 Suction arms
3 Guide plate
The IP transport robot takes the IP out of the cassette and leads it along the guide
plate to the optic module. The transport robot is guided in the frame of the unit.


4.8 Rotation Unit
51
46
_re
g0
2_
01
8.C
DR
2
figure 22
1 Rotational drive
2 Stepper motor board
The rotation unit rotates the Cassette Units by 180° to bring the empty cassette from
the input side to the output side, for putting back the scanned and erased image plate
inside the cassette.


4.9 Scan Unit
figure 23
1 Photomultiplier tube with acrylic light collection module

2 Optic module with Laser, Polygon
3 Slow scan motor
4 5fold stepper motor scan unit
The function of the scan module is to stimulate a two dimensional, X-ray exposed
phosphor image plate with laser energy. Out of the blue light, which is emitted by the
phosphor, a digital image is generated.
The stimulation of the image plate is done pixel by pixel. Therefore the laser beam is
moved. The laser power on the focal plane is 50 mW + 5 %. The movement in the x-
axis is achieved by a rotating polygon mirror (fast scan direction) which is part of the
optical path. The movement in the y-axis is done mechanically by transporting the
image plate (slow scan direction) with two pairs of rolls.
The Scan mode 2 µs is used for 35 cm x 43 cm high resolution scanning.
A 1 µs scan mode has been established already in ADC Compact Plus for
35 x 43 cm cassettes standard resolution.
This principle has been enhanced in CR85-X to small formats < 35 x 43 cm.
Consequently, the throughput increases because of reduced scan time.
The 1 µs scan mode option can be switched on in the key operator menu.

4.9.1 Optic Module
Optic Module Housing

The housing is made of cast aluminum witch is electrical isolated to the ground plate.
The cover is made of conductive material to achieve electromagnetic compatibility
(EMC). The housing of the optic module stays closed in the field and no service needs
to be done inside.
Laser Diodes
The optic module contains a monochromatic anamorph scan optic where the laser
beam is modified. The light source which is stimulating the image plate is a red laser
diode, with a wavelength from 650 nm to 670 nm and a maximal output of 80 mW (see
1 in figure below), which results in 50 mW laser power on the surface of the image
plate. The increase and decrease time of the laser power is shorter than 20 µs. The
beam of the laser diode has a spot diameter of 60 µm on the scan surface.
3
2
Fa
s ts
ca
4 nd
ire
c tio
51
n
48
_c
ha
p2
_0
02
.cd
r
figure 24
1 Laser beam
2 Mirror for deflecting a small part of the laser energy to 3
3 Sensor for power sense and regulation of the laser energy
4 Polygon
Polygon
The Polygon (see 4 in figure above) has 6 facets, each with a mirror. It is turned by a
DC motor which is clock pulsed from the scanning hardware. Pixel times between 2.5
and 0.6 µs can be reached, but for scanning are two times used, 1 and 2 µs.

4.9.2 Photomultiplier with acrylic Light Collection Module
5148_02_007.cdr
figure 25
The detector module consists of an acrylic light collection module, an optical filter and a
photomultiplier module (PMM).
The acrylic light collection module, the optical filter and the PMM are cemented
together in order to obtain the maximum available light
collection efficiency.
The acrylic light collection unit consists of an acrylic light guide, a collection mirror and
a mechanical mount supporting simple exchange of the detector module.
The aim of this development is to provide high image quality for EUREF compliance
with a detector that can be integrated in a digitizer with maximum similarity to the CR
75.0 digitizer. The image quality is increased by improved light collection efficiency with
an acrylic light guide.


4.10 Erasure Unit
3
4
figure 26
1 Halogen lamps (Philips CAPSULEline Pro)

2 Grid for cooling by erasure unit fan
3 KG2 filter for heat protection
4 Front glass (UV filter with sensitive gelatin layer)
The lamps are controlled by the erasure control board and the CS board. The lamps
are controlled during work in pairs and also the power supply of 12 V is generated via 5
single transformer. By initialization of the digitizer every lamp is controlled separately.
For erasing the image plate a power input of in total 1000 Watt with 230 V / 50 Hz is
present.
The erasure unit fan (placed in the cPCI Rack) is switched on from the MS board at the
same time the lamps are switched on. After the last scanned and erased image plate
the fan is running a certain time for cooling down the unit.
The lamps are already switched on for 0.5 s before the IP reaches the erasure window.
The speed the IP is transported past the erasure unit is varied between image plate
begin and end for optimized homogeneity – dependent on speed class and format
(Erasure energy per time is determined by means of the demographic data). An image
plate format of 35 x 43 cm is transported centered past the erasure front glass. The
maximal distance from image plate to erasure front glass is 20 mm + 5 mm.
Erasing process is not taking place if scan is in progress or the temperature switch is
detecting to high values and interrupts for a cooling delay.


4.11 IP Transport Unit Postscan
figure 27
1 Guide plate
2 Rocker for parking position
3 Suction arms
4 Vacuum unit
The IP transport robot leads the IP along the guide plate and puts the IP back to the
cassette in the cassette unit.
The transport robot is guided in the frame of the unit. To move the suction arms back in
working position without a conflict with the next IP coming out of the scanner, the robot
is moved in a parking position.


5 Cycle of a Cassette in the Digitizer

5.1 Input Buffer
5.1.1 Starting the Machine Cycle by inserting a Cassette
An ADC Cassette with an exposed Image

Plate (IP) inside is set in correct orientation
into the input buffer.
The light barrier GS516 (long distance light
barrier) recognizes the cassette and starts
the mechanical process of the digitizer.
A belt drive, moved by motor M514, retracts
the cassette and the feed gate opens, run by
motor M513.
The light barrier GS518 detects when the
cassette is retracted.
figure 28
5.1.2 Identification of the Cassette and reading the ID-Data
The silver dot at the bottom of the ADC

Cassette is identified by the reflex light barrier
GS540. If no dot is detected the cassette is
refused.
The ID-Data are read out from the chip on the
cassette by the RF tag antenna GS538 (1)
and the corresponding board (2). 1
2
figure 29


5.2 Cassette Unit 1/2

5.2.1 Taking Cassette in the Cassette Unit
The transport roller (2), moved by motor

M201/M206, brings the cassette completely 1
into the cassette unit.
2
The light barriers GS220 / GS270 recognize
the cassette and start the belt motor M205 / 3
M210 to transport the cassette.
The light barrier GS222 / GS278 (long
distance light barriers) (1) detects when the
cassette is retracted to the cassette unit.
The light barrier GS224/GS274 (3) activates
the clamping mechanism.
figure 30
5.2.2 Clamping the Cassette

The cassette is lowered by M202/M207 when
a signal of the light barrier GS214/GS265
comes in.
In the lowered position the light barrier
GS224/GS274 for starting the clamp
mechanism detects the cassette. The clamp
motion is run by M203/M208.
The light barrier GS230/GS280 detects when
the cassette is clamped.
1
In the clamped position the light barrier
2
GS228 / GS277 detects the start for the
opening mechanism (2).
figure 31


5.2.3 Opening the Cassette
The cassette lid is opened by the stepper

motors M204/M209 with a certain number of
steps.
1
The cassette stop switch GS226/ GS276 is
set.
figure 32
5.3 IP Transport Prescan

5.3.1 Positioning of the Transport Robot
Transport robot prescan moves out of start

position, detected by GS432, upwards to the
cassette unit by motor M403. The working
position of the robot is detected by GS430. 1
The suction arms (1) are moved in the right
position by motor M402. The positioning of
the suction cups on the IP (2) is detected by 2
GS 426 and GS424.
The vacuum pump GS420 (3) starts to build
up low pressure.
figure 33


5.3.2 Taking out the IP
By opening the magnetic valve MG422 the

vacuum is transferred to the suction cups and
the IP is sucked.
The IP is taken out of the cassette and
moved down to the scan unit by motor M403.
By passing the light barrier GS432 the scan 1
rollers open and start to turn, driven by motor
M621.
figure 34
5.3.3 Transporting IP to the Scanner
The transport robot prescan transports the IP

to the scan unit.
1
The vacuum stops, the IP (2) is falling down
2
and is guided to the scan rollers (1).
figure 35


5.4 Rotation Unit
While the IP is scanned the cassette unit is

turned 180° by M212. The starting position is 1
detected by GS206, the final position after
turning by GS204.
The cassette itself stays clamped on the
same cassette unit.
Therefore the IP returns after the scan and 2
erasure process into the same cassette it was 3
placed before.
5146_REG02_030.CDR
figure 36
5.5 Scan Unit

5.5.1 Positioning of the IP
The IP is positioned for the scan process by

motor M622 moving the alignment fingers (1).
The position is checked by light barrier
GS616. 1
The IP is loaded into the scan unit and the

slow scan process is started by GS626 (long
distance light barrier), giving the begin of
scan signal (BOS). 1
If also the begin of line signal, activated when

the laser touches a PIN diode inside the optic
module, is given the scanning starts.
figure 37


5.5.2 Scanning the IP
The IP is moved through the scanner by 1

M702.
3
The scan process is split into a fast and a 2
slow scan direction.

The laser power of the laser diodes are lead
to the IP via optical lenses and a polygon.
The light emitted from the IP is transferred by Fa
s ts
ca
a light collector module to the photo 4 nd
ire
c tio
multiplier. 51
48
_c
n
ha
p2
_0
02
.cd
r
figure 38


5.5.3 Unloading the IP from Scan Unit
After the scan process, the IP is detected by

GS614 (2) and positioned by motor M612
moving the alignment mechanics (1). The
position is controlled by light barrier GS612.
figure 39
5148_Chap02_008.CDR
figure 40


5.6 IP Transport Postscan / Erasure Unit
5.6.1 Positioning of the Robot
The transport robot postscan is moved by the

motor M401 out of the start position, detected
by light barrier GS416, into working position
controlled by GS414.
The suction arms are positioned by motor
M400. The start position of the suction arms
is detected by the light barrier GS410 and the
final position of GS408.
The vacuum pump GS402 of the transport
robot postscan starts.
To suck the IP the magnetic valve MG411 is
opened.
figure 41


5.6.2 Transporting the IP to Erasure Unit
The IP (1) is moved by motor M401 of the

transport robot postscan to the erasure unit 2
(2).
The erasure process starts, if there is no 1
cooling delay necessary.
figure 42
The IP passes the erasure lamps (3) in a 1

certain speed. The speed is dependent on
the format of the cassette. This information is 2
given by the chip on the Cassette and was 3
read out at the beginning of the cycle.
There are different speeds to vary
homogeneity and intensity of the erasure
effect on the IP.
The image information (2) on the IP is
erased and the blank IP (1) can be used for
another X-ray exposure.
figure 43


5.6.3 Putting the IP back into the Cassette
The suction arms of the transport robot

postscan put the IP back into the cassette.
The vacuum stops and the suction cups are
sliding away from the IP.
For the direction of the movement, see the
arrows in figure beside.
figure 44
The suction arms are moving away from the

IP, driven by motor M400 (1) and the robot
goes back to parking position by M401 (2). 1
2
The way to the parking position is guided by
opening the two magnetic valves MG401 and
MG402 on the guiding rail of the transport
unit frame.
The parking position is detected with one light
barrier on each side, GS404 and GS406. This
movement is shown in the lower cycle of
figure 35.
In this position the suction arms are moved to
the right angle to take the next IP.
The robot moves finally in start position to
wait for the next IP.
figure 45


5.7 Cassette Unit
5.7.1 Moving Cassette to Output Buffer
Closing, unclamping and lifting the cassette

upwards, works in reverse order than
described at 4.2.2 and 4.2.3 of this chapter.
The cassette is closed by motor M204/M209
and the closed status is detected by light
barriers GS228/GS277.
The clamping (1) is removed by motor
M203/M208 and detected by light barriers for 1
clamping position GS230/GS280 and start
position GS224/274.
The motor M202/M207 of the cassette unit
transports the cassette upwards.
The transport belt is turned by M205/M210 to
move the cassette to the output buffer. The
position of the belt is detected by the light figure 46
barrier GS220/GS270.
5.8 Output Buffer

5.8.1 Transporting the Cassette to output
The transport belt of the cassette unit (1)

moves the cassette to the output buffer.
The cassette is detected at the output buffer
by GS558. 1
The transport roller, powered by motor M515

and controlled by light barrier GS564, brings
the cassette outside the output buffer.
figure 47


5.8.2 Putting out the Cassette
The light barrier GS560 (long distance light

barrier) recognizes the end of the cassette
cycle.
To avoid a blockade of cassettes by scanning
one after another, the lever (1) of the output
1
buffer, controlled by light barrier GS554 and
powered by motor M516, pushes the out
coming cassette aside.
figure 48


6 Software Architecture
6.1 Diagnostics Software

The Diagnostics Software is a tool which helps to find defective parts in the digitizer. A
dialog with requests and questions via the display guides you through the test of a
module.
All components of a module (light barriers, boards, motors, valves, mechanics…) are
checked during a test. If the result is satisfying, the module is working in a normal
operating mode. If a problem is detected a problem description and a repair proposal
comes up on the display.
Modules tested by Diagnostics Software:
Input buffer and R/F-TAG Opens input door and moves cassette to
position 'silver dot detection'; tests R/F-Tag
reading and writing.
Identified cassette 35 x 43 cm is for this test
needed!
Cassette module 1 Turns cassette module 1 to right side; opens,

clamps and closes cassette; turns cassette
module 1 to left side and shifts cassette out.
A cassette 35 x 43 cm is for this test needed!
Cassette module 2 Turns cassette module 2 to right side; opens,

clamps and closes cassette; turns cassette
module 2 to left side and shifts cassette out.
A cassette 35 x 43 cm is for this test needed!
Rotation unit Turns cassette module 1 to right side and

then cassette module 2 to right side.
Prescan transport+vac. Opens cassette on right side; tests prescan

valves, vacuum pump and vacuum switch;
moves robot up to cassette module; sucks
image plate and releases it again; moves
robot down to scanner; closes cassette again.
A cassette 35 x 43 cm with an image plate
inside is for this test needed!


Scanner Turns scanner rollers; moves

pre-/post-alignment drives and rollers-lift
home.
Postscan transport Clamps cassette on right side and turns

cassette to left side; tests postscan valves,
vacuum pump and vacuum switch; moves
robot up to cassette module; sucks image
plate and releases it again; moves robot
down to scanner; closes cassette again and
shifts cassette out.
A cassette 35 x 43 cm with an image plate
inside is for this test needed!
Erasure unit Switches on fan, then switches on all 10

lamps.
Image transmission Checks which destinations are responding,

sends the test image to all responding
destinations and checks the result of the
image transmission. Considers rerouted
destination.


6.2 Web Pages

The Software of the digitizer allows access from the Internet to the service level of the
machine. The access via a graphic User Interface (ADC web pages) is part of the
service concept of HE GSO. The web pages follow the structure of the well-known
User Terminal.
Access via web pages guarantees a convenient and fast service by making use of
standard tools. The usage of different ports for these ways allows working
simultaneously with FTP, HTTP, and TelNet.
Further information, see Chapter 3.2
6.3 Hardware Modification Floppy of Spare Part

Spare parts which are sent with a floppy, need to be included in the system via
software. The floppy e.g. of the optic module contains specific settings of production
calibration and data of the spare part. This information need to be installed after the
spare part is mounted in the digitizer. For other spare parts sent with a floppy only the
information for the info counter is included.
The floppy is put into the floppy drive of the cPCI-Rack and the installation starts
automatically. The information concerning the spare part is integrated in the system.


figure 49
6.4 Data Flow
IP data
Cassette data Conversion of
Exposure emitted light
Destination into current
Patient
R/F Tag on the cassette Photomultiplier
Conversion from current to voltage

in the I/V - converter
Calculation of: Signal compression for grey scale

Scanspeed coordination (square rooted)
Voltage for high tension of PMT
Antialiasing-filter-frequence
Signalfiltering to avoid aliasing

Revolutions per minute of Polygon
Conversion from analog to

Voltage adaptation for high tension of PMT digital (14bit)
Start of scan with slow scan

speed = constant
Scan Master board
Raw image data and

demographic data via network to Raw image data in RAM
processing station
5146_reg02_056.cdr
figure 50


7 Calibration Principle
There are two different calibrations to work out with the CR85-X in the field:
• the IP Center Calibration, which is necessary after replacement of the optic

module or a change on the mechanical adjustment of the “begin of scan” sensor,
and the Shading Calibration which is responsible for the image quality and
follows always after an IP Center Calibration.
7.1 IP Center Calibration (BOL/BOS Adjustment)

The IP center calibration adjusts two different scan signal settings in one process, the
begin of line (BOL) signal for the fast scan direction and the begin of scan (BOS)
signal for slow scan direction. Both signals in combination are responsible for the area
which is scanned and where pixels are created.
7.1.1 BOL
The BOL sensor is a pin diode placed in the optic module. It controls the switching off
and on of the laser. The sensor is beside the IP, therefore the laser beam hits the
sensor before the IP. Out of the defined distance between the sensor and the border of
the IP the moment of reading out the pixel lines on the IP is set.
7.1.2 BOS
The BOS sensor is a long distance light barrier which is placed at the bottom part of the
scan unit. The light barrier gives the signal to start the scan process in slow scan
direction. When the IP reaches the sensor it is detected and then passes a fixed
distance to the begin of scan line, then the scan process starts.


7.1.3 Calibration Procedure
The IP center calibration is

worked out with an IP format
smaller than 35 x 43 cm. In
BOS
reference to this biggest format
BOL BOL
the borders around the scanned
IP are detected.
IP
e.g. 24 x 30 cm
format
The distance corresponding to the
BOS signal is measured from the
geometrical reference to the Area covered by
border where the scanning of the a 35 x 43 cm IP
IP starts. The ideal distance is (reference)
defined with 5 mm.
5146_reg02_059.cdr
The both distances measured to
adjust the BOL signal must be figure 51
equal, means the IP is scanned in
centered position.
7.2 Shading Calibration

Inhomogeneties of the light collector and the photomultiplier require a position
dependent calibration of the scan line. This pixel wise line calibration evens out
differences in the transmission behavior of the light collector by calculation.
Each scanned pixel in a line is corrected arithmetically by its corresponding correction

value (shading correction). This is done for each of the three speed classes 600, 200,
and 75.
A number of lines of a flat field image are averaged and scaled to the maximum pixel
value. All the lines need to be in a certain range to make the calibration successful, if
not the error is displayed at the user terminal.


The calibration curves

can be viewed by using
a web browser.
(see chapter 3.2)
Three curves for each

format are displayed in
one image and
distinguished by three figure 52
different colors.
The y-axis of the coordinate system shows the Scan Average Level (SAL) which is the
digital value (gray scale) of a pixel and is one of the criteria for a successful calibration.
The x-axis shows the number of pixels.


Chapter 3.1
HEALTHCARE Repair and Service
Imaging Services
Safety Guidelines / General Repair Instruction
CR 85-X
Type 5148/100
CR 75.0
Type 5146/105
(as of SN ≥ 6000)

This document contains safety guidelines, general repair instructions and contains all
product specific safety notes of this Service Documentation.

2.0 02-2007 • Layout changes as this Service Documentation is also
valid for CR 75.0 Type 5146/105 (as of SN ≥ 6000).
• Some Generic Safety directions have been removed as
they are available in “Generic Safety Directions”
document
• Product specific safety notes have been updated
Document Title
Service Bulletin. CR 75.0 Type 5146/105 (as of SN ≥ 6000) introduced,
DD+DIS028.07E


eq_03-1_safety-repair_e_template_v02
Repair and Service
DD+DIS378.05E Safety Guidelines / General Repair Instruction
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
the equipment.
on the product.

Edition 2, Revision 0 CR 85-X Type 5148/100 Chapter 3.1 / 2

Repair and Service
LIST OF CONTENTS
1 SAFETY DIRECTIONS.............................................................................................................4
1.1 General .....................................................................................................................................4
1.2 To be considered upon Repairs on the Digitizer.......................................................................4
1.3 To be considered with mechanical Tests of Stepper Motor controlled Drive Units .................4
1.4 Safety Instructions for Laser Products......................................................................................5
1.5 Safety Instructions for Cassette Unit ........................................................................................5
1.6 Safety Switch of the Digitizer ....................................................................................................6
1.7 Protective Measures for Electronic Components......................................................................7
2 PRODUCT SPECIFIC SAFETY NOTES ..................................................................................8

2.1 Safety Notes for Installation ......................................................................................................8
2.2 Safety Notes for Cassettes and Image Plates ..........................................................................9
2.3 Safety Notes for Replacement of Parts ..................................................................................10
2.4 Safety Notes for Maintenance.................................................................................................12
3 MARKINGS AND LABELS .....................................................................................................13

3.1 Type Label ..............................................................................................................................14
3.2 Warning Label on the Input Buffer of the Digitizer ..................................................................15
3.3 Warning Label on the Erasure Unit.........................................................................................16
3.4 Warning Label on the Photomultiplier Module ........................................................................17


Repair and Service
1 Safety Directions
1.1 General
With every repair work check the following points visually:
• Condition of the insulation of the mains plug / mains cable.

• Effects of the strain relief for the mains cable.
• Efficiency of the protective earth on metal panel parts
(protective earth connected and spring contacts OK).
• Correct condition of the protection covers.
1.2 To be considered upon Repairs on the Digitizer

The machine must be protected against accidental activation during repair work. For
this purpose we recommend to attach the following sign on the main switch while
repairing the machine.
Do not
activate! Repairs in progress!
Location:......................
Repairs in
progress. Sign must only be removed by:
..................
figure 1
1.3 To be considered with mechanical Tests of Stepper Motor controlled

Drive Units
If a stepper motor driven shaft must be turned for checking a mechanical function,
make sure to disconnect the stepper motor first on the corresponding control board. (to
avoid destruction of the stepper motor control board by induction).
If this is not possible, turn the stepper motor only slowly.


Repair and Service
1.4 Safety Instructions for Laser Products
figure 2
WARNING:
Laser beam! Risk of serious eye damage!
Avoid direct and indirect eye contact.
Do not open the optic module.
Do not hold any tools in the laser beam - risk of reflection.
Observe the CAUTION instructions on the Optical Module label
figure 3
1.5 Safety Instructions for Cassette Unit
DANGER:
Risk of injury from moving parts of rotation drive.
The rotation drive turns very quickly!
Keep hair, hand and clothing clear when machine is running with the doors open.


Repair and Service
1.6 Safety Switch of the Digitizer

The digitizer has one safety switch (interlock switch) to ensure the customer's safety.
figure 4
The power supply for all electronic components, except the PCI-Rack, is interrupted
when the Digitizer is opened. The PCI-Rack remains energized in order to allow file
uploads/downloads.
WARNING:
If the safety switch is overridden with a service key there are risks of injuries.
Keep your hair, hands and garments away from the device.
Remove service key before the device is handed over to the customer.
Laser beam! Risk of serious eye damage!
Avoid direct and indirect eye contact with the laser beam.
Do not hold any tools in the laser beam - risk of reflection.
Consider that the service key must be removed again before the doors are closed.
After use of the service key, the function of the safety switch has to be checked.


Repair and Service
1.7 Protective Measures for Electronic Components
CAUTION:
Static discharge! Electrical components may be destroyed:
For the repair on electrical components, wear a grounding strap (CM+9 9999 0830 0)
around the wrist and connect the other end of this strap on a grounded conducting metal
piece.
Since there is a frequent problem with electrical components which are destroyed by
static discharge, protective measures must be taken to avoid this problem. For the
repair on electrical components it is necessary to wear the grounding strap around the
wrist and connect the other end of this strap on a position of the frame which is free of
lacquer.
Be attentive, that the frame is grounded!


Repair and Service
2 Product specific Safety Notes
2.1 Safety Notes for Installation
CAUTION:
Transportation parts can damage the product.
Remove all transportation parts prior to first operation.
CAUTION:


Repair and Service
2.2 Safety Notes for Cassettes and Image Plates

Observe great care whenever removing the image plate from the
ADC Compact cassette. Refer to the cleaning procedure described in the user manual.
CAUTION:
WARNING:
CAUTION:
Image quality may be inadequate when using wrong cassettes:
Only cassettes with both labels “CR MD4.2 Extremities” and “Extremities code XX”
must be used for the Extremities application
(XX depends on the plate sensitivity SAL).
Other cassettes must not be used.


Repair and Service
2.3 Safety Notes for Replacement of Parts
WARNING:
Risk of electric shock!
Switch off the digitizer before performing any service interventions at the digitizer.
CAUTION:
Do not try to unscrew the screw in the left upper position (see arrow)!
It is secured by lacquer.
CAUTION:
WARNING:
Make sure that the digitizer is switched off, before you remove the optic module.
CAUTION:
Check that both adjustable feet are touching the ground before removal of the scan
unit.


Repair and Service
CAUTION:
Risk of damage!
Photomultiplier and light collector are glued and must be treated as one component.
WARNING:
Switch off the digitizer and disconnect the machine from the mains.
Safety instructions for electronical parts see Chapter 3.1
DANGER:
The rotation drive turns very quickly!
Keep hair, hand and clothing clear when machine is running with the doors open.


Repair and Service
2.4 Safety Notes for Maintenance
CAUTION:
Risk of damaging the scan unit.
Do not remove the scan rollers. Clean the scan rollers in place by moving the slow scan
motor manually.
CAUTION:
Risk of damage when using wrong cleaning method.
Do not use any fluid for cleaning of the inner side of the large glass plate since it is
coated with a gelatin layer.
CAUTION:
WARNING:


Repair and Service
3 Markings and Labels
Type B equipment:
Indicates that the CR 85-X complies with the limits for type B equipment.
Supplementary protective earth connector:
Provides a connection between the CR85-X and the potential equalization busbar of the
electrical system as found in medical environments. This plug should never be unplugged
before the power is turned off and the power plug has been removed.
Intergrounding connector:
Provides a connection between the Digitizer and other equipment which might exhibit
minor ground potential differences. These differences may degrade the quality of
communication between different equipment. Never remove connections to this terminal.
Protective earth (ground):
Provides a connection between the Digitizer and the protective earth of the mains. Do not
remove this connection, because this will have a negative influence on the leakage
current.
Power on
Power off:
Note that the power cord has to be disconnected from the wall outlet in order to
disconnect the unit entirely from the mains.
CAUTION:
Precautions for use in USA only:
Make sure that the circuit is single-phase center-tapped, if the Digitizer is connected to a
240 V / 60 Hz source instead of a 120 V / 60 Hz source.


Repair and Service
3.1 Type Label
The CR 85-X has two type labels applied to frame

• One at the upper left corner of the frame
• One at the rear side beneath the power supply socket (see figure 5)
Manufacturer: AGFA - GEVAERT N.V.

Septestraat 27 - 2640 - Mortsel - BELGIUM
Type 5148/100 SN xxxxx JJJJ-MM

200-240V 8.5 A 50-60Hz
MEDICAL ELECTRICAL
EQUIPMENT
WITH RESPECT TO
ELECTRIC SHOCK, FIRE, 0413
AND MECHANICAL
HAZARDS ONLY IN
ACCORDANCE WITH Made in Germany
UL60601-1 / Peissenberg
CAN/CSA C22.2 NO.601.1
9F03
MMMM-JJJJ
5148_Chap3.1_004.CDR
5148_Chap3.1_004
figure 5


Repair and Service
3.2 Warning Label on the Input Buffer of the Digitizer
Risk of injury during cassette insertion:

Fingers if they are caught between the cassette and the edge of
the input slot may become trapped.
Insert the cassette in the input buffer as described in the
User Manual.
At all times, keep your fingers clear of the input slot.
Note warning label at the Input buffer of the digitizer. figure 6: Warning label
(25 mm x 25 mm)
The warning label (see figure 6) is placed in the upper left corner of the front side of the
input buffer; details see figure 7.
3mm
5mm
Feed Gate
figure 7: Label position


Repair and Service
3.3 Warning Label on the Erasure Unit
WARNING:
The erasure unit is hot - up to 200 °C: Risk of burns.
Avoid contact with the Erasure Unit.
Observe the relevant sticker on the Erasure Unit. (see figure 8)
200 c


Repair and Service
3.4 Warning Label on the Photomultiplier Module
CAUTION.
Photomultplier is fragile: Risk of damage.
Care must be taken. (see figure 9)
5148_Chap3.1_003


Chapter 3.2
Imaging Services
Tools and Auxiliary Means
CR 85-X
Type 5148/100
CR 75.0
Type 5146/105
(as of SN ≥ 6000)

This document describes tools and auxiliary means for the digitizer.

Document Title
DD+DIS028.07E


eq_03-2_tools-aux_e_template_v02
Repair and Service
DD+DIS378.05E Tools and Auxiliary Means
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
the equipment.
on the product.


Repair and Service
LIST OF CONTENTS
1 RECOMMENDED TOOLS AND TEST EQUIPMENT ..............................................................4

2 SERVICE PC (STANDARD).....................................................................................................5
3 SERVICE PROGRAM FOR THE DIGITIZER...........................................................................7
3.1 Overview ...................................................................................................................................7
4 REMOTE SERVICE VIA ADC WEB PAGES............................................................................9

4.1 General Information ..................................................................................................................9
4.1.1 What are HTML Pages? ...........................................................................................................9
4.1.2 Prerequisites .............................................................................................................................9
4.1.3 How to start HTML Pages of a Digitizer..................................................................................10
4.1.4 Navigation Instructions............................................................................................................11
4.2 Functions of ADC Web Pages: Overview ...............................................................................12


Repair and Service
1 Recommended Tools and Test Equipment

In addition to the common tools every service engineer is carrying in his tool box, the
following auxiliary equipment is required for the service on the digitizer components:
Equipment Spare Part Number Application
Service Laptop - service program
Interface cable CM+9 5120 9030 0 connection

RS232, 9pin / 25 service PC - Digitizer
pins SUB D
Ground tape CM+9 9999 0830 0 replacement of printed circuit boards

/ EPROMs
Safety lacquer - to be used after electronic or

mechanical adjustments
CCM Tool See Med Net configuration tool

GSO library
Leeds test FWW41 test exposures

phantom
Test Images CM+9 5145 3055 0 contains four test images:

CD-ROM for flatfld, flatfld2, testimg, tsheet
CR 85-X
Cu filter CM+9 5155 1015 2 test exposures


Repair and Service
2 Service PC (Standard)
The service PC is used:

(1) to create the adc.cpf file with the CCM tool
(2) to do service via terminal emulation
(3) to run the show error program
As service PC you can use any commercially available laptop.
Service PC connection: at a RS232 interface beside the mains switch of the ADC
Digitizer.


Repair and Service
figure 1:
Repair and Service
3 Service Program for the Digitizer

3.1 Overview
Service Level 1 Service Level 2 Service Level 3
1 INFO 1 Device info

2 Network info
2 MAINTENANCE 1 SAL Inspection
2 Calibration 1 Shading Calibration
2 IP Center Calibration
3 Test and Adjust cycle 1 Scan with transmission
2 Scan cycle – no image
3 Scan – no era, no img
4 Handling Cycle
5 Adjustment Cycle
4 Confirm Maintenance
5 Confirm Repair
6 Clear Infocounter
7 Confirm Modification
8 Confirm Installation
3 SAVE on floppy 1 Infocounter file
2 Machine-specific data
3 Service report
4 Session files
5 cpf file
6 Alarm log file
4 SHOW error 1 Explain error code
2 Error hit list
5 INSTALL from floppy 1 Software
2 Machine-specific data
3 PMT settings (mfa/mfb)
4 Optics parameters
5 Scanner parameters
6 cpf file
7 language files
8 HW modification ID
9 Erasure Unit


Repair and Service
Service Level 1 Service Level 2 Service Level 3
6 CONFIGURE 1 Local network ID

2 User terminal language
3 Active Alert System 1 Alert system status
2 Alert destination
3 Send test alert
4 Add-on applications enable/disable
Mammography
7 DIAGNOSTICS 1 Scanning and signals
2 Mechanical modules 1 Input buffer & R/F TAG
2 Cassette module 1
3 Cassette module 2
4 Rotation unit
5 Prescan transport + vac.
6 Scanner
7 Postscan transport
3 Erasure Unit
4 Image transmission
8 Checks 1 System check
2 Check laser 1 Optical Path *
2 Laser power on IP
3 Check destinations Ping to ...
4 Check disk
5 Send flatfield
6 Send jitter pattern 1 Calibration pattern
2 Banding pattern
7 Check I/O-bus
8 Send Testimage 1 Mammo Testimage 1
2 Mammo Testimage 2
3 Extremity Testimage
The optical fiber has been omitted, but the presence of the laser beam can still be
validated by visual inspection through the opened input rollers.
Mind the safety instructions for laser radiation.


Repair and Service
4 Remote Service via ADC Web Pages

4.1 General Information
Access for service interventions is possible on four different ways:
(1) locally via keypad.

(2) remotely via terminal emulation (RS232 Interface),
e.g. xt, hyperterminal.
(3) remotely via a PC in LAN (telnet).
(4) remotely via a dial-up connection (ppp).
This document describes the access via a graphic User Interface

(ADC web pages); item 3 and 4.
The ADC web pages complete the service concept of HE GSO. They follow the
structure of the well-known User Terminal.
Access via web pages guarantees a convenient and fast service by making use of
standard tools. The usage of different ports for these ways allows working
simultaneously with FTP, HTTP, and TelNet.
4.1.1 What are HTML Pages?

HTML stands for Hyper Text Markup Language. It is a programming language for the
creation of web pages for the Internet. HTML defines layout, fonts and colors of the
page and integrates multimedia functions such as graphics, animations or hyperlinks. A
special web browser is needed to view a HTML page.
4.1.2 Prerequisites
(1) direct network connection or dial-up network connection; TCP / IP

(e.g. Service Host).
(2) digitizer software ACP_4005 or higher loaded
(3) web browser installed (recommended: > Netscape Navigator 4.0; Internet
Explorer supports all functions except file transfer).


Repair and Service
4.1.3 How to start HTML Pages of a Digitizer
(1) Make sure that the digitizer you want to examine is switched on and you can
access it remotely.
(2) Open your web browser.
(3) Enter the IP address of the digitizer in the URL address field of your browser.
(4) You will be asked to enter a user name and a password. If you do not know the
proper password, please contact GSC Munich.
Æ Result: HTML pages will open with the Welcome Page on your screen.


Repair and Service
4.1.4 Navigation Instructions

HTML pages are structured in a three-frames layout. The top frame is static and
displays information about the digitizer and its location. The lower left frame is the
navigation frame and displays a set of topics. Information about a selected topic will
open in the main frame.
In the main frame most of the information pages are equipped with a "Home" link and a
"Back" link. "Home" leads back to the Welcome Page. "Back" returns to the primarily
selected page.
After a successful login the Welcome Page opens:
Plus
Plus
figure 1: Welcome Page
The software display shows an ADC Compact Plus instead of a CR 85-X. This has no
impact from a technical point of view.


Repair and Service
4.2 Functions of ADC Web Pages: Overview
1st Level 2nd Level Comment
Show Info Device Info Typical info on the device, e.g. type.
Device Status Emulates the User Interface; shows the User
Terminal in current status.
User Terminal Messages Like Device Status
Error Messages Shows a history of errors that occurred
during operation, latest error on top.
Network Info Shows network info, e.g. hostname,
IP address.
Test Report Shows and reports history on performed
local service interventions on device. Latest
on top.
Info Counter Shows detailed info on device,
e.g. SW-version, serial number,
modifications.
Scanner Shows calibration lines in graphic format for
various resolutions
(mainly for production purposes).
NOTE:
When selecting files for downloads, these files are first zipped and copied to the
download area (adc_c:\dl\). From the download area, the zip-files can be downloaded
to a directory of your HDD.
1st level 2nd level Comment
Download Infocounter File Downloads the infocounter.

Session Files Downloads one ore more *.ses files.
Test Report Downloads the report file *.rpt.
CPF File Downloads the ADC.cpf file.
Raw Image Downloads a raw image folder. This takes
several minutes.
Machine Specific Data Downloads the machine-specific data =
backup.
Any File Downloads any file.
Show Contents of the Displays a list of the files that have been
Download Area prepared for download.
Cleanup the Download Clears the list of the files that have been
Area prepared for download.


Repair and Service
Upload Software Allows to upload the Operating System

(aos*.zip), Application Software
(app*.zip) or Error Messages and
Diagnostics (err*.zip). Software patches
(patx.zip) can be uploaded, too.
Language Files Uploads language files to customize the
system language.
CPF File Uploads the cpf-file
Machine Specific Uploads machine-specific parameters
Parameters (backup)
Any File Allows an upload of any file.
Configure Local Network ID Allows changes in the network settings.
User Terminal Language The standard language for normal user and
key operator of the system can be changed.
IMPORTANT:
The changes confirmed under Local Network ID and
User Terminal Language are activated immediately.
Date and Time Manual setting of date and time
Checks Quick Check Automatic selftest of the device. This test is

recommended to be run as first step in
troubleshooting.
Check Laserpower Shows the history of the laser power

Check Destinations Sends a ping to the Processing Stations
defined in the cpf-file. Checks and displays
these destinations, including their host
names and their status.
Check Disk(s) Checks the hard disk or floppy drive;
comparable to chkdsk in MS-DOS. Being a
dynamic process, this cannot be displayed in
HTML.


Repair and Service
Image Show Queue Displays all the images in the queue;

Queue "Patient Name", "Location on Disk" and
"Status" are listed on the display.
Delete Queue Entries Displays all the images that can be deleted.
Reroute Reroutes all further incoming images to a
selected destination.
Retransmit Resends an image when the job is in the
status "error". All the images that can be
retransmitted are listed on the display.
Send Test Image Each test image ("mosaic image") can be
Image sent to any of the Processing Stations in the
network configured in the cpf-file.
Flatfield (Calibration Each flatfield can be sent to any of the
Pattern) Processing Stations in the network
configured in the cpf-file.
Flatfield (Banding Each flatfield can be sent to any of the
Pattern) Processing Stations in the network
Testsheet Each test sheet can be sent to any of the
Processing Stations in the network
IMPORTANT:
The following item Advanced Access allows access via the command line. It is for
advanced users only. Protective mechanisms are no longer in force.

Advanced Additional commands can be entered directly
Access in the command line.
Your intervention is not visible for any user.
Do not interfere with ongoing user activities!
Confirm This shell updates the infocounter.
Your Please enter this information whenever you
Access finished a service intervention. You can
choose between Remote Maintenance and
Remote Repair.


Chapter 3.3
Imaging Services
Troubleshooting
CR 85-X
Type 5148/100
CR 75.0
Type 5146/105
(as of SN ≥ 6000)

This document describes checkpoints for troubleshooting the digitizer.

Document Title
DD+DIS028.07E


eq_03-3_troubleshooting_e_template_v02
Repair and Service
DD+DIS378.05E Troubleshooting
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
the equipment.
on the product.


Repair and Service
LIST OF CONTENTS
1 CHECKPOINTS FOR TROUBLESHOOTING ..........................................................................4

1.1 Input Buffer - Checkpoint 1 .......................................................................................................5
1.2 Cassette Unit - Checkpoint 2 ....................................................................................................6
1.3 Rotation Unit - Checkpoint 3 .....................................................................................................8
1.4 Prescan Transport Unit - Checkpoint 4.....................................................................................9
1.5 Scanner - Checkpoint 5 ..........................................................................................................14
1.6 Erasure Unit - Checkpoint 6....................................................................................................15
1.7 Postscan Transport Unit - Checkpoint 7 .................................................................................17


Repair and Service
1 Checkpoints for Troubleshooting
Checkpoint 2
Cassette unit
Checkpoint 3
Rotation unit
Checkpoint 7
Postscan transp. Checkpoint 1
Input buffer
Checkpoint 4
Prescan transp.
Checkpoint 6 & Vacuum
Erasure unit
Checkpoint 5
Scanner
figure 1
(1) Check info counters and select the defective module.

(2) Run test as indicated in the respective checkpoint:
The reports are checked by the Diagnostic Software for the selected module. The
procedure is not visible on the display of the digitizer only results, problem
descriptions and repair proposals are displayed.
If there is no result, check the adjustments of the module in chapter 3.6.
NOTE:
The error numbers of the internal reports are not identical to the error codes shown on
the display.


Repair and Service
1.1 Input Buffer - Checkpoint 1
Run Diagnostic Software:

7 DIAGNOSTICS
2 Mechanical Modules
1 Input buffer & R/F Tag
Test input buffer

connections
Ok
Test if X positioning light

barrier of motor M513
is clear Error xxxx ocurred when
testing X positioning light
Ok barrier of motor M513
Test if clear and interrupt
Moving input buffer belt in functionality of 0
home position failed positioning lightbarrier of
motor Mxxx
Ok
Closing door of input functionality of 0
buffer failed positioning lightbarrier of
motor Mxxx
Ok
Test if X positioning
lightbarrier of motor
M513 is interrupted Error xxxx ocurred when
Ok barrier of motor M513
Open input buffer door Openning input buffer

door failed
Ok
Move input buffer belt to Moving input buffer belt

prepare position to prepare position failed
Ok Moving input buffer Moving input buffer belt
belt home in home position failed
Move input belt slowly to Move input belt to label
label position position failed Test if clear and interrupt
functionality of 0
positioning lightbarrier of
Ok motor Mxxx
Test if 0 positioning
Ok M514 is clear Error xxxx ocurred when
testing 0 positioning light
Ok
Test if X positioning
M514 is interrupted Error xxxx ocurred when
Waking up RF-tab reader
Wake up RF-tag reader
failed


Repair and Service
continues Input Buffer – Checkpoint 1
Ok
Order RF-tag reader to
Order RF-tag reader to Reading data from tag Cancelling of waiting for
read data from tag failed a new tag failed
Ok
Order RF-tag reader to Writing data to tag failed Ok
write data back to tag
Ok
Setting RF-tag reader Setting RF-tag reader

into sleep mode into sleep mode failed
Ok
Close input buffer door Closing door of input
buffer failed
Ok
Move input buffer belt Moving input buffer belt
home in home position failed
1.2 Cassette Unit - Checkpoint 2

7 DIAGNOSTICS
2 Cassette Module 1
or 3 Cassette Module 2
The abbreviations CASMODCON, ROTCON, HOMEPOS and XPOS are subprograms

and are also checked during diagnose.
CASMODCON
ROTCON
Rotation position of unknown Rotation position is

cassette module is x position unknown
Initialize roation module Initialization of rotation

Module 1/2 module failed
Ok
Turning cassette module Turning cassette module
1/2 to input 1/2 to input failed
Trying to reset rotation Initialization of rotation

motor motor failed
Ok
Test if input detection

lighbarrier of cassette
module on GS210S1/ Error xxxx ocurred when
GS260S2 is interrupted testing if puls lightbarrier
of GS210S1/GS260S2 is
interrupted
Ok


Repair and Service
continues Cassette Unit – Checkpoint 2

barrier of motor M203/
M208 is clear Error xxxx ocurred when
Ok
Closing cassette of Could not close cassette

cassette module x HOMEPOS
of cassette module x
Ok
Unclamping cassette of Unclamping cassette of

cassette module x HOMEPOS
module x failed
Ok
Moving lift of cassette Moving lift of cassette HOMEPOS

module x up module x up failed
Ok
Moving belt of cassette Moving belt of cassette

module x home HOMEPOS
module x home failed
Ok
Stopping input rolls of Stopping input rolls of

cassette module x cassette module x failed
Ok
Test if puls lightbarrier of

GS210S1/GS260S2 is Starting input rolls of Starting input rolls of
interrupted cassette module x cassette module x failed
Error xxxx ocurred when
testing if puls lightbarrier
Ok
Ok
Test if puls lightbarrier of
GS210S1/GS260S2 is
interrupted Error xxxx ocurred when
Ok

Ok
Starting input rolls of Starting input rolls of
Ok
Ok
Lift of cassette module x Moving down lift of
is being moved down cassette module x failed
Ok
Ok


Repair and Service
continues Cassette Unit – Checkpoint 2
Clamping cassette of Clamping cassette of

XPOS
Ok
Opening cassette in Opening cassette in
module x module x failed
Ok
Closing cassette in Closing cassette in
Ok
Unclamping cassette in Unclamping cassette in
Ok
Moving up lift of cassette Moving up lift of cassette
Ok
Lift of cassette module x
is moved up
Rotation position of unknown Rotation position is

cassette module is x position unknown
Initialize roation module Initialization of rotation

Module 1/2 module failed
Ok
Turning cassette module Turning cassette module
1/2 to input 1/2 to input failed
Ok
Move belt of cassette Moving belt of cassette

module x in end position module x to end position
failed
Ok
Move belt of cassette Move belt of cassette

module x to home module x to home
position position failed
1.3 Rotation Unit - Checkpoint 3

7 DIAGNOSTICS
4 Rotation Unit
Test connections of
rotation module
Move rotation unit home Moving rotation unit functionality of 0
home failed positioning lightbarrier
Ok of motor Mxxx
Get rotation position Rotation position

is unkown


Repair and Service
continues Rotation Unit – Checkpoint 3
Ok
Initialize rotation module Initialization of rotation
module failed
Ok
Turning cassette mod. 1 Turning cassette mod.1

to input to input failed
Reset rotation module to Reset of rotation module

set all motors currentless failed
Ok

barrier of motor M212 is
clear
Ok

barrier of motor M212 is
interrupted
Get rotation position Rotation position

is unkown
Initialize rotation module Initialization of rotation

module failed
Ok
Turning cassette mod. 2 Turning cassette mod.2

to input to input failed
1.4 Prescan Transport Unit - Checkpoint 4

7 DIAGNOSTICS
5 Prescan transport + vac.
The abbreviation ROTCON is a subprogram and is also checked during

diagnose. VACUUM and AIRDET are shown after the main program.


Repair and Service
continues Prescan Transport Unit – Checkpoint 4
Test connections of
prescan module
Initializing prescan
module
Ok Timeout when testing X if Move home sled motor

positioning lightbarrier of of prescan module
motor M403 is interrupted
testing X positioning light Ok
Ok is interrupted
Timeout when testing X if

positioning lightbarrier of Test if positioning light motor M403 is interrupted
motor M402 is clear barrier of motor M403
is interrupted Error xxxx ocurred when
Error xxxx ocurred when testing X positioning light
barrier of motor M402 Ok is interrupted
Ok is clear
Move home suction
VACUUM motor of prescan
module
Test connections of
cassette module Ok

Test if positioning light motor M402 is interrupted
is interrupted Error xxxx ocurred when
is interrupted
Close opener of Closing opener of

Ok
Unclamp clamper of Unclamping clamper of
Ok
Move up lift of Moving up lift of
Ok
Move home belt of Moving home belt of
Ok
Stop input rolls of Stopping input rolls of
Ok
Start input rolls of Starting input rolls of
Ok
Ok


Repair and Service
O
Move down lift of Moving down lift of
Ok
Ok
Clamp cassette of Clamping cassette of
Ok
Open cassette of Opening cassette of
Ok
Get rotation position Rotation position is ROTCON

unknown
1 or 2
Initialization of rotation
Initialize rotation module
Test connections of module failed
cassette module Ok
Turning cassette Turning cassette

module x to input module x to input failed
Ok
Start of moving up
prescan robot failed
Ok
Prescan robot started
to move up
Waiting for prescan

Prescan robot did not
robot to reach upper
reach upper position
position
Ok

Ok is interrupted
Test if vacuum is No vacuum is detected

detected for prescan for prescan module
module
Ok
Switch off vacuum pump Switching off vacuum
of prescan module pump of prescan module
failed
Ok
Set valve of pre/post Setting valve of pre/post
scan module to vacuum scan module of vacuum
pump pump failed
Ok
Moving suction cups of Moving suction cups of

prescan module back prescan module back
home home failed


Repair and Service
Ok

Ok is interrupted
Move down robot of Starting to move down

prescan module robot of prescan module
failed
Ok
Waiting for robot of pre
scan module to finish Movement down of robot
the movement down of prescan module failed
Ok
Finishing cycle of Finishing cycle of
prescan module prescan module failed
Ok
Close opener of Could not close cassette

cassette module x of cassette module x
Ok
Unclamp clamper of Could not unclamp
cassette module x cassette of cassette
module x
Ok
Move up lift of Could not move up lift of
cassette module x cassette module x
Subprogram VACUUM:
Switch off vacuum pump
prescan/postscan
module
Ok
Wait for xxx seconds
Test if air is detected

for postscan/prescan
module
Ok
Set valve of prescan/

postscan module to
vacuum pump
Ok
Switch on vacuum
pump prescan/postscan
module


Repair and Service
Ok

for postscan/prescan AIRDET
module
Ok
Wait for vacuum for

postscan/prescan
module
Ok
Set valve postscan/

prescan module to air
Ok
Wait for vacuum for

postscan/prescan
module
Ok
Set valve of prescan/

postscan module to
vacuum pump
Sub subprogram AIRDET:

for prescan module
Ok
User interference:
remove tube
Test air if detected

after tube has been
removed
Ok
Test if in line voltage

is present on
MS-BOARD


Repair and Service
1.5 Scanner - Checkpoint 5

7 DIAGNOSTICS
6 Scanner
Test connections of
slow scan module
Start slowscan rollers

with fast speed
Ok
Stopping slowscan
rollers failed
Ok
Stepper lightbarrier of Move home sled motor Timeout when testing X if

motor M702 is not clear of prescan module positioning lightbarrier
of
Ok
Move scanner motors Moving scanner motors Moving home pre-align Moving home pre-align
to home position into to home position slow scan drive slow scan drive failed
failed

Ok functionality of 0
motor Mxxx
Moving home post-align Moving home post-align

slow scan slow scan drive failed

functionality of 0
Ok positioning lightbarrier of
motor Mxxx
Moving slowscan rollers Moving slowscan rollers

lift home lift home failed
Ok
Test if X positioning Timeout, when tesing if

lightbarrier of motor X positioning lightbarrier
M203/M208 is clear of motor M702 is clear

tesing if X positioning
Ok lightbarrier of motor
M702 is clear


Repair and Service
continues Scanner – Checkpoint 5
Test if X positioning Timeout, when tesing if

lightbarrier of motor X positioning lightbarrier
M203/M208 is of motor M702 is
interrupted interrupted
Timeout, when tesing if

X positioning lightbarrier
of motor M702 is
interrupted
1.6 Erasure Unit - Checkpoint 6

7 DIAGNOSTICS
3 Erasure Unit
The subprogram LAMPS is shown after the main program.
Test connections of
erasure unit
Switch off erasure unit

fan
Ok
Switch on power unit

fan
Ok
Question in CLIPS: Power unit fan does not
Switch off power unit fan
Does power unit fan run run
Ok
Ok
Switch on power unit fan
Ok
Switch on erasure unit

fan
Ok
Erasure unit fan does not
run
fan
Ok
Ok
Switch on erasure unit
fan
Performs a complete Safety test of erasure Test if erasure unit

safety test on the unit failed power is ok
erasure unit
Ok


Repair and Service
continues Erasure Unit – Checkpoint 6
Test if erasure control

board is ok
Ok Ok
Test if current sense

board is ok
Ok
Test transformer 1
Ok
Test transformer 2
Ok
Test transformer 3
Ok
Test transformer 4
Ok
Test transformer 5
Ok
Test erasure lamps

connections
Ok
Test erasure unit fan

speed
Ok
Erasure unit fan speed

is ok

lamps
Ok Getting erasure unit

lamps currents failed
There is current detected

while erasure unit lamps
Ok are switched off
LAMPS


Repair and Service
continues Erasure Unit – Checkpoint 6
Subprogram LAMPS :
Switch on erasure unit Switching on erasure unit

lamps of trafo x lamps of trafo x failed
Ok
Get erasure unit lamps
currents
Ok
Switch off erasure unit Switching off erasure

lamps unit lamps failed
1.7 Postscan Transport Unit - Checkpoint 7

7 DIAGNOSTICS
7 Postscan transport
The subprogram VACUUM is shown at Checkpoint 4.
Test connections of
postscan module
Initializing postscan
module
Ok Timeout when testing X if Moving sled motor

positioning lightbarrier of M401home
testing X positioning light Ok
Ok is interrupted
Timeout
Timeoutwhen
whentesting
testingXifif
Timeout when testing X if positioning lightbarrier
puls lightbarrier of of
positioning lightbarrier of motor M403 is interrupted
subnode 2 of GS414 is
motor M400 is clear Test if lightbarrier GS414 interrupted
is interrupted
Error xxxx ocurred when Error xxxx ocurred when
testing X positioning light testing
testingXpulspositioning light
lightbarrier
barrier of motor M400 Ok ofbarrier
subnode2of motor M403
of GS414
is clear isisinterrupted
interrupted
Move home suction
motor of postscan
Ok module
Ok


Repair and Service
continues Postscan Transport Unit – Checkpoint 7
Timeout when testing if

puls lightbarrier of
subnode 2 of GS408 is
Test if lightbarrier clear
GS408 is clear
of subnode 2 of GS408
is clear
Get rotation position Rotation position is Test connections of

unknown rotation module
1 or 2
Initialization of rotation
Initialize rotation module
Test connections of module failed
cassette module x Ok
Turning cassette Turning cassette

module x to input module x to input failed
Ok
Test connections of
rotation module
Test connections of
cassette module x
Close opener of Closing opener of

Ok
Unclamp clamper of Unclamping clamper of
Ok
Move up lift of Moving up lift of
Ok
Move home belt of Moving home belt of
Ok
Ok
Ok
Ok
Ok
Ok


Repair and Service
Rotation position is Test connections of

Get rotation position
unknown rotation module
1 or 2 Initialization of rotation
Initialize rotation module module failed
Test connections of Ok
cassette module x
Turning cassette
module x to input
Ok
Ok
module x
Ok
Ok
Ok
Ok
Ok
Ok
Ok
Clamp cassette of Clamping cassette of
Ok
Ok
VACUUM
Moving up postscan Start of moving up post

robot scan robot failed
Ok
Waiting for postscan Postscan robot did not
robot to reach upper reach upper position
position
Ok
Lay down the suction Laying down the suction

cups on the IP cups on the IP failed


Repair and Service
Ok Timeout when testing X if

motor M401 is clear
Ok is clear

Ok
Test if vacuum is
No vacuum is detected
detected for postscan
for postscan module
module
Ok
Switch off vacuum pump Switching off vacuum

pre/postscan module pump pre/postscan
module failed
Ok
Set valve of pre/post Setting valve of pre/post

scan module to vacuum scan module to vacuum
pump pump failed
Ok
Move suction drive back Moving suction drive

to stripp off the IP back failed
Ok
Moving postscan robot
down to interrupt suction
X-POS lightbarrier
failed
Ok Timeout when testing X if

Ok is interrupted
Move down robot of Starting to move down

postscan module robot of postscan module
failed
Ok
Waiting for robot of post Movement down of robot

scan module to finish of postscan module failed
the movement down
Ok
Move robot of postscan

module out to points
Ok
Test if left points light Left points lightbarrier of

barrier of postscan is postscan module is
open closed
Ok
Test if right points light

barrier of postscan is
open


Repair and Service
Ok
Move postscan robot

from points position to
home position
Ok
Move suction cups and Moving home of suction

sled of postscan module cups and slide of post
home scan module failed
Ok
Test connections of
cassette module x

Ok
module x
Ok
Ok
Test connections of
cassette module x
Could not move

Move belt of cassette
belt of cassette module x
module x to end position
to end position
Ok
Move belt of cassette Could not move belt of
module x to home cassette module x to
position home position


Chapter 3.4
Imaging Services
Electrical and Mechanical Codes, Fuses, LEDs
CR 85-X
Type 5148/100
CR 75.0
Type 5146/105
(as of SN ≥ 6000)

This document describes electrical and mechanical codes, fuses and LEDs of the
digitizer.

Document Title
DD+DIS028.07E


eq_03-4_codings_e_template_v02
Repair and Service
DD+DIS378.05E Electrical and Mechanical Codes, Fuses, LEDs
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
the equipment.
on the product.


Repair and Service
LIST OF CONTENTS
1 CODINGS OF THE STEPPER MOTOR CONTROL BOARDS................................................4

2 FUSES OVERVIEW .................................................................................................................6


Repair and Service
1 Codings of the Stepper Motor Control Boards
GS IOB-SIN-5Step Boards:
CM+9 9499 8120 3
GS Designation Switch Settings Circuit Diagram Page

/Coord
210 Cassette module 1 JL1 JL1
1 8
LJGS210sn2.cdr
2/B4-E5
JL 2 JL2
1 8
LJGS210sn1.cdr
260 Cassette module 2 JL1 JL1
1 8
LJGS260sn2.cdr
2/F4-H5
JL2 JL2
1 8
LJGS260sn1.cdr
610 5fold-St-Scan Board JL1 JL1
1 8
LJGS610sn2.cdr
6/D3-H3
JL2 JL2
1 8
LJGS610sn1.cdr


Repair and Service
GS IOB-SIN-Step Boards
CM+9 9499 8140 4
GS Designation Switch Settings Circuit Diagram Page

/Coord
202 Rotation Board JL1 JL1
2/C1-E1
1 8
LJGS202.cdr
412 Postsc-Suct Board JL1 JL1

4/C2-D2
1 8
LJGS412.cdr
418 Post-Sled Board JL1 JL1

4C1-D1
1 8
LJGS418.cdr
428 Pre-Suction Board JL1 JL1

4/G2-H2
1 8
LJGS428.cdr
434 Prescan-Sled Board JL1 JL1

4/G1-H2
1 8
LJGS434.cdr
510 Inbuff-Belt Board JL1 JL1

5/D4-D5
1 8
JLGS510.cdr
532 Inbuff-Door Board JL1 JL1

5/G4-G5
1 8
LJGS532.cdr
552 Outbuff-Push Board JL1 JL1

5/G4-G5
1 8
LJGS552.cdr
556 Outbuff-Roll Board JL1 JL1

5/B4-C5
1 8
LJGS556.cdr


Repair and Service
2 Fuses Overview
NOTE:
All fuses are slowbow fuses.
Board Fuse Quality Protects

GS100 SI 1 T 2.5A GS210,
MS-Board 5 fold stepper motor board cass unit 1
SI 2 T 2.5A GS260,
5 fold stepper motor board cass unit 2
SI 3 T 2.5A GS610,
5 fold stepper motor board scan unit
SI 4 T 1A GS510
Input Buffer Belt board
SI 5 T 1A GS532
Input Buffer Door board
SI 6 T 1A GS556
Output Buffer Roller board
SI 7 T 1A GS552
Output Buffer Push board
SI 8 T 1A GS202
Rotation board
SI 9 T 1A GS418
Postscan Sled board
SI 10 T 1A GS412
Postscan Suction board
SI 11 T 2.5A* GS434
Prescan Sled board
SI 12 T 1A GS428
Prescan Suction board
SI 13 T 2.5A +24 V devices
* Fuse quality was changed from T 1A to T 2.5A because of too high current load.


Chapter 3.5
Imaging Services
Replacements / Repair Procedures
CR 85-X
Type 5148/100
CR 75.0
Type 5146/105
(as of SN ≥ 6000)

This document describes replacements and repair procedures for the digitizer.

Document Title
DD+DIS028.07E.


eq_03-5_replacements_e_template_v02
Repair and Service
DD+DIS378.05E Replacements / Repair Procedures
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
the equipment.
on the product.


Repair and Service
LIST OF CONTENTS
1 SAFETY NOTE.........................................................................................................................5
2 REPLACEMENTS AT THE ERASURE UNIT...........................................................................5
2.1 Removing the Erasure Unit.......................................................................................................5
2.2 Replacement of the Lamps .......................................................................................................6
2.3 Remounting the Erasure Unit....................................................................................................7
3 REPLACEMENT OF THE ERASURE UNIT FAN.....................................................................8

4 REPLACEMENTS AT THE TRANSPORT UNITS....................................................................9
4.1 Replacing the Vacuum Pump ...................................................................................................9
4.2 Replacing the Transport Units (Pre- and Postscan) ...............................................................12
4.3 Replacing the Stepper Motor Boards of the Robot .................................................................13
5 REPLACEMENTS AT THE SCAN UNIT ................................................................................14

5.1 Sliding out the Scan Unit.........................................................................................................14
5.2 Replacing the 5fold Stepper Motor Board at the Scan Unit....................................................15
5.3 Replacing the Optic Module....................................................................................................16
5.3.1 Safety Note .............................................................................................................................16
5.3.2 Removing the Optic Module....................................................................................................17
5.3.3 Installing the Optic Module......................................................................................................20
5.3.4 Putting the new Optic Module in Operation ............................................................................21
5.4 Replacing the Photomultiplier Module (PMM) ........................................................................22
5.4.1 Removing Components of the Scan Unit................................................................................22
5.4.2 Removing the Photomultiplier Module (PMM) with Light Collector.........................................25
5.4.3 Installing the new Photomultiplier Module (PMM) with Light Collector ...................................28
5.4.4 Putting the new Photomultiplier in Operation..........................................................................31


Repair and Service
5.5 Removing the Scan Unit completely from the Digitizer ..........................................................32
5.5.1 Sliding the Scan Unit onto the Ramp......................................................................................32
5.5.2 Removing the Energy Chain ...................................................................................................33
5.6 Removing modules from a defective Slow Scan Unit.............................................................35
5.6.1 Installing a new Slow Scan Unit..............................................................................................35
5.6.2 Putting the new Slow Scan Unit in Operation .........................................................................36
6 REPLACEMENT OF THE CASSETTE UNIT .........................................................................38

6.1 Preparations............................................................................................................................38
6.2 Removing Cassette Module 2 from the Digitizer ....................................................................39
6.3 Removing Cassette Module 1 from the Digitizer ....................................................................41
6.4 Re-installing the Cassette Unit................................................................................................42
7 CPCI-RACK ............................................................................................................................43
7.1 Replacing a defective Hard Disk (HDD) .................................................................................43
7.1.1 Removal of the old Hard Disk .................................................................................................43
7.1.2 Installation of the new Hard Disk ............................................................................................46
7.2 Exchange of the Hard Disk / Procedure to install Digitizer Software on a virgin Hard Disk ...47


Repair and Service
1 Safety Note
WARNING:
Switch off the digitizer before performing any service interventions at the digitizer.
2 Replacements at the Erasure Unit
2.1 Removing the Erasure Unit
(1) Press down the clamping plate on

top of the erasure unit.
figure 1
(2) Pull out the erasure unit to the stop.
figure 2


Repair and Service
(3) Take the erasure unit with one hand

and press down the other clamping
plate on the top with the other hand
and pull it out.
(4) Lay down the unit on a save and

stable place.
figure 3
2.2 Replacement of the Lamps
NOTE:
The glass bulbs of the new lamps must be clean. Use a soft cloth; do not touch with
bare fingers.
(1) Open the two latches beside the

glass.
figure 4


Repair and Service
(2) Swing up the glass covering of the

lamps.
(3) Pull the lamps which need to be

replaced carefully out of the
sockets.
(4) Insert the new lamps carefully in the

sockets and push them to stop
position.
figure 5
2.3 Remounting the Erasure Unit
(1) Follow the steps in reverse order.
(2) Take care that the clamping plate locks into place by moving the erasure unit back
into the digitizer.


Repair and Service
3 Replacement of the Erasure Unit Fan
CAUTION:
Do not try to unscrew the screw in the left upper position (see arrow)! It is secured by
lacquer.
(1) Unscrew the three screws with a

socket wrench (7mm), (see circles).
figure 6
(2) Take out the fan carefully and

unplug the cable.
figure 7


Repair and Service
4 Replacements at the Transport Units

4.1 Replacing the Vacuum Pump
NOTE:
For replacing the vacuum pump of the IP transport unit – postscan, it is necessary to
take the complete frame out of the digitizer.
(1) Open the white plastic clamp.
figure 8
(2) Unplug the black plug.
figure 9


Repair and Service
(3) Pull off the vacuum hose.
figure 10
(4) Unscrew the three mounting screws

(see circles).
figure 11


Repair and Service
(5) Remove the vacuum unit.
figure 12


Repair and Service
4.2 Replacing the Transport Units (Pre- and Postscan)
(1) Unplug both plugs.
figure 13
NOTE:
By repositioning the transport unit take care of the guiding bar on the bottom of the
digitizer.
(2) Pull out the transport unit.
figure 14


Repair and Service
4.3 Replacing the Stepper Motor Boards of the Robot
(1) Remove the IP-transport unit from the machine.
(2) Move the robot manually to the top of the frame.
(3) Unscrew the covering plate with a

socket wrench (5,5mm).
figure 15
(4) Swing up the covering plate.
figure 16
(5) Unplug the cables of the board.
(6) Press the black plastic clamp

carefully and lift the board off the
four pins.
figure 17


Repair and Service
5 Replacements at the Scan Unit
CAUTION:
5.1 Sliding out the Scan Unit
(1) Unlock the scan unit by loosening

two screws 1 - only half a turn
(2) Pull out the scan unit to its stop
Scan Unit
figure 18


Repair and Service
5.2 Replacing the 5fold Stepper Motor Board at the Scan Unit
(1) Slide out the scan unit as described

in section 5.1, page 14.
NOTE:
Wear a grounding strap (CM+9 9999 0830 0) when touching the stepper motor board.
(2) Press the plastic clips of the black

covering plate a little inside and
take away the covering.
5146_Chap3.5_008.cdr
figure 19
(3) Unplug all cables at the stepper

motor board and lift it off the studs.
5148_Chap3.5_009.CDR
figure 20


Repair and Service
5.3 Replacing the Optic Module

5.3.1 Safety Note
WARNING:
Make sure that the digitizer is switched off, before you remove the optic module.
There are no serviceable parts inside the

optic module.
Do not open sealed parts of the module.
figure 21


Repair and Service
5.3.2 Removing the Optic Module
CAUTION:
unit.
(1) Unlock the scan unit by loosening two

screws 1 - only half a turn
Scan Unit
figure 22
(3) Undo the shielding clamp,

(5.5 mm socket wrench). (A) 1
Unplug the polygon plug (the
connection is unmistakable). (B)
(4) Unplug activation plug of the optic

2
module
(Sub-D plug, 25 pins).
5146_Chap3.5_050.cdr
figure 23


Repair and Service
NOTE:
Locking clips prevent the plug from working loose

covering plate a little inside and take
away the covering.
5146_Chap3.5_008.cdr
figure 24
(6) Loosen quick action closure 1 and

snap lock 2 of the holder of the 5fold
stepper motor board.
(7) Unplug all connections at the 5 fold

stepper motor board
5148_Chap3.5_005.cdr
figure 25


Repair and Service
(8) Turn up the holder to its stop.
5146_Chap3.5_020.cdr
figure 26
(9) Undo four allen screws

of the optic module (4 mm allen key).
5148_Chap3.5_006.cdr
figure 27
(10) Unscrew the T-handles from the

platform and fit it to the provided bore
holes.
Lift up the optic module cautiously by
using the two T-handles and remove
it from the scan unit.
5148_Chap3.5_030.cdr
figure 28


Repair and Service
5.3.3 Installing the Optic Module
(1) Insert the new optic module by

using the two T-handles: make sure
that both centering pins
1 2
(1-2) have engaged
(2) Tighten four allen screws of the

optic module
(3) Re-connect all cables
(4) Turn down the 5fold stepper motor

board and mount cover
5148_Chap3.5_007.cdr
figure 29
(5) An IP center calibration and a

shading calibration must be done
after the installation
(see chapter 3.6)


Repair and Service
5.3.4 Putting the new Optic Module in Operation
(1) Switch on the Digitizer
(2) Install the optics specific data from the enclosed floppy disk via the Service Menu at
the user terminal
(3) Select <5 INSTALL from floppy>

<4 Optics parameters>
The system requests:
- to compare the S/N on the optic module and the S/N stored on the floppy disk.
After confirmation the parameters are loaded.
The serial number of the exchange part is automatically entered in the
info counter file under "HW Replacement history" together with date
and counter stamp.
- to update the backup
(4) Make an IP center calibration, see chapter 3.6
(5) Make a shading calibration of all formats, see chapter 3.6
(6) Update the backup to save the calibration data
(7) Select <3 Save on floppy>

<2 Machine specific data>
(8) Follow the on-line instructions
(9) Enter the serial number of the Digitizer on the label of the
optic module floppy disk
(10) Check the image quality with flatfield exposures (if available, also with test sheet),
see chapter 3.6


Repair and Service
5.4 Replacing the Photomultiplier Module (PMM)

5.4.1 Removing Components of the Scan Unit
CAUTION:
unit.
(1) Unlock the scan unit by loosening

two screws (1) - only half a turn.
Scan Unit
figure 30


Repair and Service
(3) Remove the cover of the 5fold

Stepper Motor Board and turn it up
till its stop.
5146_Chap3.5_020.cdr
fi
gure 31
(4) Undo the four fastening screws (1-

4) of the optic module (4 mm allen
key).
5148_Chap3.5_006.cdr
figure 32


Repair and Service
(5) Lift up the optic module cautiously

and remove it from the scan unit.
5148_Chap3.5_030.cdr
figure 33
(6) Undo the allen screw at the light

well (close to the gear box, 3mm
allen key)
(7) Lift up the light well.
5148_Chap3.5_013.CDR
figure 34


Repair and Service
5.4.2 Removing the Photomultiplier Module (PMM) with Light Collector
CAUTION:
Risk of damage!
Photomultiplier and light collector are glued and must be treated as one component.
(1) Loosen the four

4
allen screws at the corners of the
photomultiplier (1-4) 3
(2.5 mm allen key)
5148_Chap3.5_060.cdr
figure 35
(2) Loosen the four allen screws at the

light collector
(7mm allen key)
5148_Chap3.5_063.cdr
figure 36


Repair and Service
(3) Remove retaining ring of the dust

brush
figure 37
(4) Draw the dust brush to its outermost

position
(to avoid bending of
the brush)
5146_Chap3.5_064.cdr
figure 38


Repair and Service
(5) Thread the cabling of the brush

through the guidance
figure 39
(6) Pull out the PMM with the right side

ahead
Take the module with both hands

on top of the light collector
(left and right from the
photomultiplier)
5146_Chap3.5_066.cdr
figure 40
(7) Put down the PMM carefully
5146_Chap3.5_069.cdr
figure 41


Repair and Service
5.4.3 Installing the new Photomultiplier Module (PMM) with Light Collector
(1) Install the new PMM, put in with left

side ahead
5146_Chap3.5_070.cdr
figure 42
(2) Thread the cabling of the brush

through the guidance
figure 43


Repair and Service
(3) Draw the dust brush to its outermost

position
(to avoid bending of
the brush)
5146_Chap3.5_064.cdr
figure 44
(4) Put retaining ring of the dust brush

back in place
figure 45


Repair and Service
(5) Tighten the four

4
allen screws at the corners of the
photomultiplier 3
(2.5 mm allen key)
5148_Chap3.5_060.cdr
figure 46
(6) Tighten the four allen screws at the

light collector
(7 mm allen key)
5148_Chap3.5_063.cdr
figure 47
(7) Return the dust brush to its park position
(8) Re-install the light-well and the optic module in reverse order as described above.
(9) Turn down the 5fold Stepper Motor Board.
(10) Push scan unit back into the digitizer and tighten the fastening screws
(11) Close doors


Repair and Service
5.4.4 Putting the new Photomultiplier in Operation
(1) Switch on the Digitizer
(2) Install the mfa / mfb parameters from the enclosed floppy disk via the Service
Menu at the user terminal

<3 PMT settings (mfa/mfb)>
- to compare the serial number on the photomultiplier module and the

serial number stored on the floppy disk. After confirmation the
parameters are loaded.
and counter stamp.
(4) Calibrate all formats, see chapter 3.6
(5) Update the backup to save the calibration data

(7) Follow the on-line instructions
photomultiplier floppy disk
see chapter 3.6


Repair and Service
5.5 Removing the Scan Unit completely from the Digitizer

5.5.1 Sliding the Scan Unit onto the Ramp
CAUTION:
unit.
In order to remove the scan unit safely, always wear

safety shoes with steel toe cap.
5148_Chap3.5_003.CDR
figure 48


Repair and Service
(1) Unlock the scan-unit by removing the locking device (3 mm allen key)
(2) Remove the ramp of the scan unit; it is hidden behind the left side panel
(3) Hook the ramp into the gaps between the two feet of the digitizer
(4) Let the scan unit slide onto the ramp
5.5.2 Removing the Energy Chain
(1) Open all cable clamps.

(2) Remove screw 1 1
5148_Chap3.5_010.CDR
(3) Remove energy chain with metal

plate 2
figure 49

covering plate a little inside and
take away the covering.
5146_Chap3.5_008.cdr
figure 50


Repair and Service
(5) Unplug connectors (1-4) 1 2
(6) Take all cables out of the clamps
5148_Chap3.5_011.CDR
3 4
figure 51
(7) Let the scan unit slide smoothly to the floor


Repair and Service
5.6 Removing modules from a defective Slow Scan Unit

To replace a complete slow scan unit, first remove the following modules from the
defective slow scan unit as described before:
• 5fold stepper motor board at Scan Unit (see 5.2)

• Optic Module (see 5.3.2)
• The light-well-module (see 5.4.1)
• Photomultiplier Module (PMM) with light collector and dust brush (see 5.4.2)
5.6.1 Installing a new Slow Scan Unit
(1) Unpack the new scan unit as described in the enclosed Installation Instructions
(2) For sending back the old scan unit use the packing of the new one and follow the
unpacking instructions in reverse order
NOTE:
Mind to fill out the Defect Label in a correct and detailed way for the old scan module!
(3) Install the new scan unit (see delivery

condition in figure beside)
figure 52


Repair and Service
(4) Re-install
- the PMM with light collector
and dust-brush,
- the light-well
- the optic module
- and the 5fold stepper motor board
in reverse order as described above.
(5) Slide back the scan unit onto the ramp and into the digitizer.
(6) Remove the ramp.
(7) Install, the energy chain and plug in all plugs at the scan unit
(8) An IP center calibration and a shading calibration must be done after installation
(see chapter 3.6 of service documentation).
5.6.2 Putting the new Slow Scan Unit in Operation
(1) Switch on the Digitizer.
(2) Install the mfa / mfb parameters from the enclosed floppy disk via the Service
Menu at the user terminal.

<3 PMT settings (mfa/mfb)>

- to compare the serial number on the photomultiplier module and the
serial number stored on the floppy disk. After confirmation the parameters are
loaded.
info counter file under "HW Replacement history" together with date and
counter stamp.
(4) Install the optics specific data from the enclosed floppy disk via the Service


Repair and Service

<4 Optics parameters>

- to compare the S/N on the optic module and the S/N stored on the floppy disk.
After confirmation the parameters are loaded.
The serial number of the exchange part is automatically entered in the info
counter
file under "HW Replacement history" together with date and counter stamp.
(6) Install the scanner parameters from the enclosed floppy disk via the Service

<5 Scanner parameters>

- to compare the serial number on the photomultiplier module and the serial
number stored on the floppy disk. After confirmation the
parameters are loaded.
and counter stamp.
(8) Calibrate all formats, see chapter 3.6.
(9) Update the backup to save the calibration data.

(11) Follow the on-line instructions.
photomultiplier floppy disk.
see chapter 3.6.


Repair and Service
6 Replacement of the Cassette Unit

6.1 Preparations
(1) Open the doors of the Digitizer. Cassette Unit
5148_Chap3.5_001.CDR
figure 53
(2) Turn cassette unit by 180° and

loosen two grounding cables 1
(7 mm socket wrench).
1
(3) Turn cassette unit by 180° again.
figure 54


Repair and Service
(4) Open quick action closure 2.
figure 55
6.2 Removing Cassette Module 2 from the Digitizer
(1) Pull cassette module 2 cautiously

out of the machine 3.
figure 56


Repair and Service
(2) Unclip cable supports 4.
(3) Unplug power supply cable 5. 4
(4) Unplug data cable 6.
figure 57
(5) Lift cassette module 2 cautiously

until it disengages from the hinges 7
7.
(6) Put cassette module 2 aside.

Mind a solid stand of the module.
figure 58


Repair and Service
6.3 Removing Cassette Module 1 from the Digitizer
(1) Turn cassette module 1 by 90°

8
(2) Unplug power supply cable at the
top of the module 8.
figure 59
(3) Unplug data cable 9.
figure 60
(4) Loosen two screws 10 at the 11

mounting of the energy chain 11
(7 mm socket wrench).
10
figure 61


Repair and Service
NOTE:
Take care that the screws cannot fall into the digitizer.
(5) Push the mount of the energy chain

upwards 11 until the pins have left
the holes 12. 11
12
figure 62
(6) Lift and cant cassette module 1 a

little until the bolts of the rotation
unit are free 13.
(7) Put cassette module 1 aside.

Mind a solid stand of the module.
13
figure 63
6.4 Re-installing the Cassette Unit
(1) Re-install the cassette unit in reverse order as described above.


Repair and Service
7 cPCI-Rack
7.1 Replacing a defective Hard Disk (HDD)
7.1.1 Removal of the old Hard Disk
WARNING:
Switch off the digitizer and disconnect the machine from the mains.
Safety instructions for electronical parts see Chapter 3.1 and Generic Safety
Directions for HealthCare and Imaging Products.
NOTE:
In order to avoid any damage at the storage board, replace the HDD very cautiously.
(1) Open the doors. The cPCI-rack with

the storage board 1 is placed in the
frame of the left door.
figure 64


Repair and Service
(2) Remove the storage board by

loosen the four Phillips screws
(black circles).
figure 65
NOTE:
These are captive screws. They cannot be removed completely.
(3) Pull out the storage board

cautiously.
figure 66


Repair and Service
(4) Disconnect the electric connections:

5
(5) Loosen the two terminal rails 3.
7
3
(6) Disconnect the ribbon cables 4 and
5 from floppy disk drive 7 and hard
disk 6. 6
4
1
(7) Disconnect the connector 2 of the
5 V power supply. 2 8
figure 67
1 Storage board
2 Connector
3 Terminal rail
4 Ribbon cable for hard disk
5 Ribbon cable for floppy disk
6 Hard disk
7 Floppy disk drive
8 Connector
(8) Figure 69 shows the storage board

with inserted hard disk.
figure 68


Repair and Service
(9) Loosen four round-head screws at

the rear of the storage board (black
circle) to separate the hard disk
from storage board.
figure 69
NOTE:
Hold the hard disk firmly in one hand (see figure 69), while you remove the four round-
head screws with a mid-size screw driver.
(10) Disconnect the connector of the 5 V

power supply from the hard disk.
(11) Remove the hard disk from the

storage board.
figure 70
7.1.2 Installation of the new Hard Disk

To install the new hard disk follow the instructions in reverse order.


Repair and Service
7.2 Exchange of the Hard Disk / Procedure to install Digitizer Software on a

virgin Hard Disk
NOTE:
Usage of floppies "Hard disk formatter" and "Portex Installer 1 of 2":
• For Sw installation on a virgin hard disk (including formatting of the hard disk)
- insert HD Formatter floppy (= Portex Installer 1/2 plus hard disk formatting)
- insert Portex Installer 2/2
• For upgrading Portex
(1) Take the Hard disk formatter floppy and insert it into the floppy disk drive of
the digitizer.
(2) Disconnect the digitizer from the network (since a default IP-Address &
hostname is configured).
(3) Connect a PC with terminal program or a Terminal to service RS232 port.
(4) Press the Reset button on Ariel-CPU or turn power off/on of the digitizer.
(5) Confirm partitioning/formatting of the hard disk with ‘y’.
(6) Wait until you get the final message on a terminal connected to the service
RS232 port or wait until control LED of floppy disk drive is off.
(7) Insert the Portex Installer 2/2 floppy into the disk drive of the digitizer.
(8) Press the Reset on Ariel-CPU or turn Power Off/On of the digitizer.
RS232 port or wait until control LED of floppy disk drive is off.
(10) Remove floppy (don't insert any other floppy).
(11) Press the Reset on CPU-Board or turn Power Off/On the digitizer.
(12) Wait until you get the final message on a Terminal connected to the service
RS232 port, or wait approximately 2 minutes.
(13) Insert the Release Disk 1/3 floppy into the disk drive of the digitizer.
(14) Press the Reset button on Ariel-CPU or turn power off/on of the digitizer.
RS232 port, or wait until control LED of floppy disk drive is off.
(16) Proceed the same way with the Release Disk 2/3 and 3/3.
(17) Press the Reset button on Oberon-CPU or turn power off/on of the digitizer and
wait until system is up.


Repair and Service
NOTE:
In case of an already installed device (e.g. exchange of hard disk), restore the device
specific parameters by following the guidelines of the Service Menu Topic Install from
floppy, Machine specific data.
Without restoring the device specific parameters, an operation is not possible.
Then parse the CPF-File using the guidelines of the Service Menu Topic Install from
floppy, CPF-File, displayed on the user interface.
(18) Reconnect the digitizer to the network.

(19) Make a new backup (therefore you find an empty floppy within the set of
delivered floppies).


Chapter 3.6
Imaging Services
Adjustments and Calibrations
CR 85-X
Type 5148/100
CR 75.0
Type 5146/105
(as of SN ≥ 6000)

This document describes adjustments and calibration procedures for the digitizer.

Document Title
DD+DIS028.07E


eq_03-6_adjustments_e_template_v02
Repair and Service
DD+DIS378.05E Adjustments and Calibrations
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
(a) Read the "Generic Safety Directions" document
the equipment.
(b) Strictly observe all safety directions within the "Generic Safety Directions" and
on the product.


Repair and Service
LIST OF CONTENTS
1 OVERVIEW OF POSSIBLE ADJUSTMENTS ..........................................................................4

2 MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENTS...............................................................................................5
2.1 Adjustment of Rotation Unit ......................................................................................................5
2.1.1 General .....................................................................................................................................5
2.1.2 Turning Cassette Module 1 / 2 to the right side ........................................................................7
2.1.3 Checking Position visually ........................................................................................................8
2.1.4 Movement of flag on Cassette Module 1 / 2 to left / right side..................................................9
2.1.5 Performing Adjustment Cycle .................................................................................................10
2.2 Adjustment of Guiding Plate in Postscan Unit ........................................................................10
2.2.1 General ...................................................................................................................................10
2.2.2 Adjustment Procedure ............................................................................................................11
2.3 Adjustment of Suction Cups....................................................................................................13
2.4 Adjustment Cycle of Transport Robot.....................................................................................14
3 OPTICAL ADJUSTMENTS.....................................................................................................17
3.1 Possible Reasons for a Calibration.........................................................................................17
3.2 Preparation of Calibration Procedures....................................................................................18
3.2.1 Exposure of the Cassette........................................................................................................20
3.3 IP-Center Calibration (BOL/BOS Adjustment) ........................................................................21
3.3.1 Starting IP Center Calibration .................................................................................................21
3.3.2 Possible Results of the IP Center Calibration.........................................................................21
3.4 Performing Shading Calibration ..............................................................................................22
3.4.1 Starting Shading Calibration Procedure .................................................................................22
3.4.2 Possible Results of the Shading Calibration...........................................................................22
3.4.3 Overexposed (SAL12bit > 4094) ...........................................................................................24
4 CHECKING IMAGE QUALITY................................................................................................27

5 BACKUP .................................................................................................................................27


Repair and Service
1 Overview of possible Adjustments
Adjustments
mechanical optical
see 2 see 3
Rotation Unit
see 2.1 IP Center
Calibration
see 3.3
Guiding Plate
see 2.2
Shading
Calibration
Suction Cups see 3.4
see 2.3
Adjustment Cycle
see 2.4


Repair and Service
2 Mechanical Adjustments
2.1 Adjustment of Rotation Unit

2.1.1 General
For orientation the two modules of the Cassette Unit are marked with stickers
“Module 1” and “Module 2” on the front side. Adjustment needs to be done if the light
barrier flag is misadjusted and as a result the suction cups do not suck the IP properly.
Carry out this adjustment only if it is sure that the rotation unit is misadjusted, see
check at 2.1.3. As normally the light barrier flag is preadjusted in production and
secured by a positioning bracket.
DANGER:
The rotation drive turns very quickly! Keep hair, hand and clothing clear when
machine is running with the doors open.


Repair and Service
Overview of the Procedure
Enter Service Menu
to the right side

(see 2.1.2)
Too far left Check Position Too far right

visually (see 2.1.3)
OK
Turn Cassette Module 2 Turn Cassette Module 2

to the right side to the right side
(see 2.1.2) (see 2.1.2)
Move flag on Cassette Move flag on Cassette

Module 2 to the left Module 2 to the right
side (see 2.1.4) side (see 2.1.4)
Turn Cassette Module 2

to the right side
(see 2.1.2)
Too far left Check Position Too far right

visually (see 2.1.3)
OK
Turn Cassette Module 1 Turn Cassette Module 1

to the right side to the right side
(see 2.1.2) (see 2.1.2)
Move flag on Cassette Move flag on Cassette

Module 1 to the left Module 1 to the right
side (see 2.1.4)
Perform an Adjustment Cycle

(see 2.1.5)


Repair and Service
2.1.2 Turning Cassette Module 1 / 2 to the right side
(1) Enter the Service menu
(2) Select
<7 DIAGNOSTICS>
(3) Select
<2 Mechanical modules>
T
(4) Select 1 Input buffer & R/F tag Service menu

2 Cassette module 1 Mech.modules
<2 Cassette module 1> 3 Cassette module 2
resp. 4 Rotation Unit : cancel
5 Prescan transp. + vac. : ok
<3 Cassette module 2> 6 Scanner
The selected cassette module 7 Postscan transport
will be moved in input position.
514636cc.cdr
(5) Press confirm key
(6) Check and press the Check that nothing blocks Service menu
DIAGNOSTICS
rotation of cassette
confirm key modules (cassettes, pre- Cassette mod.
/postscan transport...) : ok
: exit
514536ba.cdr
(7) Press confirm key Press to turn cassette Service menu

DIAGNOSTICS
module 2 to right side
(input). Takes max. 75 s Cassette mod.
: ok
: exit
514536bb.cdr
(8) Press right arrow key → to exit Note: Rotation motor is Service menu
currentless now. Thus you DIAGNOSTICS
can turn cassette modules Cassette mod.
by hand and open them to : ok
watch mechanics if : exit
necessary.
514536bc.cdr


Repair and Service
(9) Press confirm key Service menu

DIAGNOSTICS
Cassette mod.
Result: Test terminated : ok
514536bd.cdr
(10) Check if an error occurred
2.1.3 Checking Position visually
Rough check of ideal

position
Middle axis of the two cassette

modules 1 and hole in the
frame 2 are exactly on one line Cassette Unit
3 (see figure 1).
5148_Chap3.6_001.CDR
figure 1


Repair and Service
Fine check of ideal position D istan ce 1 = D ista nce 2

2
1
Distance 1 = Distance 2 if flag
is adjusted correctly
(see figure 2).
5145_109.02_aa.CDR
figure 2
2.1.4 Movement of flag on Cassette Module 1 / 2 to left / right side

The movement of the flag is approximately equal to the difference of the middle axis of
the cassette modules to the hole in the frame (e.g. if cassette module 1 is 2 mm too far
left, move the flag on cassette module 2 for 2 mm to the left side).
(1) Unscrew the two screws

of the positioning
bracket.
(2) Loosen the two screws
of the light barrier flag
and move it in
corresponding direction.
(3) Tighten the screws.
(4) Screw on positioning
bracket.
figure 3


Repair and Service
2.1.5 Performing Adjustment Cycle
NOTE:
Make sure that the position of both cassette modules are correct before you perform
an Adjustment Cyle (see 2.4 of this Chapter).
2.2 Adjustment of Guiding Plate in Postscan Unit

2.2.1 General
If a guiding plate is not in perfect
position the IP may be misguided. The
robot carriage cannot insert the IP in
the cassette correctly.
Error message 22D60: “Cassette jam

occurred during output in output buffer”
figure 4
1 2 3
Guiding plate too far left: Guiding plate too far right: Guiding plate correct:
IP will miss the cassette IP will miss the cassette IP will enter the cassette
Cassette
IP
Guiding plate
figure 5


Repair and Service
2.2.2 Adjustment Procedure
(1) Take the transport unit out of the digitizer
(2) Loosen the screws that hold the guiding plate
(3) Put the suction cups of the robot carriage in upward position
(4) Move the robot carriage

manually upwards to the top
figure 6
(5) During the last 10 cm of the upward movement the space between the
white plastic gearwheel and the guiding plate has to be examined
(6) While the robot carriage is being moved to the very top the plastic gear
wheel comes very close to the guiding plate


Repair and Service
(7) When the plastic gear wheel

reaches the closest point to the
guiding plate, the space should
1 -2 m m
not exceed 1 or 2 mm
figure 7
(8) If the guiding plate touches the plastic gear wheel, touch the bottom
ledge of the guiding plate and move the guiding plate away from the
plastic gear wheel
(9) If the space between guiding plate and plastic gear wheel is more than
2 mm, touch the bottom ledge of the guiding plate and move the
guiding plate towards the plastic gear wheel
(10) When the perfect space is reached (1 or 2 mm), fix one screw at the
front of the ledge and check the distance again
(11) If the space is different to 1 or 2 mm, readjust the guiding plate
(12) Repeat readjustment until the screws are fixed and the perfect space is
reached
(13) Move the IP transport unit back in its work position


Repair and Service
2.3 Adjustment of Suction Cups

Problems with insufficient vacuum at the image plate can be caused by non parallel
suction cups. To check if the suction cups are parallel, work out the following steps:
(1) Take the transport unit out of the digitizer
(2) The robot needs to be in lowest position at the transport unit and in
horizontal alignment.
(3) Check if the rib of the suction cup

holder of the input robot
corresponds with the upper
recess of the suction arm
figure 8
(4) Check if the rib of the suction cup

holder of the output robot
corresponds with the lower
recess of the suction arm
figure 9


Repair and Service
2.4 Adjustment Cycle of Transport Robot

An adjustment cycle is necessary to define the position of the suction cups and the
return position of the IP.
NOTE:
Before an adjustment cycle is carried out, make sure that both cassette modules of the
rotation unit are adjusted correctly (see 2.1 of this Chapter).
(Shown display menus are based on Software Version ACP_1104 and may vary with
further Software updates.)

(2) Select
<2 MAINTENANCE>
(3) Select 1 SAL inspection Service menu

2 Calibration Maintenance
<3 Test and adjust 3 Test and adjust cycle
cycle> 4 Confirm maintenance : cancel
5 Confirm repair : ok
6 Clear infocounter
7 Confirm modification
8 Confirm installation
514566dd.cdr
(4) Select
<5 Adjustment cycle>
(5) Start the adjustment cycle by

inserting a large format ADC
Cassette
(6) The vertical adjustment is done

by pressing the arrow keys at the
keypad of the digitizer


Repair and Service
(7) Check the horizontal position of

the IP inside the Cassette by ADC Cassette 2 mm
moving the IP carefully by hand
while the suction cups are still
holding the IP. Image Plate
The ideal position of the IP is in

the middle of the Cassette or
2 mm
with a tendency to the right side
of the Cassette (towards the front
of the digitizer). Tolerance is 2
mm figure 10
(8) If the IP is not in the right

position you have to move the IP
stop plate:
• Mark the start position on

plate and screw with a vertical
line with a permanent marker.
• Movement of the plate is
equivalent to the change in
position of the IP in the
Cassette.
figure 11
(9) Select
<2 MAINTENANCE>
(10) Select 1 SAL inspection Service menu

2 Calibration Maintenance
<3 Test and adjust 3 Test and adjust cycle
cycle> 4 Confirm maintenance : cancel
5 Confirm repair : ok
6 Clear infocounter
7 Confirm modification
8 Confirm installation
514566dd.cdr
(11) Select 1 Scan with transmission Service menu

<4 Handling Cycle> 2 Scan cycle - no image Maintenance
3 Scan - no era, no img Test cycle
4 Handling Cycle : cancel
5 Adjustment cycle : ok
514666ca.cdr


Repair and Service
(12) Carry out two cycles without changing the adjustment, because the
second time the other Cassette Module is picking up the IP.
(13) Check the position of the IP in the cassette.
(14) If the position is ok, repeat the procedure <Handling Cycle> three
times with a cassette format 35 x 43 cm and three times with 18 x 24
cm.
If the position is not ok, you have to find a compromise for both units.
Move the stop plate corresponding to the IP position but remember, it
will also affect the other unit. Redo (12) to (16) until the position is for
both units ok (see above).
(15) Create a new backup floppy to save the settings for the vertical
adjustment.


Repair and Service
3 Optical Adjustments
3.1 Possible Reasons for a Calibration
Symptom Defect Solution

Exchange of the optic New optic module needs First carry out an IP center
module to be adapted to the calibration and afterwards a
digitizer shading calibration
Exchange of the BOS Adjustment of the new First carry out an IP center
sensor (GS626/GS628) sensor needs to be calibration and afterwards a
adapted to the digitizer shading calibration
Exchange of the photo No power supply • Check connections
multiplier
• Carry out a shading
New photomultiplier calibration
needs to be adapted to
the digitizer
Exchange of the scan New scan unit can be Check image quality with a flat
unit misadjusted field:
• If the quality is ok, you do not
have to carry out any
adjustment
• If the image has stripes in
slow-scan direction, first
carry out an IP center
calibration and afterwards a
shading calibration
Inhomogeneous images Scan area can be dusty • Check if there is dust in the
with lines in slow-scan scan area and clean it with
direction the scan brush if necessary
Relation between • Check the image quality
correction factor and again and if it is still
light collector can be inhomogeneous, carry out a
different calibration
Inhomogeneous images X-ray device causes Cannot be solved by an
with two-dimensional inhomogeneities adjustment of the digitizer!
errors


Repair and Service
3.2 Preparation of Calibration Procedures
NOTE:
The GenRad X-Ray source can be used for all calibrations, the GenRad calibrations,
the Mammo and Extremity calibrations.
For each calibration procedure you need a copper filter and an erased image plate,
which is dry, clean and immaculate. The cassette with the image plate inside should
not be identified. If it is identified, an additional confirmation on the display is needed.
For the IP center calibration an exposed cassette with a size smaller than
35 x 43 cm is needed.
For the shading calibration four different steps are necessary:
(a) GenRad Calibration High Resolution

an exposed cassette only with 35 x 43 cm size format must be used (for detecting
the borders of the IP).
Display: 35CMX43CM. 0, 35CMX35CM. 0,
(b) GenRad Calibration Standard Resolution*

an exposed cassette only with 35 x 43 cm size format must be used (for detecting
the borders of the IP).
Display: 24CMX30CM. 2, 18CMX24CM.2
(c) Mammo Calibration

an exposed cassette with 35 x 43 cm size format can be used, but it is also
possible to use a min. 24 x 30 cm cassette (Mammo cassette also possible).
Display: 35CMX43CM. 9, 10INX12IN. 1,
* The Standard Resolution calibration is also scanned in HiRes mode, only the
applied pixel time is different.


Repair and Service
(d) Extremity Calibration

an exposed cassette with 35 x 43 cm size format can be used, but it is also
possible to use a min. 24 x 30 cm cassette (Mammo cassette also possible).
Display: 35CMX43CM. 3, 35CMX35CM. 3,
Which format shall be Service menu

calibrated? Maintenance
35CMX43CM.0,35CMX35CM.0, : cancel
24CMX30CM.2,18CMX24CM.2 : ok
35CMX43CM.9,10INX12IN.1,
35CMX43CM.3,35CMX35CM.3,
5148_chap3.1_001.cdr
figure 12: Example of calibration results as seen in the remote access mode.


Repair and Service
3.2.1 Exposure of the Cassette

The exposure of the cassette is equal for all calibrations:
The cassette must be exposed with 20 µGy in total. To achieve a good evenness of the
exposure it is recommended to expose two times with 10 µGy by turning the cassette
180° between the first and the second exposure.
Dose of 10 µGy can be typically achieved with:

• 12 mAs
• 75 kV
• 1.3 m distance
• large focus
• 1.5 mm copper filter
Best use a dosimeter to measure the dose!
For exposure place the cassette in length direction to the X-ray tube: (see figure 13)
OK not OK
figure 13
NOTE:
The entire image plate must be fully exposed!
No collimation is needed!
figure 14


Repair and Service
3.3 IP-Center Calibration (BOL/BOS Adjustment)

Close the doors of the digitizer during calibration.
3.3.1 Starting IP Center Calibration
(2) Select <2 MAINTENANCE>
(3) Select <2 Calibration>
(4) Select <2 IP center calibration>
(5) Parameters are shown on the display
(6) Insert small exposed cassette, select format and the calibration starts
automatically
(7) Follow the instructions on the display
3.3.2 Possible Results of the IP Center Calibration

• Calibration successful
• Failure – underexposed!
In this case, increase exposure dose and redo IP center calibration.
• Failure – overexposed!
In this case, decrease exposure dose and redo IP center calibration.
• Calibration failed!
• Big IP used!
In this case, use a format with a width smaller than 35 cm.
• No flat field?!
• Damaged IP edges?!
• Begin of IP not found!
• IP skewed!
• IP-center out of tolerance


Repair and Service
3.4 Performing Shading Calibration

Close the doors of the digitizer during calibration.
3.4.1 Starting Shading Calibration Procedure
(2) Select <2 MAINTENANCE>
(3) Select <2 Calibration>
(4) Select <1 Shading Calibration>
(5) Parameters are shown on the display
(6) Insert exposed cassette, select format and the calibration starts
automatically
(7) Follow the instructions on the display
3.4.2 Possible Results of the Shading Calibration

The Scan Average Level (SAL) is the digital value (gray scale) of a pixel and is one of
the criteria for a successful calibration. The values during a calibration must be in a
range of approximately 730 to 4095 with a 12 bit adjustment.
3.4.2.1 Successful Calibration
(1) Info message pops up and

calibration line is stored
automatically


Repair and Service
(2) Redo the calibration for the

other formats
figure 15
3.4.2.2 Underexposed (SAL12bit < 730)
(1) Failure message pops up
(2) Increase the exposure dose

and redo the calibration
figure 16
(3) If it is still underexposed check the following digitizer settings:
• Correct installation of the photomultiplier floppy after a replacement.
• Correct installation of the backup floppy after software installation with
formatting boot floppy.
• Check content of the nveSCN0 file where the parameters are included. It
must contain mfa and mfb values! If these values are equal to default
(mfa 2.9 and mfb 0.27) it can be, that the correct values have been lost at
a service interaction.


Repair and Service
3.4.3 Overexposed (SAL12bit > 4094)
(2) Reduce the exposure dose and

redo the calibration
figure 17
(3) If it is still overexposed check the following digitizer settings:

• Correct installation of the photomultiplier floppy after a replacement.
• Correct installation of the backup floppy after software installation with
formatting boot floppy.
• Check content of the file where the parameters are included. It must
contain mfa and mfb values! If these values are equal to default (mfa 2.9
and mfb 0.27) it can be, that the correct values have been lost at a
service interaction.


Repair and Service
3.4.3.1 Dust detected
(2) Clean the optics with the built-in

brush
figure 18
(3) Check if the exposure was really a flat field
(4) Check the image plate for scratches in slow-scan direction
(5) If none of these actions show success, look at the calibration curves with a
browser and analyze the flat field image at the workstation and go on there.
3.4.3.2 Bad IP (too big Deviations of the Border)
(3) Expose another image plate which is dry, clean and immaculate.
(4) Redo calibration


Repair and Service
3.4.3.3 No Flat Field (dynamic range bigger than 1:2)
(2) Check if the exposure was

really a flat field
figure 19
(3) Make sure that the image plate was exposed without collimation
(4) Check the image plate for scratches in slow-scan direction
(5) Redo calibration
3.4.3.4 Skewing (warning)


Repair and Service
4 Checking Image Quality

Check the image quality with flatfield exposures.
5 Backup
• Update the backup to save the new machine specific data (calibration, PD-factor).
• Select <3 Save on floppy>
• Follow the on-line instructions.


Chapter 3.7
Imaging Services
Software Menus, Settings
CR 85-X
Type 5148/100
CR 75.0
Type 5146/105
(as of SN ≥ 6000)
Chapter 3.7 is not applicable and therefore intentionally left blank.


eq_03-7_menus-setting_e_template_v02
Chapter 3.8
Imaging Services
Software Releases and Patches
CR 85-X
Type 5148/100
CR 75.0
Type 5146/105
(as of SN ≥ 6000)

This document describes software releases and patches for the digitizer.

Document Title
DD+DIS028.07E


eq_03-8_release-patch_e_template_v02
Repair and Service
DD+DIS378.05E Software Releases and Patches
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
the equipment.
on the product.


Repair and Service
LIST OF CONTENTS
1 RELEASE INFORMATION FOR SOFTWARE ACP_4007.......................................................4

1.1 Changed Functionality compared to Version ACP_4005 .........................................................4
1.2 Open Bugs ................................................................................................................................4
1.2.1 User Interface............................................................................................................................4
1.2.2 Image Processing .....................................................................................................................4
1.2.3 Repair and Maintenance...........................................................................................................5
2 RELEASE INFO FOR DIGITIZER SOFTWARE ACP_4005 ....................................................6

2.1 Changed Functionality ..............................................................................................................6
2.2 Solved Bugs ..............................................................................................................................6
2.3 Open Bugs ................................................................................................................................6
2.3.1 User Interface............................................................................................................................6
2.3.2 Image Processing .....................................................................................................................7
2.3.3 Repair and Maintenance...........................................................................................................7


Repair and Service
1 Release Information for Software ACP_4007
1.1 Changed Functionality compared to Version ACP_4005
Internal configuration values of the photomultiplier in CR 85-X are now checked to be

within the specified range.
1.2 Open Bugs
1.2.1 User Interface
1. The language for the Operator and Key Operator menus cannot be changed
since the necessary language files are not available.
This bug does not impact the digitizer operation.
2. The digitizer type shown in the Web interface is wrong.

This bug does not impact the correct functioning of the Web interface.
1.2.2 Image Processing
1. A barely recognizable density change in black regions of images may occur.

The cause is that the photomultiplier signal (SAL) for very low signal levels
does not follow the Gaussian distribution.
This bug is not significant for medical diagnostics.
2. In a special test case the error 20443 occurred:

"Pixel FIFO full condition detected. Pixels were lost."


Repair and Service
1.2.3 Repair and Maintenance
1. If the installation of a hardware modification floppy disk is not immediately

followed by a digitizer reset then there are no modification entries in the
info counter.
Workaround Press the <Reset> switch at the cPCI rack after the installation of
each hardware modification floppy disk.
2. After photomultiplier exchange the CR 85-X refuses scanning with the message
"Calibration is missing".
Workaround Perform IP Center calibration and Shading calibration.
3. After installation of a new Customization Parameters File (CPF) the application

Mammo is disabled.
Workaround Enable Mammo manually in the Service menu.


Repair and Service
2 Release Info for Digitizer Software ACP_4005
NOTE:
The digitizer software for CR 85-X is based on the software for the
CR 75.0 digitizer. Changes and solved bugs refer to the
predecessor CR 75.0 software, version ACP_3403.
2.1 Changed Functionality
The digitizer CR 85-X is supported additionally.
2.2 Solved Bugs
1. An internal configuration value (Upper Limit MFB) is corrected which had been
changed erroneously in software version ACP_3403.
2. The Mammo factor has been adapted.
2.3 Open Bugs
2.3.1 User Interface



Repair and Service
2.3.2 Image Processing

The cause is that the photomultiplier signal (SAL) for very low signal levels
does not follow the Gaussian distribution.

"Pixel FIFO full condition detected. Pixels were lost.".
2.3.3 Repair and Maintenance

info counter.
Workaround Reset the digitizer after the installation of each

hardware modification floppy disk.
Workaround Perform IP Center calibration and Shading calibration.

Mammo is disabled.
Workaround Enable Mammo manually in the Service menu.


Chapter 3.9
Imaging Services
FAQ - Frequently Asked Questions
CR 85-X
Type 5148/100
CR 75.0
Type 5146/105
(as of SN ≥ 6000)
Chapter 3.9 is not applicable and therefore intentionally left blank.


eq_03-9_faq_e_template_v02
Imaging Services Reference and Circuit Diagrams
CR 85-X
Type 5148/100
CR 75.0
Type 5146/105
(as of SN ≥ 6000)

This document contains:
• reference diagrams for identification and location of assemblies inside the
machine including an alphanumeric reference list
• block diagrams and overall diagrams
• circuit diagrams of printed circuit boards, if necessary

Document Title
DD+DIS028.07E


eq_04_diagrams_e_template_v02
DD+DIS378.05E Reference and Circuit Diagrams
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
the equipment.
on the product.


LIST OF CONTENTS
1 UNITS OF THE DIGITIZER (OVERVIEW) ...............................................................................5

2 FRAME / ROTATION UNIT (ASSEMBLY NO. 100) .................................................................6
2.1 Diagram.....................................................................................................................................6
2.2 Table of Components................................................................................................................7
3 POWER UNIT (ASSEMBLY NO. 100)......................................................................................8

3.1 Diagram.....................................................................................................................................8
3.2 Table of Components................................................................................................................9
4 CASSETTE MODULE 1 (ASSEMBLY NO. 200) ....................................................................10

4.1 Diagram...................................................................................................................................10
4.2 Table of Components..............................................................................................................11
5 CASSETTE MODULE 2 (ASSEMBLY NO. 200) ....................................................................12

5.1 Diagram...................................................................................................................................12
6 CPCI – RACK (ASSEMBLY NO. 300) ....................................................................................14

6.1 Diagram...................................................................................................................................14
7 IP – TRANSPORT UNIT PRESCAN (ASSEMBLY 400).........................................................16

7.1 Diagram...................................................................................................................................16
8 IP – TRANSPORT UNIT POSTSCAN (ASSEMBLY 400) ......................................................18

8.1 Diagram...................................................................................................................................18
9 INPUT BUFFER (ASSEMBLY 500)........................................................................................20

9.1 Diagram...................................................................................................................................20


10 OUTPUT BUFFER (ASSEMBLY 500)....................................................................................22

10.1 Diagram...................................................................................................................................22
11 OPERATION TERMINAL (ASSEMBLY 500)..........................................................................24

11.1 Diagram...................................................................................................................................24
12 OPTIC MODULE – TOP VIEW (ASSEMBLY 600) .................................................................26

12.1 Diagram...................................................................................................................................26
13 OPTIC MODULE – BOTTOM VIEW (ASSEMBLY 600) .........................................................28

13.1 Diagram...................................................................................................................................28
14 ERASURE UNIT (ASSEMBLY 700) .......................................................................................30

14.1 Diagram...................................................................................................................................30


A Identification Diagrams
1 Units of the Digitizer (Overview)
100
500
100
100 Frame / Rotation Unit

PowerUnit
200 Cassette Unit 1 /
Cassette Unit 2
500 300 cPCI Rack
400 IP Transport Units
300 Prescan / Postscan
500 Inputbuffer /
Outputbuffer
200 600 Optic Module
700 Erasure Unit
200
400
100
700
400
600


2 Frame / Rotation Unit (Assembly No. 100)

2.1 Diagram
MC101
GS204
GS314
ST319
1 8
M212
JL1
GS202
G S206


2.2 Table of Components
Ass. Abbre- Designation Function Circuit

viation Diagram
(also used by Page/
Diagnosis Mode) Coord.
100 GS202 ROTATION-BD Rotation unit stepper motor 2/C1–E1
control board
100 GS204 ROT-WORKPOS- Rotation unit work position (light 2/F1
LS barrier)
100 GS206 ROTAT-O-POS-LS Rotation unit home-position (light 2/F1
barrier)
100 MC101 LINE-FILTER 2-phase line filter for power supply 1/A6–B6
100 M212 ROTATION DRIVE Motor for rotation unit 2/B1
300 GS314 IOBUS-DISTRIB. I/O-BUS distributor board 3/G5–G6
(see pages 14/15)
300 ST319 ETHERNET Ethernet connector 3/H2
(see pages 14/15)


3 Power Unit (Assembly No. 100)

3.1 Diagram
Si1 GS100
Si2
Si3
Si4
Si6
Si7
TR106 Si8
Si9
S103 Si10
Si11
M101 Si12
Si13
GS102
TR105
GS104
S102
TR104
TR103
TR102 5 1 46 0 7af.cd r
TR101


Ass. Abbre- Designation Fuse Quality

viation
(also used by
Diagnosis Mode)
100 GS100 M-S-BOARD SI 1 T 2.5A
SI 2 T 2.5A
SI 3 T 2.5A
SI 4 T 1A
SI 5 T 1A
SI 6 T 1A
SI 7 T 1A
SI 8 T 1A
SI 9 T 1A
SI 10 T 1A
SI 11 T 1A
SI 12 T 1A
SI 13 T 2.5A
ÆM-S_Board on circuit diagram page 1, coord.B/C1 – B/C4

viation Diagram
(also used by Page/
Diagnosis Mode) Coord.
100 TR101 Transformer Erasure Transformer Unit 1/F5
100 GS102 ERASURE-CTRL- Erasure control board 1/E1–E6
BD
100 GS104 CURRENT-SENSE Current Sense Board for Erasure 1/H3–H4
Unit
100 M101 POWER-UNIT-FAN Power Unit Fan 1/D1
100 MC101 LINE FILTER 2-phase Line Filter 1/A6–B6
100 S102 INTERLOCK Safety switch 1/D6
100 S103 MAIN SWITCH Main Switch 1/C6


4 Cassette Module 1 (Assembly No. 200)

4.1 Diagram
8
JL1
G S210
JL2
1
1
G S220
G S230 G S216
G S214 M 205
M 202
M 201
M 203
M 204
G S222
G S226
G S224
5 14 60 7a k.cd r
G S228



viation Diagram
(also used by Page/
diagnosis Mode) Coord.
200 M201 CASS1-ROLLER- Cassette Module 1: Roller Motor 2/B2–B3
MOT
200 M202 CASS1-LIFT-MOT Cassette Module 1: Lift Motor 2/C2–C3
200 M203 CASS1-CLAMP- Cassette Module 1: Clamp Motor 2/D2–D3
MOT
200 M204 CASS1-OPENER- Cassette Module 1: Opener 2/B2–B3
MOT Motor
200 M205 CASS1-BELT-MOT Cassette Module 1: Belt Motor 2/D2–D3
200 GS210 5FOLD-ST-CASS1 Cassette Module 1: 5fold 2/B4–E5
stepper motor board
200 GS214 CASS1-LIFT-O-LS Cassette Module 1: Lift- 2/D6
homeposition (light barrier)
200 GS216 CASS1-IN-DET-LS Cassette Module 1: Cassette 2/C6
(receiver) Detection (light barrier)
200 GS220 CASS1-BELT-O-LS Cassette Module 1: Belt- 2/E6
200 GS222 CASS1-IN-DET-LS Cassette Module 1 Cassette 2/B6–C6
(transmitter) Detection (light barrier)
200 GS224 CASS1-CLAMP-O- Cassette Module 1: Clamp- 2/D6
LS homeposition (light barrier)
200 GS226 CASS1-SWITCH Cassette Module 1: Cassette 2/B6
Stop Switch
200 GS228 CASS1-OPEN-O- Cassette Module 1: Open- 2/B6
200 GS230 CASS1-CLAMP-LS Cassette Module 1: Clamp- 2/C6
position (light barrier)


5 Cassette Module 2 (Assembly No. 200)

5.1 Diagram
8
JL1
GS260
JL2
1
1
GS270
GS280 GS266
GS265 M210
M207
M206
M208
M209
GS278
GS276
GS274
5 14 60 7 al.cd r
GS277



viation Diagram
(also used by Page/
200 M206 CASS2-ROLLER- Cassette Module 2: Roller Motor 2/F2–F3
MOT
200 M207 CASS2-LIFT-MOT Cassette Module 2: Lift Motor 2/G2–G3
200 M208 CASS2-CLAMP- Cassette Module 2: Clamp Motor 2/H2–H3
MOT
200 M209 CASS2-OPEN-MOT Cassette Module 2: Opener 2/F2–F3
Motor
200 M210 CASS2-BELT-MOT Cassette Module 2: Belt Motor 2/H2–H3
200 GS260 5FOLD-ST-CASS2 Cassette Module 2: 5fold 2/F4–H5
stepper motor board
200 GS265 CASS2-LIFT-O-LS Cassette Module 2: Lift- 2/H6
200 GS266 CASS2-IN-DET-LS Cassette Module 2: Cassette 2/G6
(receiver) Detection (light barrier)
200 GS270 CASS2-BELT-O-LS Cassette Module 2: Belt- 2/H6
200 GS274 CASS2-CLAMP-O- Cassette Module 2: Clamp- 2/H6
200 GS276 CASS2-SWITCH Cassette Module 2: Cassette 2/F6
Stop Switch
200 GS277 CASS2-OPEN-O- Cassette Module 2: Open- 2/F7
200 GS278 CASS2-IN-DET-LS Cassette Module 2: Cassette 2/F6–G6
(transmitter) Detection (light barrier)
200 GS280 CASS2-CLAMP-LS Cassette Module 2: Clamp- 2/G6
position (light barrier)


6 cPCI – Rack (Assembly No. 300)

6.1 Diagram
M701
M300
GS302
GS304
GS300
GS310
GS312 GS306



viation Diagram
(also used by Page/
300 M300 cPCI-RACK-FAN cPCI-Rack: Fan 3/C6
300 GS300 BACKPLANE cCPI-Rack: Backplane 3/D1–D6
300 GS302 HARDDISK cCPI-Rack: Harddisk drive 3/B1–B2
300 GS304 FLOPPY cCPI-Rack: Floppy drive 3/B2
300 GS306 cPCI-POWER cCPI-Rack: Power unit 3/E6
300 GS310 SCAN-CTRL- Scan Master Board 3/E2–E4
MASTER
300 GS312 CPU-OBERON CPU-Oberon 3/E1–E2
300 GS314 IOBUS-DISTRIB I/O-BUS distributor board 3/G5–G6
(see pages 6/7)
300 ST319 ETHERNET Ethernet connector 3/H2
(see pages 6/7)
700 M701 ERASURE-UNIT- Erasure Unit Fan 7/E2–F2
FAN
(see pages 30/31)


7 IP – Transport Unit Prescan (Assembly 400)

7.1 Diagram
MG422
JL1 GS420
1
5 1 4 60 7a j.cd r
GS434
GS432
M403 GS426
GS424 M402
GS428
1 JL1 8



viation Diagram
(also used by Page/
400 M402 PRE-SUCT-DRIVE Prescan suction motor 4/H3
400 M403 PRE-SLED-DRIVE Prescan robot motor 4/H2
400 MG422 SOL-VALE-PRE Solenoid valve - prescan 4/H5
400 GS420 PUMP-PRESC Vacuum pump - prescan 4/H4–H5
400 GS424 PRE-SUC-POS-LS Suction position – prescan (light 4/E3–F3

barrier)
400 GS426 PRESC-SUCT-O- Suction homeposition – prescan 4/F3

LS (light barrier)
400 GS428 PRE-SUCTION-BD Prescan suction board 4/G2–H2
400 GS430 PRE-SLEDPOS-LS Robot - workposition – prescan 4/E2–F2

(light barrier)
400 GS432 PRESC-SLED-O- Robot homeposition - prescan 4/F2

LS (light barrier)
400 GS434 PRESCAN-SLED- Prescan robot board 4/G1–H2

BD


8 IP – Transport Unit Postscan (Assembly 400)

8.1 Diagram
MG411
GS402
MG402
GS406
MG401
GS404
JL1 1
GS412
M400 GS410
GS414 GS408 M401
GS416
GS418
8 JL1 1



viation diagram
(also used by Page/
400 M400 POST-SUCT-DRV Postscan suction motor 4/D2
400 M401 POST-SLED-DRV Postscan robot motor 4/D1
400 MG401 POINDS-MG-LEFT Solenoid valve for parking 4/A3

position robot - left
400 MG402 POINDS-MG- Solenoid valve for parking 4/D3

RIGHT position robot - right
400 MG411 SOL-VALE-POST Solenoid valve – 4/D5–E5

postscan
400 GS402 PUMP-POSTSC Vacuum Pump - postscan 4/D4–D5
400 GS404 POINDS-LEFT-LS Parking position for robot 4/A4

– left (light barrier)
400 GS406 POINDS-RIGHT-LS Parking position for robot 4/D4

– right (light barrier)
400 GS408 POST-SUCT-POS- Suction position - 4/A2

LS postscan (light barrier)
400 GS410 POST-SUCT-O-LS Suction homeposition 4/B2

(light barrier)
400 GS412 POSTSC-SUCT-BD Postscan suction board 4/C2–D2
400 GS414 POST-SLEDPOS- Robot workposition - 4/A1

LS postscan (light barrier)
400 GS416 POST-SLED-O-LS Robot homeposition – 4/B1

postscan (light barrier)
400 GS418 POST-SLED-BD Postscan robot board 4/C1–D1


9 Input Buffer (Assembly 500)

9.1 Diagram
JL1
1 8
GS514 GS510
GS518
M514
GS516
M513 GS512
GS530 GS534 514607an.cdr

8
GS532
JL1
GS536
1
GS538
GS540



viation Diagram
(also used by Page/
500 M513 IBUFF-DOOR-DRV Input buffer door motor 5/G3
500 M514 INBUFF-BLT-DRV Input buffer belt motor 5/D3
500 GS510 INBUFF-BELT-BD Input buffer belt board 5/D4–D5
500 GS512 INBUFF-CASS-DET Input buffer cassette detection 5/E5

board
500 GS514 INBUFF-CASS-DET Input buffer cassette detection 5/E6

(receiver) (light barrier)
500 GS516 INBUFF-CASS-DET Input buffer cassette detection 5/D6–E6

(transmitter) (light barrier)
500 GS518 INBUFF-BELT-LS Input buffer belt-position (light 5/D6

barrier)
500 GS530 EMERGENCY Emergency Node 5/H6

NODE
500 GS532 INBUFF-DOOR-BD Input buffer door board 5/G4–G5
500 GS534 INBUFF-DOOR-LS Input buffer door position (light 5/G6

barrier)
500 GS536 RF-TAG-READER RF-tag Reader 5/H3
500 GS538 RF-TAG-ANTENNA RF-tag antenna 5/H4–H6
500 GS540 CASS-DOT-DET Cassette Dot Detection 5/F6

(to recognize ADC cassettes)


10 Output Buffer (Assembly 500)

10.1 Diagram
JL1
1 8
GS552
M516
GS554
GS560
GS562
GS556 GS558 M515 GS564
514607ao.cdr
1 JL1 8



viation Diagram
(also used by Page/
500 M515 OUTB-ROLL-DRV Output buffer roller drive motor 5/C3
500 M516 OUTB-PUSH-DRV Output buffer push drive motor 5/A3
500 GS552 OUTBUFF-PUSH-BD Output buffer push board 5/A4–A5
500 GS554 OUTBUFF-PUSH-LS Output buffer push position 5/A6

(light barrier)
500 GS556 OUTBUFF-ROLL-BD Output buffer roller board 5/B4–C5
500 GS558 OBUFF-CASS-DET Output buffer cassette 5/B5

Detection board
500 GS560 OBUFF-CASS-DET Output buffer cassette 5/B6

(receiver) detection (light barrier)
500 GS562 OBUFF-CASS-DET Output buffer cassette 5/A6

(transmitter) detection (light barrier)
500 GS564 OUTBUFF-ROLL-LS Output buffer roller position 5/C6

(light barrier)


11 Operation Terminal (Assembly 500)

11.1 Diagram
GS570 GS568
GS566



viation Diagram
(also used by Page/
500 GS566 LCD-TERMINAL- LCD-Terminal Board 5/B1–B2
BD
500 GS568 DISPLAY-LCD- Display LCD Module 5/A2
MOD
500 GS570 FLACHKEYBOARD Keyboard 5/A1–B1


12 Optic Module – Top View (Assembly 600)

12.1 Diagram
8
JL2
JL1
GS610
1
1
GS620
GS622 GS616
GS612
M622
M702
M612
5148_Chap04_001.CDR



viation Diagram
(also used by Page/
600 M702 SLOWSCAN-DRV Slowscan drive motor 6/E1
600 M612 POST-ALIGN-DRV Postscan alignment drive motor 6/D1
600 M622 PRE-ALIGN-DRV Prescan alignment drive motor 6/G1
600 GS610 5FOLD-ST-SCAN 5fold stepper motor board of 6/D3–H3

scan unit
600 GS612 POST-ALIGN-LS Postscan alignment position 6/D4–E4

(light barrier)
600 GS616 PRE-ALIGN-LS Prescan alignment position (light 6/H4

barrier)
600 GS620 OPTIC MODUL Optic Module 6/B1–B2
600 GS622 PM-TUBE Photomultiplier Tube 6/B4–C4


13 Optic Module – Bottom View (Assembly 600)
13.1 Diagram
M621
GS628
GS618
GS614 GS626
5148_Chap04_002.CDR



viation Diagram
(also used by Page/
diagnosis mode) Coord.
600 M621 ROLL-LIFT-DRV Scan roller lift drive motor 6/H1
600 GS614 POST-IP-DET-LS Postscan IP-detection (light 6/E4
barrier)
600 GS618 ROLLER-LIFT-LS Roller-Lift-Pos (Gap light barrier) 6/H4
600 GS626 BEGIN-O-SCAN-LS Begin of scan position (light 6/F4
(transmitter) barrier)
600 GS628 BEGIN-O-SCAN-LS Begin of scan position (light 6/G4
(receiver) barrier)


14 Erasure Unit (Assembly 700)

14.1 Diagram
LA7
LA8
LA9
LA10
LA1
LA2
LA3
LA4
LA5
LA6



viation Diagram
(also used by Page/
700 LA1 – Lamps of the erasure unit 7/E5–H5
-----
LA10
700 M701 ERASURE-UNIT-FAN Erasure Unit Fan 7/F2
(see pages 14/15)
B Circuit Diagrams of
CR 85-X (CR 75.0 Type 5146/105) Digitizer
Overview of Circuit Diagrams F1.5148.4003.0
Sheet No. Sheet Name

(1) Power_Unit
(2) Cassette_Unit
(3) CPCI_Rack
(4) Pre_Post_Transport_Unit
(5) Input_and_OutputBuffer
(6) Scan_Optic_Unit
(7) Erase_Unit_700
The Circuit Diagrams (Sheets 1-7) can be found on the following pages.


A B C D E F G H
REARSIDE OF THE MACHINE
MC101-LINE-FILTER S103-MAIN-SWITCH S102-INTERLOCK

3120-F321-10A-V F82-A-B120-V
S103
S102
10EBH1-V
1 MC101 BU124 BU125 BU129 BU133 1
BU131 BU6
ST5
*3/3
INPUT N N1 1 1 11 12 1 1 7 8 1 1 1/3
BU132
3 4
Netz
1 1 3 3/3
Last
BU876
appliance inlet 250VAC 1 BU3-02A
BU134
ST110
10A BU123 BU130
IEC 320 22
BU122 1 21 1
L L1 1
Equipotentiality PE100 1 PE106

PE102
PE101
1
BU126
1 1
B9911095-V
ERASURE-TRANSF-UNIT
BU127 BU858 BU1 ST101
9 TR101
1/6 1 230VAC 11
13.0
VAC
2/6 2 8 208VAC
2 2
MA120 MA122 MA123 7 13
3/6 3 200VAC
/CPCI_RACK.1H 15
MA_DOOR_LEFT
13.0
VAC
4/6 4 6 3.2AT 0V
17
3 1 B9911095-V
2 3 3 1 BU2 ST102 TR102
1/6 1 9 230VAC 11
/CPCI_RACK.2A 1 2 2 1
POWER_RACK
13.0
1 1
VAC
BU105 ST105 2/6 2 8 208VAC
7 13
3/6 3 200VAC BU112 ST113
15
1 1
13.0
2 2
VAC
ERASURE_DRILLED
ST6 BU135 4/6 4 6 3.2AT 0V 3 3
1/2 1 4 4
2/2 2 17 5 5
3 D42 RED 200V D14 RED SI1-12 OK 6 6 3
B9911095-V 7 7
BU3 ST104 TR103
1/6 1 9 230VAC 11 8 8
BU136 9 9
13.0
ST5 D14 YELLOW +24V
VAC
X #25 D42 YELLOW 208V 10 10
#0/27 2/6 2 8 208VAC
/PRE_POST_TRANSPORT_UNIT.1H
Prescan
GND-5
D42 GREEN 230V D14 GREEN +5V 13
3/6 3 7 200VAC /ERASE_UNIT_700.3A
15
1 GND5 ST129 BU1 BU2 ST103
13.0
4 4/12 4/12 4
VAC
ST122 BU5
X
#25
ST3 BU113 BU137 ST4 4/6 4 6 3.2AT 0V 3 3/12 3/12 3
#0/27 *5/5 *5 *5 *5/5
/PRE_POST_TRANSPORT_UNIT.1D 12 12/12 12/12 12
Postscan GND_2 17 6 6/12 6/12 6
2 2/12 2/12 2
GND2 SI12 T1A D32 B9911095-V 11 11/12 11/12 11
BU4 ST106 TR104
1/6 1 9 230VAC 11 9 9/12 9/12 9
ST115 BU4 GS428-PRE-SUCTION-BD 1/12
1 1/12 1
13.0
+40V 1 1/9
VAC
SI11 T1A D29 7 7/12 7/12 7
+40V 2 2/9 2/6 2 8 208VAC 10 10/12 10/12 10
/INPUT_and_OUTPUTBUFFER.6C GND 4 4/9 GS434-PRESCAN-SLED-BD
SM_Outbuffer GND 13
4 5 5/9 SI10 T1A D28 3/6 3 7 200VAC 4
15
+40V 3 3/9 GS412-POSTSC-SUCT-BD
13.0
VAC
/CASSETTE_UNIT.6A GND 6 6/9 SI9 T1A D27 6 3.2AT
Cas_Rotation 4/6 4 0V
GND 7 7/9 GS418-POST-SLED-BD BU102 ST1
Signale 8 8/9 SI8 T1A D26 17 *20 #20/22
/ERASE_UNIT_700.5A
Erasure_Fan +24V 9 9/9
GS202-ROTATION-BD
B9911095-V
SI7 T1A D25 BU5 ST107 TR105 GS104 CURRENT-SENSE
ST116 BU3 1/6 1 9 230VAC 11 F8.5155.6440.x
+40V 1 1/4 GS552-OUTBUFF-PUSH-BD
13.0
VAC
/INPUT_and_OUTPUTBUFFER.6D GND 2 2/4 SI6 T1A D24
Inbuff_Belt 2/6 2 8 208VAC
+40V 3 3/4 GS556-OUTBUFF-ROLL-BD
/INPUT_and_OUTPUTBUFFER.6F GND 4 4/4 13
Inbuff_Door SI5 T1A D23 3/6 3 7 200VAC
15
GS532-INBUFF-DOOR-BD
13.0
VAC
SI4 T1A D22 4/6 4 6 3.2AT 0V
1 +40V 2 GND CASS_1
BU115 ST4 GS510-INBUFF-BELT-BD
3 +40V 4 GND CASS_2 17
*4 *4/4
/CASSETTE_UNIT.1A SI3 T2,5A D21 ST2 BU101
5 Cass_Unit1_2 GS610-5FOLD-ST-SCAN #20/22 *20 #20
5
SI2 T2,5A D20
GS260-5FOLD-ST-CASS2
ST117 BU2 ST3 BU114
1 +40V 2 GND *2 *2/2 SI1 T2,5A D19 1/6 1 11 15
/SCAN_OPTIC_UNIT.1F
SM_Scan GS210-5FOLD-ST-CASS1 230VAC /16
30VAC
2/6 2 10 208VAC
3/6 3 9 200VAC
SI13 T2,5A D33 Green POWER-UNIT-FAN
BU103 ST1 4/6 4 T6.3A 0V 18
+24V ST2 BU120 7
IO_MSB *26 *26/26 /19
#26 ALARM WHITE
3/3 3
S
/INPUT_and_OUTPUTBUFFER.6D TR106
GND BLACK GS102 ERASURE-CTRL-DB B9911091-V
2
2/3 2
F8.5155.6410.x
1/3 1 +24V RED
1
GS100 M-S-BOARD
*26/26
F8.5146.4893.x M101
ST1
BU6
We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa-
1/3
3/3
tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure
to third parties without express authority is strictly
6
6
BU104
*26
ST114
1
DATE NAME
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM Project
USER 2.11.05 Leith.
APPR.
CR85 5148
(1)
NORM Sheet name: POWER_UNIT / 100
forbidden.
Sheet 1
© AGFA
F1.5148.4003.0
#26
0 21957 8.21.05 of 7 SH

A B C D E F IDX Change-NR DATE NAME Replacement for
/POWER_UNIT.5
/CPCI_RACK.2H
A B C D E F G H
IO_Cass_Units
Cass_Unit1_2
PE8
XL200
F8.8360.7000.x F8.9499.6580.x F8.9499.4630.x F8.5100.7460.x F8.9499.6540.x F8.9499.5880.x F8.9499.6540.x F8.9499.6540.x F8.8360.7000.x F8.9499.6580.x F8.9499.4630.x F8.5100.7460.x F8.9499.6540.x F8.9499.4630.x F8.9499.6540.x F8.9499.6540.x
#26
1 GS226 -CASS1- GS228 -CASS1- GS222 -CASS1- GS216 -CASS1- GS230 -CASS1- GS224 -CASS1- GS214 -CASS1- GS220 -CASS1- GS276 -CASS2- GS277 -CASS2- GS278 -CASS2- GS266 -CASS2- GS280 -CASS2- GS274 -CASS2- GS265 -CASS2- GS270 -CASS2- 1
BU201
BU200 ST200
XL201
SWITCH OPEN-0-LS IN-DET-LS IN-DET-LS CLAMP-LS CLAMP-0-LS LIFT-0-LS BELT-0-LS SWITCH OPEN-0-LS IN-DET-LS IN-DET-LS CLAMP-LS CLAM-LS- LIFT-0-LS BELT-0-LS
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
PE9
#4/6
#4/6
#4/6
#4/6
#4/6
#4/6
#4/6
#4/6
#4/6
#4/6
#4/6
#4/6
ST1
ST1
ST1
ST1
ST1
ST1
ST1
ST1
ST1
ST1
ST1
ST1
ST1
ST1
ST1
ST1
*3/3
*4/4
*3/3
*4/4
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
ST201
GND
GND
PE10
GND
GND
+40V
+40V
+40V
+40V
XL202
BU209
BU210
BU212
BU243
BU242
BU213
BU214
BU215
BU216
BU238
BU248
BU246
*3
*4
*4
BU250
BU252
BU211
*4
*4
*4
#2*4
*4
*4
*3
BU240
*4
#2*4
*4
*4
*4
*4
#6
#4
#4
#4
#4
#4
#6
#4
#4
#4
#4
ST204
BU203
BU245
BU241
BU251
BU217
BU239
BU249
BU220
BU221
BU222
BU223
BU237
BU247
BU219
BU218
#6
#6
*4
*4
*4
*4
*4
*4
*4
*4
*4
*4
*4
*4
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
#26
BU866
ST51 ST39
ST8
ST40 ST2 ST38 ST51 ST39 ST40 ST2 ST38
ST8
#4/6
ST11
#4/6
#6/8
#4/6
#4/6
ST1
#4/6
#4/6
ST37
#4/6
#4/6
#4/6
ST11
#4/6
#6/8
#4/6
#4/6
ST1
#4/6
#4/6
ST37
#4/6
#4/6
#26ST203
BU208
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
BU236
XL203
ST12 ST12
*26 #26 *26/26 *26 *26/26
#26
PE7
2 2
ST205 BU1 ST206 BU1
1
1 1/2 SUBNODE 1 SUBNODE 2 1 1/2 SUBNODE 1 SUBNODE 2

2
3 2 2/2 2 2/2
JL1
JL1
JL2
JL2
12345678 12345678 12345678 12345678
GS260
GS210 5FOLD-ST-CASS2
5FOLD-ST-CASS1 CASSETTE_MODUL 1 F8.9499.8120.X
CASSETTE_MODUL 2
F8.9499.8120.x
ST15 ST18 ST23 ST32 ST15 ST18 ST23 ST32
ST35
ST35
ST14
ST17
ST24
ST33
ST34
ST14
ST17
ST24
ST33
ST34
*4/4
*4/4
*4/4
*4/4
*4/4
*4/4
*4/4
*4/4
*4/4
*4/4
4/4
3/4
2/4
1/4
4/4
3/4
2/4
1/4
4/4
3/4
2/4
1/4
4/4
3/4
2/4
1/4
1/4
2/4
3/4
4/4
4/4
3/4
2/4
1/4
4/4
3/4
2/4
1/4
4/4
3/4
2/4
1/4
4/4
3/4
2/4
1/4
1/4
2/4
3/4
4/4
200MA7
BU225 BU226 BU227 BU228 BU229 BU253 BU254 BU255 BU256 BU257
200MA17
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
200MA15
200MA5
ST4-01A-ADAP-V
ST4-01A-ADAP-V
ST4-01A-ADAP-V
ST4-01A-ADAP-V
ST4-01A-ADAP-V
4
3
2
4
3
2
1
ST4-01A-ADAP-V
3 3
BU231
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
BU230 BU262
4
3
2
1
BU232 BU258 BU260
A1
A4
A3
A2
A1
A4
A3
A2
A4
A3
A2
A1
A2
A1
A4
A3
A4
A3
A2
A1
A1
A4
A3
A2
ST236 ST237 ST238 ST260 ST262
ST258
B4
B3
B2
B1
B1
B4
B3
B2
B1
B2
B3
B4
B1
B4
B2
B1
B3
B4
B3
B2
B4
B3
B1
B2
BU233 BU234 BU235 BU261 BU263
BU259
4
3
2
1
200MA13
200MA19
200MA3
200MA11
200MA1
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
200MA9
4
3
2
1
200MA18
200MA2
200MA14
200MA20
200MA12
200MA16
200MA10
200MA8
200MA4
200MA6
4 4
GNWT
GNWT
GNWT
YEWT
GNWT
YEWT
GN
GN
GN
GN
GN
YEWT
GNWT
GNWT
YEWT
YEWT
YEWT
YE
YE
GN
YE
YE
YE
YE
YE RD YE RD YE RD YE RD
BK BK BK BK BK BK
OR BKWT BKWT OR BKWT OR BKWT BKWT OR BKWT
M BR M RDWT
RD (1)
M RD
RDWT
M BR M RDWT
RD
M BR M RD
RDWT
M RD
RDWT
M BR M RD
RDWT
M201-CASS1-ROLLER-MOT M204-CASS1-OPENER-MOT M202-CASS1-LIFT-MOT M205-CASS1-BELT-MOT M203-CASS1-CLAMP-MOT M206-CASS2-ROLLER-MOT M209-CASS2-OPEN-MOT M207-CASS2-LIFT-MOT M210-CASS2-BELT-MOT M208-CASS2-CLAMP-MOT
F8.5145.4524.x F8.5120.5165.x F8.5120.5165.x F8.5120.5165.x F8.5120.5165.x F8.5145.4524.x F8.5120.5165.x F8.5120.5165.x F8.5120.5165.x F8.5120.5165.x
5
5
F8.5145.9010.x
BU264 GS206 -ROTAT-0-POS-LS
ST1
IO_ROTATION *26 *26/26 ST2 BU267 BU269 ST1
/CPCI_RACK.1H #26
#4/6 *4 #4 *4 #4/6
BU265 ST4
1+40V 1 1/5
Cas_Rotation #3/5
/POWER_UNIT.4A JL1
2 GND 5 5/5
BU266 12345678
4 4/4
YE RD 3 3/4 F8.9499.6770.x 6
6 2 2/4 ST5 GS204 -ROT-WORKPOS-LS
1 1/4 DATE NAME
OR ST3 BU268 BU270 ST1 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM Project
GS202 #4/6 *4 #4 *4 #4/6 USER 2.11.05 Leith.
M BR
200MA22 200MA21
-ROTATION-BD APPR.
CR85 5148
M212-ROTATION-DRIVE F8.9499.8140.X NORM Sheet name: CASSETTE_UNIT / 100
F8.5145.4574.x
forbidden.
Sheet 2
© AGFA
0 21957 F1.5148.4003.0 of 7 SH

A B C D E F G H
/POWER_UNIT.2A
MA_DOOR_LEFT
MA121
M300
CPCI-RACK-FAN
ST1 BU868
M BU5
*3/3
BU1
*3/3
*26/26 *26 #26 IO_OUTBUFF
/INPUT_and_OUTPUTBUFFER.6C
1 ST2 BU869 1
2 1 *26 IO_ROTATION
*26/26 #26
ST308 BU309 ST1 BU1 /CASSETTE_UNIT.6A
1 1 1 1/2 BU305
ST3
2 2 2 2/2 *26/26 *26 IO_OPTICS
BU6 ST1 #26 /SCAN_OPTIC_UNIT.1F
#48/50 #48/50
ST4
*26/26 BU306 IO_8_INBUFF
#26 /INPUT_and_OUTPUTBUFFER.6F
*26
ST5 BU307
ST307 *26/26 *26 #26 IO_POSTSCAN
/PRE_POST_TRANSPORT_UNIT.
GS306 BU1
CPCI-POWER #25 #25/27 BU308
#26 ST6
*26/26 *26 IO_Cass_Units
#26 #26 /CASSETTE_UNIT.1A
BU310 MC300 BU311 26
L 1 SCHIRM 26/27
ST7 BU7
L L1 SHIELDING *26/26 *26 IO_PRESCAN
#26 /PRE_POST_TRANSPORT_UNIT.
BU312 BU322 ST3
POWER_RACK PE 3A 1 1 1/4
/POWER_UNIT.2A 250VAC 2/4 GS314 IOBUS-DISTRIB.
BU313 3 3/4 3J4 F8.9499.6020.x
2 N 1 4 4/4 #135/137 2
N N1
BU323
PE103 1
3J1
#135/137
BU4 ST304
3 1/17 1 bk 3
2/17 2 br
8/17 8 rd
9/17 9 or
10/17 10 ye
15/17 15 gn
3/17 3 bk
4/17 4 br
7/17 7 rd PM_1
11/17 11 or /SCAN_OPTIC_UNIT.1E
2J4 BU2 12/17 12 ye
#135/137 #135/137
14/17 14 gn
5/17 5 bk
6/17 6 br
13/17 13 rd
16/17 16
17/17 17 (1)
300MA2
BU6 ST306
#10/11 #10 POLYGON_CTRL
/SCAN_OPTIC_UNIT.1E
4 BU302 300MA3 4
ST2
#9/11 #9 #10 RF_READER
2J1 BU1 /INPUT_and_OUTPUTBUFFER.6F
#135/137 #135/137 10
10/11
BU3 ST303
#9/10 #9 LCD
/INPUT_and_OUTPUTBUFFER.6B
BU5 ST305
#25/27 #25 #26
26/27 26 SCHIRM
SHIELDING
ST2 BU314 BU317 ST1 ST1 BU301
#34/36 *34 (34) *34 #34/36 #25/27 #25
300MA4
26 #26 LD_MODULE
26/27 /SCAN_OPTIC_UNIT.1F
ST1 BU315
1/4 1 ST319
GS304 2/4 2 GS310 SCAN-CTRL-MASTER
FLOPPY F8.5146.1460.x
5 L7.8506.9520.x BU320
1 A1 B1 5
2 A2 B2
3 A3 B3
ST1 BU316 ST310 ST318 BU3 ST1 BU321
1/4 1
BU318
1 1/4 *8/8 *8
4 A4 B4 ETHERNET
1J4 P4 (8) 5 A5 B5
2/4 2 1 1 2 2/4 #135/137 #135/137
2 2 6 A6 B6
3/4 3 3 3/4
3 3 7 A7 B7
4/4 4 4 4/4
4 4 8 A8 B8
ST2 ST2 1J2 P8

#68/70 #68/70 #135/137 #135/137
BU1 BU300 BU319 SERVICE
GS302 2/11 2 3
HARDDISK 3/11 3 2
5/11 5 7
1J1 P10 6/11 6 6
#135/137 #135/137
7/11 7 4
8/11 8 5
CPCI-RACK 10/11 10 300MA5 300MA6

6
6
BACKPLANE CPU-ARIEL DATE NAME

GS300
F7.0486.1342.0
GS312 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM Project
USER 2.11.05 Leith.
APPR.
CR85 5148
NORM Sheet name: CPCI_RACK / 100
forbidden.
Sheet 3
© AGFA
0 21957 F1.5148.4003.0 of 7 SH

/POWER_UNIT.4
/CPCI_RACK.2H
/POWER_UNIT.
/CPCI_RACK.2H
A B C D E F G H
POST TRANSPORT UNIT PRE TRANSPORT UNIT
Prescan
IO_POSTSCAN
Postscan
IO_PRESCAN
#26
ST401 BU401
*26 *26 ST403 BU425
#25 #26
#25 *26 *26
1 1
SUCT. GND 17
SUCT. GND 4
SUCT. +40V 16
#26
BU424 ST402
BU400 ST400 SUCT. +40V 3
26 GND4 1 26 26
26
(1) SLED GND 15
GND3 GND_4
GND_3 GND
SLED 2
ST715 BU857 BU400 ST400 BU424 ST402
*10 #26 #25 #25 #25 #25 SLED +40V 14 #16 #25 #25 #25
#3
*10 S4557 X SLED +40V 1
S4554
BU461 ST1 BU451 ST1

1/4 BU426 ST404(L)
XL402
1 1/4
24
9
4
11
25
3
1
#26
12
13
22
11
23
3/4
16
3/4
15
10
17
14
1 #26 #26 BU452
1 2/4 2/4
7 and 20
7 and 20
6 and 19
5 and 18
6 and 19
5 and 18
1
8 and 21
8 and 21
GND
GND
ST409 ST714
GND
GND
+40V
+40V
+40V
+40V
ST4-01A-ADAP-V ST4-01A-ADAP-V
PE104
BU462
PE105 27 27 BU427 BU450
2 2
PE3
#2 1 A1 B1 1 GS401 SOL-VALE-POST 28 28 1 A1 B1 1 +24V
GS422 SOL-VALE-PRE
SUCT.
SUCT.
SUCT.
SUCT.
29 29
SLED
SLED
SLED
SLED
#2 2 A2 B2 2 SOLENOIDE_VALVE 2 A2 B2 2 GND SOLENOID_VALVE
3 A3 B3 3 F7.0424.2164.0 30 30 3 A3 B3 3 +24V
1
PE2
#2 F7.0424.2164.0
#2 4 A4 B4 4 31 31 4 A4 B4 4 GND
(1)
32 32
BU855 BU460 33 33
XL727
BU402 ST408 BU463 ST1 34 34 BU453 ST1

#26 #26 #26 #25 1/4 3/4 1 1/4 3/4
1 BU454
1 2/4 1 2/4
27 27 BU464
28 28
29 29 GS402 PUMP-POSTSC GS420 PUMP-PRESC
30 30 VACUUM_PUMP VACUUM_PUMP
F7.0431.7210.0 F7.0431.7210.0
31 31
32 32
33 33
34 34
3 3
POINDS-LEFT-LS POINDS-RIGHT-LS
ST1 BU843 BU842 ST1

1/6 1 1 1/6
2/6 2 2 2/6
3/6 3 3 3/6
4/6 4/6
GS404 GS406
F8.9499.5880.x F8.9499.5880.x
POINDS-MG-RIGHT
HU-24-F-24V-V HU-24-F-24V-V
MG401 POINS-MG-LEFT MG402
ST406 ST407 BU446 #2
BU445 1 1 F8.5145.4524.x
1 1 #2
2 2 PRE-SUCT-DRIVE
2 2 M402
4 4
BR
M
GND
+40V
ST1 BU431 ST1 BU856 OR
27 and 28
29 and 30
#4/6 *4 #4/6 *4
BU436
2
4
RD YE
GS424 GS426
#4
400MA6
F8.5145.4524.x F8.9499.5880.x F8.9499.5880.x BU2
POST-SUCT-DRV ST2
*4
ST4
1/5
2/5
4/5
5/5
#4/6
12345678
M400
#2
PRESC-SUCT-0-LS BU434 ST3

PRE-SUC-POS-LS
#2
BR *4 #4/6
#4
M BU435 ST5 BU437
GND
ST1
2 +40V
ST1 BU410 ST1 BU411 OR *26 *26/26 1/4 1
JL1
BU415
#52
PE4
#4/6 *4 #4/6 *4 2/4 2
27 and 28
29 and 30
GS428 PRE-SUCTION-BD 3/4 3

4
RD YE 4/4 4
GS408 F8.9499.8140.x
400MA2
GS410
#4
F8.9499.5880.x F8.9499.5880.x 31 and 32

BU412 ST2 400MA5
*4
ST4
1/5
2/5
4/5
5/5
#4/6 F8.5145.4574.x
XL403
12345678
BU413 ST3 33 and 34 PRE-SLED-DRIVE

5 POST-SUCT-POS-LS POST-SUCT-0-LS
*4 #4/6 M403 5
#4
BU414 ST1 ST5 BU416
BR
*26 *26/26 1/4 1
M
JL1
#52 #2
2/4 2 ST1 BU438 ST1 BU439 #2
PE5
GND
3/4 3 #4/6 *4 #4/6 *4 OR
+40V
GS412 POSTSC-SUCT-BD
BU443
4/4 4
4
F8.9499.8140.x
31 and 32 GS430 GS432
XL401
RD YE
#4
400MA1 F8.9499.5880.x F8.9499.5880.x
400MA8
BU440 ST2
F8.5145.4574.x
ST4
*4
1/5
2/5
4/5
5/5
33 and 34 #4/6
12345678
POST-SLED-DRV
M401 PRE-SLEDPOS-LS PRESC-SLED-0-LS BU441 ST3
*4 #4/6
#4
BR BU442 ST5 BU444
ST1 BU417 ST1 BU418 #2
#2
M *26
ST1
*26/26 1/4 1
JL1
#26
GND
#4/6 *4 #4/6 *4 OR 2/4 2

+40V
BU422
GS434 PRESCAN-SLED-BD 3/4 3

2
GS414 GS416 F8.9499.8140.x 4/4 4

PRESLED
#4
F8.9499.5880.x RD YE
F8.9499.5880.x
400MA4
BU419 ST2
*4 400MA7
ST4
1/5
2/5
4/5
5/5
#4/6
12345678
POST-SLEDPOS-LS POST-SLED-0-LS BU420 ST3 6

6 #4 *4 #4/6
BU421 ST1 ST5 BU423 DATE NAME
#26
*26 *26/26 1/4 1 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM Project
USER 2.11.05 Leith.
JL1
2/4 2
GS418 POST-SLED-BD 3/4 3 APPR.
CR85 5148
POSTSLED F8.9499.8140.x 4/4 4
NORM Sheet name: PRE_POST_TRANSPORT_UNIT / 100
forbidden.
400MA3 Sheet 4
© AGFA
0 21957 F1.5148.4003.0 of 7 SH

A B C D E F G H
F8.9499.6540.X F8.9499.4620.X F8.9499.4640.X F8.9499.5880.X F8.9499.6540.X F8.9499.4620.X F8.9499.4640.X F8.9499.6540.X
GS554 -OUTBUFF GS562 -OBUFF- GS560 -OBUFF- GS564 -OUTBUFF GS518 -INBUFF- GS516 -INBUFF- GS514 -INBUFF- GS540 -CASS-DOT-DETECT GS534 -INBUFF- GS530 GS538 -RF-TAG-
-PUSH-LS CASS-DET CASS-DET -ROLL-LS BELT-LS CASS-DET CASS-DET F8.9499.6940.X DOOR-LS ANTENNA
EMERGENCY-NODE
1 F7.0486.1318.X F7.0486.1316.X 1
#4/6
#4/6
#4/6
#4/6
#4/6
#4/6
#4/6
ST1
ST1
ST1
ST1
ST1
ST1
ST1
ST1
ST1
*4/4
*4/4
*26/26
BU500
BU501
BU504
*4
*4
BU503
*4
*4
BU506
*4
BU507
*4
BU508
*4
BU509
*4
BU510
*4
ST1
#2
#2
BU511
*26
#4
#4
#4
#4
#4
#26
BU515
BU512
BU513
BU514
BU516
BU517
#4
*4
*4
#6
#6
*4
*4
ST2
#6/8
ST2
#4/6
ST2
#4/6
ST3
#4/6
ST2
#4/6
ST2
#6/8
ST2
#4/6
2 GS532 -INBUFF- 2
DOOR-BD
F8.5145.4410.X
GS558 -OBUFF-
CASS-DET GS512 -INBUFF- F8.9499.8140.X

CASS-DET
F8.5145.4410.X
12345678
12345678
12345678
12345678
#4/6
#4/6
ST1
ST1
BU1
*6/6
BU531 ST3
BU518
*4 #4/6
BU530
JL1
JL1
*4
*4
JL1
JL1
ST1
BU529
#4
ST3
ST502
*4
*6
GS552 -OUTBUFF- BU519 GS556 -OUTBUFF- GS510 -INBUFF- #4/6 #4
ST3
#4/6 *4
PUSH-BD ROLL-BD ST7 BELT-BD
F8.9499.8140.X F8.9499.8140.X BU872 F8.9499.8140.X
1/4 1 ST7 BU873
3 1/4 1 3
ST5
ST5
2/4 2 2/4 2
*26/26
*26/26
*26/26
*26/26
3/4 3 3/4 3
ST5
ST4
ST1
ST4
ST1
*5/5
ST4
ST1
ST5
ST4
ST1
4/4
3/4
2/4
1/4
5/5
1/5
4/4
3/4
2/4
1/4
1/5
5/5
4/4
3/4
2/4
1/4
1/5
5/5
4/4
3/4
2/4
1/4
4/4 4 4/4 4
BU534
BU520
500MA3
BU521
500MA5
BU525 BU528
BU522
*26
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
*5
BU533
*26
4
3
2
1
1
BU527
*26
4
3
2
1
BU526
*26
BU532
BU523 5 1 BU524
500MA1
500MA7
GND
GND
ST503
+40V
+40V
*6
1
2
(26)
2
1
(26)
#52
500MA8
500MA2
BU1
*6/6
500MA6
500MA4
(5) GS536 -RF-TAG-
READER
GNWT
GNWT
YEWT
YEWT
GN
YE
F7.0486.1315.X
GN
YE
YE RD YE RD
4 4
5
4
3
2
1
ST5-01A-ADAP-V
BK BK
*20/20
OR BKWT BKWT OR
B5 A5
B4 A4
B3 A3
B2 A2
B1 A1
ST500
ST504
ST1
M M
*26
BR M RDWT
RD
M RDWT
RD
BR
M516 -OUTB.
PUSH-DRV 5 1 M515 -OUTB. M514 -INBUFF- M513 -IBUFF-
GND
GND
BU535
+40V
+40V
BU34 ROLL-DRV BLT-DRV DOOR-DRV

F8.5145.4574.x
*26
*20
ST506
F8.5145.4580.x F85145.4580.x F8.5145.4524.x
GND_1
GND1
GND1
#10
ST4
*2/2
S30
GS568
ST1 BU536 BU537 ST5
DISPLAY LCD-MOD *20/20 *20 *20 #20/22
(20)
5 ST2
F8.8377.3202.X 5
ST1
F8.8377.1450.X
-TERMINAL-BD
-LCD-
1/14
2/14
3/14
GS566
#52
6/14
9/14
10/14
11/14
12/14
13/14
14/14
ST544
#4/14
*26
ST11
1/8
2/8
3/8
4/8
5/8
6/8
7/8
8/8
BU544
*26
GS570 KEYPAD F7.5145.1381.2

500MA9
BU538
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
6
#26
IO_8_INBUFF
IO_OUTBUFF
SM_Outbuffer
RF_READER
Inbuff_Door
Inbuff_Belt
DATE NAME
IO_MSB
#26

USER 2.11.05 Leith.
LCD
APPR.
CR85 5148
INPUT_and_OUTPUTBUFFER / 100
/POWER_UNIT.6A
Sheet name:
/POWER_UNIT.5A
NORM
/POWER_UNIT.5A
/CPCI_RACK.4H
/POWER_UNIT.4A
/CPCI_RACK.1H
/CPCI_RACK.1H
/CPCI_RACK.4H
forbidden.
Sheet 5
© AGFA
0 21957 F1.5148.4003.0 of 7 SH

forbidden.
© AGFA
6
5
4
3
2
1
A
A

BU1
F8.5146.2750.X
ST1 1/17 1
bk
B
B
2/17 2 br
rd
8/17 8
9/17 9 or
10/17 10
ye
GS620 OPTICS_MODULE
F8.5148.2250.X
15/17 15 gn
3/17 3
bk
GS622 PM-TUBE 1
4/17 4 br
rd
7/17 7
11/17 11 or
12/17 12
ye
14/17 14 gn
5/17 5
bk
6/17 6 br
13/17 13
rd
16/17 16 (1)
17/17 17 (1)
600MA2
BU600 MA14
#15
ST1
*8/8 *8 (8)
C
C
ST2 BU601
#25/27 #25 #25 #26
26/27 26 Schirm
SHIELDING
GND 2
+40V 1
ST601
2/2
1/2
BU1
-BU1
GS610
BU2-02A
BU2-02A
F8.9499.8120.x
D
D
12345678
JL2
5FOLD-ST-SCAN
YE
M
M612
SUBNODE 1
RD
F8.5145.4524.x
GS612
ST14
POST-ALIGN-DRV
BU715 BU713 BU618
4 4 4 4 4/4
BR
OR
3 B4 A4 3 3 3 3/4
F8.9499.6540.x
2 B3 A3 1 2/4
X2 X2
1 B2 A2 2 1 1 1/4
B1 A1 600MA13 600MA12 ST19
600MA7 600MA6 #4/6
ST15
POST-ALIGN-LS
ST4-01A-ADAP-V
ST603 *4/4 ST21 BU619 BU603 ST1
#4/6 *4 #4 *4 #4/6
E
E
ST18
F8.9499.6540.x
600MA5
YE #2/4
/CPCI_RACK.3H
M
GS614 POST-IP-DET-LS
PM_1
M702
BU611 BU604
RD
600MA4 ST8 ST1
F8.5146.2510.x
ST17 #4/6 *4 *4 #4/6
BU615
SLOWSCAN-DRV
4 4/4 /CPCI_RACK.4H
ST11 POLYGON_CTRL
BR
OR
3 3/4 #4/6
2 2/4
1 1/4 /CPCI_RACK.5H
LD_MODULE
/POWER_UNIT.5A
SM_Scan
ST12 BU612
*26/26 *26 #26 #26
/CPCI_RACK.1H
IO_OPTICS
F
F
ST30
*2/2
0
F8.9499.4630.X
IDX
600MA11 S4759
BU871
GS626 BEGIN-O-SCAN-LS
ST1
21957
YE
#2*4 #4/6
ST1
Change-NR
M
M622
F8.5145.4524.x
RD
600MA10 ST23
PRE-ALIGN-DRV
BU718
4 4/4
BR
OR
DATE
3 3/4
2 2/4
1 1/4
F8.9499.4640.X
ST24
G
NAME
*4/4
S4758
USER
APPR.
NORM
ST51 BU51 BU870 ST1

GS628 BEGIN-O-SCAN-LS
#6/8 #6 #4 *4 #4/6
ST1
DATE
2.11.05
YE
ST39
GS616
Leith.
#4/6
M
NAME
WT
M621
600MA8 ST40
F8.5146.2635.x
BU721
BU623 ST32 #4/6

F8.9499.6540.x
BU720
ROLL-LIFT-DRV
4 4 4 4/4
BL
RD
ROLL-LIFT-DRV
3 B4 A4 3 3 3/4
CR85
ST1
M621 alter Stand
2 B3 A3 2 2 2/4 #4/6
1 B2 A2 1 1 1/4
Sheet name:
PRE-ALIGN-LS
Replacement for
B1 A1 BU602 BU605
ST2 ST1
ST33 #4/6 *4 #4 *4 #4/6
H
600MA9 ST4-01A-ADAP-V *4/4

ST604
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
87654321
ST34
JL1
*4/4 ST37
SUBNODE 2 #4/6
F1.5148.4003.0
ST35
SCAN_OPTIC_UNIT
F8.9499.6540.x
*4/4 BU638 BU606

ST38 ST1
#4/6 *4 #4 *4 #4/6
GS618 ROLLER-LIFT-LS
of
Sheet 6
5148
/ 100
4
3
2
1
Project
6
5
7 SH
A B C D E F G H
TR5
1
TR4 1
TR3
ST701 BU701
TR2
1 1
2 2
3 3 TR1
4 4
5 5
6 6
2 7 7 2
8 8
9 9
10 10
LA1 LA2 LA3 LA4 LA5 LA6 LA7 LA8 LA9 LA10
ST703 BU703
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
3 6 6 3
7 7
ERASURE_DRILLED 8 8
/POWER_UNIT.3H 9 9
10 10
11 11
12 12
13 13
14 14
15 15
16 16
17 17
18 18
19 19
20 20
ERASURE-UNIT
4 4
ST702 BU702
4 4
3 3
12 12
6
2
6
2 ADAPTER
11 11
9 9
1 1
7 7
10 10
M701-ERASURE-UNIT-FAN
1 ST704 BU704 +24V red
5 M701
1 1 5
1
Erasure_Fan 3 GND black
/POWER_UNIT.4A
M
2 2
2
2 ALARM white
3 3
S
GND BLUE
ALARM WHITE
6
6
DATE NAME
USER 2.11.05 Leith.
APPR.
CR85 5148
NORM Sheet name: ERASE_UNIT_700 / 100
forbidden.
Sheet 7
© AGFA
0 21957 F1.5148.4003.0 of 7 SH

HEALTHCARE Ersatzteilliste
Imaging Services Spare Parts List
Liste des Pièces de Rechange
Order No.: DD+DIS092.06M CR 75.0 / CR85-X
CR 85-X
Type 5148/0100
Type 5148/0100
CR75.0 SN ≥ 6000
1 Piece Y5QGN MA1 Type 5146/0105
Edition 2, Revision 0 WARNING:

INSTRUCTION:
Caution: 1. Read the "Generic Safety Directions" document
(see
This system uses main voltage. MEDNET
Please consider GSO => General
the respective Info => Agfa HealthCare =>
safety regulations.
These instructions descibre adjustments and routines which must only be performed by
Publications => Service Manual) prior to attempting any operation,
qualified technical personnel.
repair or maintenance task on the equipment.
Note: 2. Strictly observe all safety directions within the
"Generic
Electrical repairs and connections Safety
must only Directions"
be performed and onelectrician.
by a qualified the product.
Mechanical repairs and connections must only be performed by a qualified technician.
CE Declaration:
According to the medical guidelines, the CE Declaration (CE Conformity) becomes invalid if the
product is changed without explicit consent of the manufacturer!
This applies to all parts, not only to safety elements.
Attention:
De la tension secteur est présente dans ce système. Observez toutes les précautions de sécurité.
Ce manuel contient des procédures et des réglages à l' attention exclusive de spécialistes du
service après-vente.
Note:
Seul un spécialiste est autorisé à effectuer les branchements électriques et les réparations.
CR 85-X CR 75.0 Seul un spécialiste est autorisé à effectuer les
Type 5148 / 100 Type 5146 / 105 branchements mécaniques et les réparations.
(As of SN ≥ 6000)
Explication CE:
D'après les directives médicales l'explication CE (conformité CE) expire dès que ce produit est
modifié sans autorisation de son fabricant!
Valable pour toutes les pièces et non seulement pour les éléments de sécurité!
Änderungen von Daten und Eigenschaften, die dem technischen Fortschritt dienen, vorbehalten.
We reserve the right to change data and characteristics in the light of technical progress.
Sous réserve de modifications de données et de caractéristiques pouvant servir au progrès
Die Ersatzteilliste ist gesondert lieferbar: Bestellnummer DD+DIS092.06M technique.
The spare parts list is available separately. Order number DD+DIS092.06M
La liste des pièces détachées est à votre disposition séparément: No. de Ref. DD+DIS092.06M
internal update #: 2 CONFIDENTIALITY NOTE:
printed in Germany 02-2007 Document Node ID: 13770889

Spare Parts List DD+DIS092.06M
Inhaltsverzeichnis - Contents - Table de matières
VERKLEIDUNG / MOUNTING RACK

PANELING / MOUNTING RACK
AUSGABEPUFFER
REVETEMENT / RACK DE MONTAGE
OUTPUT BUFFER
SEITE/PAGE 4 - 7
RESERVE DE SORTIE
SEITE/PAGE 8 - 13
EINGABEPUFFER
INPUT BUFFER
RESERVE D'ENTREE
SEITE/PAGE 14 - 19
External Partners: For ordering spare parts
contact your local AGFA representative.
Please refer to:

www.agfa.com => HealthCare => ABOUT US => Agfa HealthCare worldwide
TÜR LINKS, CPCI RACK
TÜR RECHTS, LEISTUNGSEINHEIT
DOOR LHS, CPCI RACK
DOOR RHS, POWER UNIT
PORTE A GAUCHE, CPCI RACK
PORTE A DROITE, BLOC DE PUISSANCE
SEITE/PAGE 34 - 37
SEITE/PAGE 38 - 41
FOLIENTRANSPORT, EINGABE
KASSETTENTEIL FOIL TRANSPORT, INPUT
CASSETTE PART TRANSPORT DE L'ECRAN, ENTREE
PARTIE CASSETTE SEITE/PAGE 50 - 55
SEITE/PAGE 20 - 33
For Recycling information refer to:

ROTATIONSANTRIEB
ROTATION DRIVE
COMMANDE ROTATIVE http://intra.agfanet/cd/ep/ehs.nsf
SEITE/PAGE 66 - 67
LÖSCHEINHEIT KASSETTEN
ERASURE UNIT CASSETTES
UNITE D'EFFACEMENT CASSETTES
SEITE/PAGE 42 - 43 SEITE/PAGE 68 - 93
SCANMODUL
SCAN UNIT
MODULE SCAN
FOLIENTRANSPORT, AUSGABE SEITE/PAGE 56 - 65
FOIL TRANSPORT, OUTPUT WARNING:
TRANSPORT DE L'ECRAN, SORTIE
SEITE/PAGE 44 - 49 Hazards may be introduced because of component failure or
5148_0100_INHALT.cdr
improper operation.
Replace defective parts with Agfa® HealthCare original spare parts.
Use only tools and measuring instruments which are suitable for the
respective procedure.
DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE: DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled. The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.
Chapter 5 / 2 CR85-X / Type 5148/0100 Edition 2, Revision 0
02-2007 CR 75.0
CR75.0 / Type / CR 85-X
5146/0105 (as of SN6000) Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS092.06M Spare Parts List
Ersatzteilliste / Spare Parts List / Liste des Pièces de Rechange
Edition 2, Revision 0 CR85-X / Type 5148/0100 Chapter 5 / 3

Agfa Company Confidential CR 75.05146/0105
CR75.0 / Type / CR 85-X (as of SN6000) 02-2007
04* 01
07*
11*
14
D2853
D6426
D635 D3088
03
01
05*
10*
09
12*
13*
15 06*
08*
D6408
D6426
02*, 17*
16*, 17*
5148_0100_8001.CDR

VERKLEIDUNG, MOUNTING RACK

PANELING, MOUNTING RACK
REVETEMENT, RACK DE MONTAGE
Chapter 5 / 4 CR85-X / TYPE 5148/0100 Edition 2, Revision 0
02-2007 CR 75.0 / (as
CR75.0 / Type 5146/0105 CR of
85-X
SN6000) Agfa Company Confidential
Pos. Nr. Teile-Nr. Benennung
Item no. Part No. Description
Pos. no. Nr. de Ref. Denomination
1 CM+9514510071 KLEBESCHILD AGFA
LABEL AGFA
ETIQUETTE AGFA
2 CM+9514812560 * TUERABDECKUNG RECHTS, LACKIERT - 5148/0100
DOOR COVER RHS, LACQUERED
COUVERCLE DE LA PORTE A DROITE, LAQUE
3 CM+9514512600 DISPLAY MONT.
DISPLAY ASSEMBLED
AFFICHEUR ASSEMBLE
4 CM+9514512614 * LEISTE
BAR
REGLETTE
5 CM+9514512702 * E-BUFFER ABDECKUNG
BUFFER COVER
COUVERCLE DU BUFFER
6 CM+9514512771 * VERKLEIDUNG LINKS UNTEN
PANELING BOTTOM, LHS
REVETEMENT A GAUCHE EN BAS
7 CM+9514512782 * ABDECKUNG OBEN
COVER TOP
COUVERCLE EN HAUT
8 CM+9514512802 * A-BUFFER ABDECKUNG
BUFFER COVER
COUVERCLE DU BUFFER
9 CM+9514513812 FLACHKEYBOARD
FLAT KEYBOARD
CLAVIER PLAT
10 CM+9514516282 * DECKEL
COVER
COUVERCLE
11 CM+9514612401 * SEITENWAND RECHTS LACKIERT
SIDE WALL, RHS VARNISHED
PAROI LATERALE A DROITE VERNI
12 CM+9514612451 * SEITENWAND LINKS LACKIERT
SIDE WALL, LHS VARNISHED
PAROI LATERALE A GAUCHE VERNI
13 CM+9514512761 * VERKLEIDUNG RECHTS UNTEN
BOTTOM PANELING, RHS
REVETEMENT A DROITE EN BAS
14 CM+9514612740 KLEBESCHILD OBEN
LABEL TOP
ETIQUETTE EN HAUT
15 CM+9514510800 HANDGRIFF
HANDLE
POIGNEE
16 CM+9514812550 * TUERABDECKUNG LINKS, LACKIERT - 5148/0100
DOOR COVER LHS, LACQUERED
COUVERCLE DE LA PORTE A GAUCHE, LAQUE
17 CM+9514512551 TUERABDECKUNG, LACKIERT - 5146/0105
DOOR COVER, LACQUERED
COUVERCLE DE LA PORTE, LAQUE
=Assembly
D =Standardised part. For order please refer to the separate spare parts list for standardised parts "DD+DIS011.93M"
* =Spare part not available from stock. Expect extended delivery time.

VERKLEIDUNG, MOUNTING RACK

PANELING, MOUNTING RACK
REVETEMENT, RACK DE MONTAGE
Edition 2, Revision 0 CR85-X / TYPE 5148/0100 Chapter 5 / 5
Agfa Company Confidential CR75.0 /CR 75.0
Type / CR 85-X
5146/0105 (as of SN6000) 02-2007
05
(GS 314)
07
03 (GS 204) 01
06
D708
08
(ST 319)
02
D117
D5682 04
04
D5682
D117
5148_0100_8002.CDR

MOUNTING RACK, GESTELL

MOUNTING RACK, FRAME
RACK DE MONTAGE, CHASSIS
02-2007 CR 75.0 / (as
CR75.0 / Type 5146/0105 CR of
85-X
1 CM+9043660560 IEC-STECKER MIT FILTER 10A
IEC PLUG WITH FILTER 10A
CONNECTEUR IEC AVEC FILTRE 10A
2 CM+9047190280 ETHERNET ADAPTER - (ST319)
ETHERNET ADAPTER - (ST319)
ADAPTATER ETHERNET - (ST319)
3 CM+9047910150 ABSTANDSHALTER
SPACER
ECARTEUR
4 CM+9514545960 MASSEERDBAND 170MM
GROUND-EARTHING CABLE 170MM
CABLE DE TERRE ET MASSE 170MM
5 CM+9514616200 KASSETTENHALTER
CASSETTE HOLDER
SUPPORT CASSETTE
6 CM+9514619450 WINKEL KOMPL. - (GS204)
BRACKET COMPLETE - (GS204)
EQUERRE COMPLET - (GS204)
7 CM+9949960202 GS 8FACH IO-VERTEILER - (GS314)
GS 8-FOLD IO DISTRIBUTOR - (GS314)
DISTRIBUTION OCTUPLE I / O - (GS314)
8 CM+9988905850 KABEL FL 4POL
FLAT CABLE 4POL
CABLE PLAT 4POL
=Assembly

MOUNTING RACK, GESTELL

MOUNTING RACK, FRAME
RACK DE MONTAGE, CHASSIS
Type / CR 85-X(as of SN6000)
5146/0105 02-2007
05 06
D217
D2514
D217
D2853
07
06
03
(GS 564)
04
(M 515)
02 01
5146_0101_8003.CDR

AUSGABEPUFFER - TEIL 1
OUTPUT BUFFER - PART 1
RESERVE DE SORTIE - PARTIE 1
02-2007 CR 75.0 / (as
CR75.0 / Type 5146/0105 CR of
85-X
1 CM+9038960370 ZAHNRIEMEN, DIN7721-6T5X270
TOOTHED BELT, DIN7721-6T5X270
COURROIE CRANTEE, DIN7721-6T5X270
3 CM+9514590200 LICHTSCHRANKE 2 - (GS564)
LIGHT BARRIER 2 - (GS564)
BARRIERE LUMINEUSE 2 - (GS564)
4 CM+9514675900 MOTORWINKEL VOLLSTÄNDIG - (M515)
MOTOR BRACKET ASSY - (M515)
EQUERRE DU MOTEUR COMPL. - (M515)
5 CM+9514677001 TRANSPORTWALZEN
TRANSPORT ROLLER
CYLINDRE DE TRANSPORT
6 CM+9514677170 ZUGFEDER
TENSION SPRING
RESSORT DE TRACTION
FLAT CABLE 4POL
CABLE PLAT 4POL
=Assembly

Agfa Company Confidential CR75.0 CR 75.0
/ Type / CR 85-X(as of SN6000)
5146/0105 02-2007
04
(M516)
02
D579
D2514
02
D2861
01
(GS562) (GS560)
06
03 (GS554)
05
D6522
D6522
05
5148_0100_8004.CDR

02-2007 CR 75.0 / (as
CR75.0 / Type 5146/0105 CR of
85-X
TENSION SPRING
RESSORT DE TRACTION
2 CM+9036960200 KUNSTSTOFF-GLEITLAGER
PLASTIC FRICTION BEARING
PALIER LISSE
3 CM+9514070200 SCHRÄGLICHTSCHRANKE - (GS560, GS562)
INCLINED LIGHT BARRIER - (GS560, GS562)
BARRIERES LUMINEUSES OBLIQUES - (GS560, GS562)
4 CM+9514575501 SCHRITTMOTOR VOLLSTÄNDIG - (M516)
STEPPER MOTOR COMPLETE - (M516)
MOTEUR PAS A PAS COMPLET - (M516)
5 CM+9514645160 KABEL FL 6-4-4POL
FLAT CABLE 6-4-4PIN
CABLE PLAT 6-4-4POLE
6 CM+9514676900 LICHTSCHRANKENHALTER VOLLSTÄNDIG - (GS554)
LIGHT SENSOR HOLDER ASSY - (GS554)
SUPPORT BARRIERE LUMINEUSE COMPL. - (GS554)
=Assembly

5146/0105 02-2007
05
06 08 07
(GS 552)
03
05
01
02 04
03
(GS 558)
09
07 06
(GS 556)
5148_0100_8005.CDR

02-2007 CR 75.0 / (as
CR75.0 / Type 5146/0105 CR of
85-X
SPACER
ECARTEUR
2 CM+9514544100 EINZEL-PULS-LS VERGOSSEN - (GS 558)
SINGLE-PULS LS - (GS 558)
CELLULE-IMPULSION UNIQUE - (GS 558)
3 CM+9514545261 KABEL BUS FL 26POL
BUS CABLE 26POL
CABLE BUS 26POL
4 CM+9514645160 KABEL FL 6-4-4POL
FLAT CABLE 6-4-4PIN
SPACER
ECARTEUR
6 CM+9949981406 GS IOB-SIN-STEP - (GS 552, GS 556)
PCB IOB-SIN-STEP - (GS 552, GS 556)
CI IOB-SIN-STEP - (GS 552, GS 556)
FLAT CABLE 4POL
CABLE PLAT 4POL
FLAT CABLE 4POL
CABLE PLAT 4POL
FLAT CABLE 4POL
CABLE PLAT 4POL
FLAT CABLE 5POL
CABLE PLAT 5POL
=Assembly

Agfa Company Confidential CR75.0 / CR 75.0
Type / CR 85-X
5146/0105 (as of SN6000) 02-2007
01
01 (GS518)
03
02
D2513
D2763
D2861
D417
D2514
D2861
D2514
D579
D6522
05
04
(M514)
D372
5148_0100_8006.CDR

EINGABEPUFFER - TEIL 1
INPUT BUFFER - PART 1
RESERVE D'ENTRÉE - PARTIE 1
02-2007 CR 75.0 / (as
CR75.0 / Type 5146/0105 CR of
85-X
1 CM+9514512673 KAPPE
CAP
CAPUCHON
2 CM+9514571252 ZAHNRIEMEN MONTIERT
TOOTHED BELT, ASSEMBLED
COURROIE CRANTEE, ASSEMBLE
STEPPER MOTOR ASSY - (M514)
MOTEUR PAS A PAS COMPL. - (M514)
=Assembly

Type / CR 85-X
5146/0105 (as of SN6000) 02-2007
06
01
04
03
(GS512) 10
09
05 07 08
(GS510)
(GS516)
02 04
D6522
04 (GS514)
5148_0100_8007.CDR

02-2007 CR 75.0 / (as
CR75.0 / Type 5146/0105 CR of
85-X
SPACER
ECARTEUR
2 CM+9514070200 SCHRÄGLICHTSCHRANKE - (GS514, GS516)
INCLINED LIGHT BARRIER - (GS514, GS516)
BARRIERES LUMINEUSES OBLIQUES - (GS514, GS516)
3 CM+9514544100 EINZEL-PULS-LS VERGOSSEN - (GS512)
SINGLE-PULS LS - (GS512)
CELLULE-IMPULSION UNIQUE - (GS512)
4 CM+9514645160 KABEL FL 6-4-4POL
FLAT CABLE 6-4-4PIN
5 CM+9514645600 BUS - KABEL, 26 POL
BUS CABLE 26 PIN
CABLE BUS, 26 PIN
SPACER
ECARTEUR
7 CM+9949981406 GS IOB-SIN-STEP - (GS510)
PCB IOB-SIN-STEP - (GS510)
CI IOB-SIN-STEP - (GS510)
FLAT CABLE 4POL
CABLE PLAT 4POL
FLAT CABLE 4POL
CABLE PLAT 4POL
FLAT CABLE 4POL
CABLE PLAT 4POL
=Assembly

Type / CR 85-X
5146/0105 (as of SN6000) 02-2007
02
(GS530)
09
07
(GS534)
05
(M513)
D333
16
D579 D369
D2514
D542
08
15
(GS532)
17 14
16
13 01
11
04
12
06
(GS540)
03
D2513
(GS536, GS538) D369
5148_0100_8008.CDR

02-2007 CR 75.0 / (as
CR75.0 / Type 5146/0105 CR of
85-X
SPACER
ECARTEUR
2 CM+9515548200 GS STATUS EMERGENCY NODE - (GS530)
PCB STATUS EMERGENCY NODE - (GS530)
CI ETAT NOEUD URGENCE - (GS530)
3 CM+9514670100 READER MIT ANTENNE - (GS563, GS538)
READER WITH ANTENNA - (GS563, GS538)
SUPPORT AVEC ANTENNE - (GS563, GS538)
4 CM+9514513210 SCHNAPPACHSE
SELF-LATCHING SHAFT
AXE CLIQUET
5 CM+9514513850 MOTOR EINGABETOR - (M513)
MOTOR, FEED GATE - (M513)
MOTEUR, PORTE D’ENTREE - (M513)
6 CM+9514513903 LICHTSCHRANKE KOMPLETT - (GS540)
LIGHT BARRIER - (GS540)
BARRIERE LUMINEUSE - (GS540)
8 CM+9514612950 EINGABETORACHSE
FEED GATE SHAFT
AXE DE PORTE D'ENTRÉE
9 CM+9514613420 STATUSANZEIGE
STATUS DISPLAY
MESSAGE ETAT
11 CM+9514645600 BUS - KABEL, 26 POL
BUS CABLE 26 PIN
CABLE BUS, 26 PIN
FLAT CABLE 6POLE
CABLE PLAT 6POLE
13 CM+9514646340 KABEL FL/RD 20POL
CABLE, FLAT AND ROUND
CABLE PLAT ET CYLINDRIQUE
SPACER
ECARTEUR
FLAT CABLE 4POL
CABLE PLAT 4POL
FLAT CABLE 4POL
CABLE PLAT 4POL
=Assembly

5146/0105 02-2007
05
D6522 D6522 (M202)
(M207)
D579
D2681
5141
04
02
D6522
D3154
03 D333
(GS214)
(GS265)
01
D6522
5148_0100_8009.CDR

KASSETTENTEIL, RAHMEN - TEIL 1

CASSETTE PART, CHASSIS - PART 1
PARTIE CASSETTE, CHASSIS - PARTIE 1
02-2007 CR 75.0 / (as
CR75.0 / Type 5146/0105 CR of
85-X
1 CM+9514551502 LICHTSCHRANKENHALTER
LIGHT SENSOR HOLDER
SUPPORT BARRIERE LUMINEUS
2 CM+9514552130 LEISTE
BAR
REGLETTE
3 CM+9514590100 LICHTSCHRANKE 1 - (GS214, GS265)
LIGHT BARRIER 1 - (GS214, GS265)
BARRIERE LUMINEUSE 1 - (GS214, GS265)
4 CM+9514651450 MOTORWINKEL MONTIERT
MOTOR BRACKET ASSEMBLED
EQUERRE DU MOTEUR ASSEMBLE
5 CM+9514672200 SCHRITTMOTOR VOLLSTÄNDIG - (M202, M207)
STEPPER MOTOR ASSY - (M202, M207)
MOTEUR PAS A PAS COMPL. - (M202, M207)
=Assembly


Type / CR 85-X
5146/0105 (as of SN6000) 02-2007
05
01
04*
06
(M205/ 03
(GS220/
M210) GS270) 02*
5148_0100_8010.CDR


02-2007 CR 75.0 / (as
CR75.0 / Type 5146/0105 CR of
85-X
2 CM+9514550200 * WINKEL, GEN.
BRACKET, RIVETED
EQUERRE, RIVETE
3 CM+9514551700 WINKEL, MONT.
BRACKET, ASSEMBLED
EQUERRE, ASSEMBLE
4 CM+9514551750 * RIEMENUMLENKUNG
BELT DRIVER - CROSSOVER
COURROIE - ZONE DE RENVOI
5 CM+9514551952 ZAHNRIEMEN 18,5T5/860
TOOTHED BELT 18,5T5/860
COURROIE CRANTEE, 18,5T5/860
=Assembly


Type / CR 85-X
5146/0105 (as of SN6000) 02-2007
02
(M204)
(M209)
05
01
04
03
(GS228)
(GS277)
06
07
5148_0100_8011.CDR


02-2007 CR 75.0 / (as
CR75.0 / Type 5146/0105 CR of
85-X
1 CM+9514555801 SCHWENKPLATTE VOLLSTÄNDIG
SWIVEL PLATE ASSY
PLAQUE PIVOTANTE COMPL.
2 CM+9514556201 SCHRITTMOTOR - (M204, M209)
STEPPER MOTOR - (M204, M209)
MOTEUR PAS A PAS - (M204, M209)
FLAT CABLE 4POL
CABLE PLAT 4POL
5 CM+9514555010 LEISTE
BAR
REGLETTE
6 CM+9514556103 KURVENSCHEIBE VOLLSTÄNDIG
CAM DISC COMPLETE
DISQUE À CAME COMPLET
7 CM+9836056200 SCHUBSTANGE
TIE ROD
TIRANT
=Assembly


5146/0105 02-2007
03
(M201) 07
05 (M206)
D3083 04
(GS230)
D2995 (GS280)
D320 02
01
D377
(M203)
(M208)
06
D6522
5148_0100_8012.CDR


02-2007 CR 75.0 / (as
CR75.0 / Type 5146/0105 CR of
85-X
TENSION SPRING
RESSORT DE TRACTION
3 CM+9514551351 RÖLLCHENMOTOR - (M201, M206)
ROLLER MOTOR - (M201, M206)
MOTEUR DES GALETS - (M201, M206)
5 CM+9514591000 RÖLLCHEN
ROLLER
ROULEAU
6 CM+9514653701 MOTORPLATTE VOLLSTÄNDIG
MOTOR PLATE ASSY
PLAQUE MOTEUR COMPL.
FLAT CABLE 4POL
CABLE PLAT 4POL
=Assembly


Type / CR 85-X
5146/0105 (as of SN6000) 02-2007
GS222 03 GS224
GS278 GS274
05
04
GS216
05 GS266
09
02
06
07 01
08
GS226
GS276 07
07
5148_0100_8013.CDR


02-2007 CR 75.0 / (as
CR75.0 / Type 5146/0105 CR of
85-X
1 CM+9515645181 KABEL FL CASSETTENANSCHL. 950MM
FLAT CABLE CASSETTE STOP 950MM
CABLE PLAT BUTEE CASSETTE 950MM
2 CM+9514557003 ÖFFNER VOLLSTÄNDIG
OPENER COMPLETE
LOUP COMPLET
4 CM+9514690500 LS-HALTER
LIGHT SENSOR HOLDER
SUPPORT BARRIERE LUMINEUSE
FLAT CABLE 8POL
CABLE PLAT 8POL
6 CM+9514659110 LICHTSCHRANKENFAHNE
LIGHT BARRIER LUG
CAVALIER DE PHOTO CELLULE
TENSION SPRING
RESSORT DE TRACTION
8 CM+9515670000 KASSETTENEINZUG ANSCHLAG LINKS - (GS226, GS276)
CASSETTE FEED STOP, LHS - (GS226, GS276)
INTRODUCTION DES CASSETTE A GAUCHE - (GS226, GS276)
FLAT CABLE 4POL
CABLE PLAT 4POL
=Assembly


Type / CR 85-X
5146/0105 (as of SN6000) 02-2007
01
02 08 04 03 08 07
09
06
10 12 05 11
GS 210
GS 260
5146_0101_8014.CDR


02-2007 CR 75.0 / (as
CR75.0 / Type 5146/0105 CR of
85-X
1 CM+9047913370 LEITERPLATTENHALTER CEHCBS-CUP
PCB HOLDER CEHCBS-CUP
CARTE FIXATION CEHCBS-CUP
2 CM+9515645181 KABEL FL CASSETTENANSCHL. 950MM
FLAT CABLE CASSETTE STOP 950MM
CABLE PLAT BUTEE CASSETTE 950MM
BUS CABLE 26POL
CABLE BUS 26POL
FLAT CABLE 8POL
CABLE PLAT 8POL
5 CM+9949981208 GS IOB-SIN-5STEP - (GS210, GS260)
PCB IOB-SIN-5STEP - (GS210, GS260)
CI IOB-SIN-5STEP - (GS210, GS260)
FLAT CABLE 4POL
CABLE PLAT 4POL
FLAT CABLE 4POL
CABLE PLAT 4POL
FLAT CABLE 4POL
CABLE PLAT 4POL
FLAT CABLE 4POL
CABLE PLAT 4POL
FLAT CABLE 4POL
CABLE PLAT 4POL
FLAT CABLE 4POL
CABLE PLAT 4POL
FLAT CABLE 4POL
CABLE PLAT 4POL
=Assembly


5146/0105 02-2007
05
04
06
09*
02
03*
01
08
07*
5148_0100_8015.CDR

KASSETTENTEIL 1 UND 2
CASSETTE PART 1 AND 2
PARTIE CASSETTE 1 ET 2
02-2007 CR 75.0 / (as
CR75.0 / Type 5146/0105 CR of
85-X
1 CM+9033175320 BÜGELVERSCHLUSS
LOCK BRACKET
FERMOIR
2 CM+9514547560 MASSEBAND 2MM BLANK 70MM
GROUND CABLE 70MM
CABLE DE MASSE 70MM
3 CM+9514550200 * WINKEL, GEN.
BRACKET, RIVETED
EQUERRE, RIVETE
4 CM+9514550210 WINKEL
BRACKET
EQUERRE
BUS CABLE 26POL
CABLE BUS 26POL
6 CM+9514647661 KABELBAUM 9-2-2POL
CABLE HARNESS , 9-2-2POLE
FAISCEAU DE CABLE, 9-2-2POLE
7 CM+9514651001 * RAHMEN VOLLSTÄNDIG; CAS 1
CHASSIS ASSY; CAS 1
CHASSIS COMPL.; CAS 1
8 CM+9514651073 FAHNE
LUG
CAVALIER
9 CM+9514654001 * RAHMEN VOLLSTÄNDIG; CAS 2
CHASSIS ASSY; CAS 2
CHASSIS COMPL.; CAS 2
=Assembly

KASSETTENTEIL 1 UND 2
CASSETTE PART 1 AND 2
PARTIE CASSETTE 1 ET 2
5146/0105 02-2007
D5682
D117 D706
02 04
(M701)
D5682
D117
D2681
D335
D6522
03
01
D706
5148_0100_8016.CDR

TÜR LINKS
DOOR LHS
PORTE A GAUCHE
02-2007 CR 75.0 / (as
CR75.0 / Type 5146/0105 CR of
85-X
1 CM+9514517800 INTERLOCKBUEGEL
INTERLOCK BRACKET
TAQUET INTERLOCK
3 CM+9514617992 LUFTFILTER
AIR FILTER
FILTRE A AIR
4 CM+9514636200 LÜFTER 24V VERDRAHTET - (M701)
FAN 24V - (M701)
VENTILATEUR 24V - (M701)
=Assembly

TÜR LINKS
DOOR LHS
PORTE A GAUCHE
5146/0105 02-2007
05
07
(M300)
04
03
06 09
(GS302)
(GS304)
02
01
(GS300)
11
(GS312)
08
(GS306)
10
(GS310)
5148_0100_8017.CDR

CPCI-RACK
CPCI-RACK
RACK-CPCI
02-2007 CR 75.0 / (as
CR75.0 / Type 5146/0105 CR of
85-X
1 CM+9048613420 CPCI BACKPLANE 3 SLOT - (GS300)
CPCI BACKPLANE 3 SLOT - (GS300)
CPCI BACKPLANE 3 SLOT - (GS300)
2 CM+9048613540 FESTPLATTE 9,1GB ATLAS V
HARDDISK 9,1GB ATLAS V
DISQUE DUR 9,1GB ATLAS V
3 CM+9048613650 DISKETTENLAUFWERK 3,5"
FLOPPY-DISK-DRIVE 3,5"
LECTEUR 3,5"
4 CM+9048613570 SCSI ULTRA 3 TERMINATOR
SCSI ULTRA 3 TERMINATOR
SCSI ULTRA 3 TERMINATOR
5 CM+9514614005 CPCI-RACK, KOMPLETT
CPCI RACK, COMPLETE
RACK CPCI, COMPLET
6 CM+9514614056 CPCI-RACK BESTÜCKT AB FN3881
CPCI RACK POPULATED FROM SN3881
RACK CPCI ÉQUIPER A PARTIR DE NS3881
7 CM+9514614250 LÜFTER VERDR. PCI-RACK 250MM - (M300)
FAN WIRED, PCI-RACK 250MM - (M300)
VENTILATEUR CABLE, PCI-RACK 250MM - (M300)
8 CM+9514614301 PCI POWER SUPPLY KOMPLETT - (GS306)
PCI POWER SUPPLY COMPLETE - (GS306)
PCI BLOC SECTEUR COMPLET - (GS306)
9 CM+9514614401 EINSCHUB STORAGE KOMPLETT - (GS302, GS304)
PLUG-IN MODULE STORAGE COMPLETE - (GS302, GS304)
TIROIR STORAGE COMPLET - (GS302, GS304)
10 CM+9514614653 EINSCHUB IO-MASTER - (GS310)
PLUG-IN MODULE IO-MASTER - (GS310)
TIROIR IO-MASTER - (GS310)
11 CM+9514615008 OBERON KOMPLETT - (GS312)
OBERON COMPLETE - (GS312)
OBERON COMPLET - (GS312)
=Assembly

CPCI-RACK
CPCI-RACK
RACK-CPCI
5146/0105 02-2007
05 D5682
D117
D703 07
D706
06
02
(M101)
03
(TR106) 04*
01
D321 D854
D855 D865
D539
5148_0100_8018.CDR

TÜR RECHTS, LEISTUNGSEINHEIT - TEIL 1

DOOR RHS, POWER UNIT - PART 1
PORTE A DROITE, BLOC DE PUISSANCE - PARTIE 1
02-2007 CR 75.0 / (as
CR75.0 / Type 5146/0105 CR of
85-X
1 CM+9033501080 DRUCKFEDER
COMPRESSION SPRING
RESSORT DE PRESSION
2 CM+9043172330 LÜFTER 24 VDC ALARMAUSGANG - (M101)
FAN 24 VDC ALARM OUTPUT - (M101)
VENTILATEUR 24 V CC SORTIE ALARME - (M101)
3 CM+9043371770 TRANSFORMATOR 200-208-230V / 30V12A - (TR106)
TRANSFORMER - (TR106)
TRANSFORMATEUR - (TR106)
4 CM+9514517380 * RIEGEL
LATCH
VERROU
6 CM+9514617992 LUFTFILTER
AIR FILTER
FILTRE A AIR
7 CM+9514618300 LÜFTERWINKEL MONTIERT
FAN BRACKET ASSEMBLED
EQUERRE DU VENTILATEUR ASSEMBLE
=Assembly


5146/0105 02-2007
04
(S103)
05 09
12
(GS104)
01
(S102)
07
07 08
(GS100)
02
06
02, 03 10
11
(GS102)
5148_0100_8019.CDR 10 06


02-2007 CR 75.0 / (as
CR75.0 / Type 5146/0105 CR of
85-X
1 CM+9042663040 TÜR, DECKELSCHALTER - (S102)
DOOR, COVER SWITCH - (S102)
PORTE, INTERRUPTEUR DE COUVERCLE - (S102)
2 CM+9045196040 SICHERUNG T 2,5A
FUSE T 2,5A
FUSIBLE T 2,5A
3 CM+9045197160 SICHERUNG T 1A
FUSE SLOW-BLOW 1A
INERTIE FUSIBLE 1A
4 CM+9045231790 ÜBERSTROMSCHUTZSCHALTER 10A - (S103)
OVERCURRENT CIRCUIT BREAKER 10A - (S103)
DISJONCTEUR DE SURCHARGE 10A - (S103)
5 CM+9514618100 TRAFOWINKEL MONT.
TRANSFORMER BRACKET ASSEMBLED
EQUERRE POUR TRANSFORMATEUR ASSEMBLE
FLAT CABLE 5POL
CABLE PLAT 5POL
7 CM+9514646700 KABEL FL/RD, 20POL
BUS CABLE, FLAT AND ROUND
CABLE BUS PLAT ET CYLINDRIQUE
8 CM+9514648903 MULTI-SUPPLY-BOARD - (GS100)
MULTI-SUPPLY-BOARD - (GS100)
MULTI-SUPPLY-BOARD - (GS100)
9 CM+9514680101 KABELBAUM 3POL
CABLE HARNESS 3POLE
FAISCEAU DE CABLE 3POLE
10 CM+9514680122 KABELBAUM 3/2POL
CABLE HARNESS 3/2POLE
FAISCEAU DE CABLE 3/2POLE
11 CM+9515564204 GS PROG. ERASURE-CONTROL V2 - (GS102)
PCB PROG. ERASURE-CONTROL V2 - (GS102)
CI PROG. ERASURE-CONTROL V2 - (GS102)
12 CM+9515564401 GS CURRENT-SENSE - (GS104)
PCB CURRENT-SENSE - (GS104)
CI CONTROLE COURANT - (GS104)
=Assembly


5146/0105 02-2007
01 05
06
08
D221 07
D353
D81 D221 07
02
03
04
09
10
5148_0100_8020.CDR

LÖSCHEINHEIT
ERASURE UNIT
UNITE D'EFFACEMENT
02-2007 CR 75.0 / (as
CR75.0 / Type 5146/0105 CR of
85-X
1 CM+9033175470 SCHIEBER F. SCHLOSS LS 100
LATCH FOR LOCK LS 100
LAME POUR VERROU LS 100
2 CM+9045065820 HALOGENLAMPE, 12V 100W
HALOGEN LAMP, 12V 100W
LAMPE HALOGEN, 12V 100W
3 CM+9045065740 FASSUNG 6,35 24V MIT UNVERLIER
SOCKET 6,35 24V
SOCLE 6,35 24V
4 CM+9047187970 ANSATZSCHRAUBE M4X0,7
SHOULDER SCREW
VIS A EPAULEMENT
5 CM+9514535440 KG2-FILTER
FILTER
FILTRE
6 CM+9514635002 LÖSCHEINHEIT
ERASURE UNIT
UNITE D'EFFACEMENT
7 CM+9514635430 ARRETIERFEDER
RETAINNING PLATE
PLAQUE DE RETENUE
8 CM+9514635501 FRONTSCHEIBE GEKL.
FRONT GLAS PLATE GLUED
DISQUE FRONTAL COLLE
9 CM+9514635851 FASSUNGSLEISTE VERKABELT
SOCKET BAR WITH CABLE
BARRETTE AVEC CABLE
10 CM+9514645320 KABEL 20x1AGG16
WIRE 20x1AGG16
CABLE 20x1AGG16
=Assembly

LÖSCHEINHEIT
ERASURE UNIT
UNITE D'EFFACEMENT
5146/0105 02-2007
11*
07
(GS401)
(GS402)
08
01 D542
03
D2514
04
D540
D6426
D2514
D2861
D706
02
(MG402)
02
(MG401)
D6426
D2514
10
05
06 D542
(GS406)
06 09
(GS404)
5148_0100_8021.CDR

FOLIENTRANSPORT, AUSGABE - TEIL 1

FOIL TRANSPORT, OUTPUT - PART 1
TRANSPORT DE L'ECRAN, SORTIE - PARTIE 1
02-2007 CR 75.0 / (as
CR75.0 / Type 5146/0105 CR of
85-X
1 CM+9042421640 MAGNETVENTIL 3/2-WEGE
SOLENOID VALVE
ELECTROVANNE
2 CM+9042421700 HUBMAGNET, ZIEHEND - (MG401, MG402)
LIFTING MAGNET, PULLING - (MG401, MG402)
AIMANT DE LEVAGE, TIRANT - (MG401, MG402)
3 CM+9514563052 VERRIEGELUNG OBEN
LOCK TOP
VERROUILLAGE, EN HAUT
4 CM+9514563090 ROBOTER-ANSCHLAG
ROBOT - STOP
UNITE DE SEPARATION AUTOMATIQUE - BUTEE
5 CM+9514566081 ANSCHLAG UNTEN, AUSGABE
STOP BOTTOM, OUTPUT
BUTEE EN BAS, SORTIE
7 CM+9514660601 LEITBLECH GROSS GEP., AUSGABE
GUIDE PLATE, LARGE, OUTPUT
TOLE DE GUIDAGE, GRANDE SORTIE
8 CM+9514662303 PUMPENPLATINE KOMPLETT - (GS401, GS402)
PUMP PLATE, COMPLETE - (GS401, GS402)
PLAQUE DE LA POMPE, COMPLET - (GS401, GS402)
9 CM+9514666450 WIPPE VORN, KOMPLETT
ROCKER FRONT, COMPLETE
BASCULE AVANT, COMPLET
10 CM+9514666500 WIPPE HINTEN, KOMPLETT
ROCKER BACK, COMPLETE
BASCULE DERRIERE, COMPLET
11 CM+9514866000 * GESTELL, AUSGABE
FRAME, OUTPUT
CHASSIS, SORTIE
=Assembly


Type / CR 85-X
5146/0105 (as of SN6000) 02-2007
06
10
D372
D2514
D579
11
04
(GS412) 07
(GS414 /
GS416) (M401)
D372
D2514
D579
11
(GS418)
12 02
09
03
08
05
01
5148_0100_8022.CDR


02-2007 CR 75.0 / (as
CR75.0 / Type 5146/0105 CR of
85-X
1 CM+9033501070 ZUGFEDER RZ-096X
TENSION SPRING RZ-096X
RESSORT DE TRACTION RZ-096X
2 CM+9038961320 POWERGRIPZAHNRIEMEN 3MR-150/9
POWERGRIP TOOTHED BELT 3MR-150/9
COURROIE CRANTEE POWERGRIP 3MR-150/9
5 CM+9514861000 ROBOTER, AUSGABE
ROBOT, OUTPUT
UNITE DE SEPARATION AUTOMATIQUE, SORTIE
6 CM+9514864861 KETTE KOMPLETT ROBOTERSCHLITTEN
ENERGY CHAIN COMPLETE ROBOT CARRIAGE
CHAINE D'ENERGIE COMPLET CHARIOT DU ROBOT
7 CM+9514665101 MOTOR 1 KOMPLETT - (M401)
MOTOR 1 COMPLETE - (M401)
MOTEUR 1 COMPLET - (M401)
8 CM+9514665190 ZAHNRIEMENRAD 3MR
TOOTHED BELT WHEEL
POULIE A COURROIE CRANTEE
9 CM+9514665850 SCHLAUCHGRUPPE KOMPL.
HOSE GROUP COMPLETE
ENSEMBLE CONVERTIBLES COMPLET
SPACER
ECARTEUR
11 CM+9949981406 GS IOB-SIN-STEP - (GS412, GS418)
PCB IOB-SIN-STEP - (GS412, GS418)
CI IOB-SIN-STEP - (GS412, GS418)
FLAT CABLE 4POL
CABLE PLAT 4POL
=Assembly


5146/0105 02-2007
05 (GS410)
D372 05
D2514
06
D579
(GS408)
04
02 10
07
01
08
07
03 02
09 11
(M400)
D372
D2514
D579
09
12
12
5148_0100_8023.CDR


02-2007 CR 75.0 / (as
CR75.0 / Type 5146/0105 CR of
85-X
1 CM+9038960970 ZAHNRIEMEN, DIN7721-6T2,5X245
TOOTHED BELT, DIN7721-6T2,5X245
COURROIE CRANTEE, DIN7721-6T2,5X245
2 CM+9038961370 ZAHNRIEMEN, DIN7721-6T2,5X317,5
TOOTHED BELT, DIN7721-6T2,5X317,5
COURROIE CRANTEE, DIN7721-6T2,5X317,5
4 CM+9514565502 SAUGERGRUPPE (SERVICE)
SUCTION CUP ASSEMBLY (SERVICE)
ENSEMBLE VENTOUSES (SERVICE)
5 CM+9514647521 KABELBAUM FL 8POL
FLAT CABLE HARNESS 8POLE
FAISCEAU DE CABLE PLAT 8POLE
6 CM+9514661200 SEPARIEREINHEIT, AUSGABE
SEPARATING UNIT, OUTPUT
UNITE DE SEPARATION, SORTIE
7 CM+9514661211 RIEMENSPANNER
BELT TENSIONER
TENDEUR DE COURROIE
8 CM+9514661400 SCHLAUCHGRUPPE F. 4KT-WELLE
HOSE GROUP FOR SQUARE SHAFT
ENSEMBLE CONVERTIBLES POUR ARBRE A 4 PANS
9 CM+9514661600 SCHLAUCHGRUPPE, SAUGERHEBEL
HOSE ASSEMBLY, SUCTION CUP LEVER
ENSEMBLE CONVERTIBLES LEVIER VENTOUSE
10 CM+9514665152 LICHTSCHRANKE KOMPLETT
LIGHT BARRIER, COMPLETE
PHOTO CELLULE, COMPLET
11 CM+9514665350 MOTOR 2 KOMPLETT
MOTOR 2 COMPLETE
MOTEUR 2 COMPLET
12 CM+9514665802 LAGERBOCK
BEARING BRACKET
SUPPORT
=Assembly


5146/0105 02-2007
06*
02
D6424
D2514
D2861
04
(GS422)
(GS420)
05
01
D2514
03
D542
D6426 D706
5148_0100_8024.CDR

FOLIENTRANSPORT, EINGABE - TEIL 1

FOIL TRANSPORT, INPUT - PART 1
TRANSPORT DE L'ECRAN, ENTREE - PARTIE 1
02-2007 CR 75.0 / (as
CR75.0 / Type 5146/0105 CR of
85-X
1 CM+9042421640 MAGNETVENTIL 3/2-WEGE
SOLENOID VALVE
ELECTROVANNE
2 CM+9514563052 VERRIEGELUNG OBEN
LOCK TOP
VERROUILLAGE, EN HAUT
3 CM+9514563081 ANSCHLAG, UNTEN - EINGABE
STOP, BOTTOM - INPUT
BUTEE, INFERIEUR - ENTREE
4 CM+9514563090 ROBOTER-ANSCHLAG
ROBOT - STOP
UNITE DE SEPARATION AUTOMATIQUE - BUTEE
5 CM+9514662303 PUMPENPLATINE KOMPLETT - (GS420, GS422)
PUMP PLATE, COMPLETE - (GS420, GS422)
PLAQUE DE LA POMPE, COMPLET - (GS420, GS422)
6 CM+9514663000 * GESTELL, EINGABE
FRAME, INPUT
CHASSIS, ENTREE
=Assembly


5146/0105 02-2007
05
10
D372
D2514
D579
11
04 (GS428)
(GS430) 124
07
(GS432) (M403)
D372
D2514
D579
11
(GS434)
12 02
09
03
08
06
01
5148_0100_8025.CDR


02-2007 CR 75.0 / (as
CR75.0 / Type 5146/0105 CR of
85-X
1 CM+9033501070 ZUGFEDER RZ-096X
TENSION SPRING RZ-096X
RESSORT DE TRACTION RZ-096X
5 CM+9514664864 KETTE KOMPLETT ROBOTERSCHLITTEN
ENERGY CHAIN COMPLETE ROBOT CARRIAGE
CHAINE D'ENERGIE COMPLET CHARIOT DU ROBOT
6 CM+9514665000 ROBOTER, EINGABE
ROBOT, INPUT
UNITE DE SEPARATION AUTOMATIQUE, ENTREE
7 CM+9514665101 MOTOR 1 KOMPLETT - (M403)
MOTOR 1 COMPLETE - (M403)
MOTEUR 1 COMPLET - (M403)
8 CM+9514665190 ZAHNRIEMENRAD 3MR
TOOTHED BELT WHEEL
POULIE A COURROIE CRANTEE
9 CM+9514665850 SCHLAUCHGRUPPE KOMPL.
HOSE GROUP COMPLETE
ENSEMBLE CONVERTIBLES COMPLET
SPACER
ECARTEUR
11 CM+9949981406 GS IOB-SIN-STEP - (GS428, GS434)
PCB IOB-SIN-STEP - (GS428, GS434)
CI IOB-SIN-STEP - (GS428, GS434)
FLAT CABLE 4POL
CABLE PLAT 4POL
=Assembly


Type / CR 85-X
5146/0105 (as of SN6000) 02-2007
05 (GS424)
D372 05
D2514
D579
10 (GS426)
04
09
02
06
01
07
06
03 02
08 11
(M402)
D372
D2514
D579
08
12
12
5148_0100_8026.CDR


02-2007 CR 75.0 / (as
CR75.0 / Type 5146/0105 CR of
85-X
2 CM+9038961370 ZAHNRIEMEN, DIN7721-6T2,5X317,5
TOOTHED BELT, DIN7721-6T2,5X317,5
COURROIE CRANTEE, DIN7721-6T2,5X317,5
4 CM+9514565502 SAUGERGRUPPE (SERVICE)
SUCTION CUP ASSEMBLY (SERVICE)
ENSEMBLE VENTOUSES (SERVICE)
5 CM+9514647521 KABELBAUM FL 8POL
FLAT CABLE HARNESS 8POLE
FAISCEAU DE CABLE PLAT 8POLE
6 CM+9514661400 SCHLAUCHGRUPPE F. 4KT-WELLE
HOSE GROUP FOR SQUARE SHAFT
ENSEMBLE CONVERTIBLES POUR ARBRE A 4 PANS
7 CM+9514661211 RIEMENSPANNER
BELT TENSIONER
TENDEUR DE COURROIE
8 CM+9514661600 SCHLAUCHGRUPPE, SAUGERHEBEL
HOSE ASSEMBLY, SUCTION CUP LEVER
ENSEMBLE CONVERTIBLES LEVIER VENTOUSE
9 CM+9514665152 LICHTSCHRANKE KOMPLETT
LIGHT BARRIER, COMPLETE
PHOTO CELLULE, COMPLET
10 CM+9514665200 SEPARIEREINHEIT, EINGABE
SEPARATING UNIT, INPUT
UNITE DE SEPARATION, ENTREE
11 CM+9514665350 MOTOR 2 KOMPLETT
MOTOR 2 COMPLETE
MOTEUR 2 COMPLET
12 CM+9514665802 LAGERBOCK
BEARING BRACKET
SUPPORT
=Assembly


Type / CR 85-X
5146/0105 (as of SN6000) 02-2007
02
(GS610)
04
(GS620)
01
03
(GS622)
5148_0100_8027.cdr

SCANMODUL - TEIL 1
SCAN MODULE - PART 1
MODULE SCAN - PARTIE 1
02-2007 CR 75.0 / (as
CR75.0 / Type 5146/0105 CR of
85-X
1 CM+9514827002 OPTIKBAUGRUPPE - (GS620)
LENS ASSEMBLY - (GS620)
ENSEMBLE OPTIQUE - (GS620)
2 CM+9949981208 GS IOB-SIN-5STEP - (GS610)
PCB IOB-SIN-5STEP - (GS610)
CI IOB-SIN-5STEP - (GS610)
3 CM+9514822802 LISA BG KOMPLETT - (GS622)
ACRYLIC LIGHT GUIDE ASSEMBLY - (GS622)
ASSEMBLAGE CONDUIT DE LUMIÈRE - (GS622)
4 CM+9047913370 LEITERPLATTENHALTER CEHCBS-CUP
PCB HOLDER CEHCBS-CUP
CARTE FIXATION CEHCBS-CUP
=Assembly

SCANMODUL - TEIL 1
5146/0105 02-2007
03
06
02
05
D3252 D2763
01
04 D2513
D2851 D2763
01
D369
D3252
04 D2851
D2851
D3252
04 5148_0100_8028.CDR

SCANMODUL - TEIL 2
02-2007 CR 75.0 / (as
CR75.0 / Type 5146/0105 CR of
85-X
1 CM+9033175370 RIEGELVERSCHLUSS
LOCKING BAR LOCK
VERROU
2 CM+9514624451 BOWDENZUG KOMPL.
BOWDEN CABLE TRACTION COMPLETE
CABLE SOUS-GAINE COMPLET
3 CM+9514822202 SLOWSCAN 17:1 VOLLSTÄNDIG
SLOWSCAN 17:1 COMPLETE
SLOWSCAN 17:1 COMPLET
4 CM+9514623770 SCHEIBE
WASHER
RONDELLE
5 CM+9514824251 BÜRSTENHALTEBLECH KOMPLETT
BRUSH STRIP COMPLETE
BAGUETTE A BROSSES COMPLET
6 CM+9949946400 GS IR-EMPFAENGER
IR RECEIVER
RECEPTEUR IR
=Assembly

SCANMODUL - TEIL 2
5146/0105 02-2007
D5681
03 D2778
02
D444
D2765
01
04 (M702)
06
(GS612)
05
(M612)

SCANMODUL - TEIL 3
02-2007 CR 75.0 / (as
CR75.0 / Type 5146/0105 CR of
85-X
1 CM+9514625100 SCHRITTMOTOR ST5709S2608-A - (M702)
STEPPER MOTOR ST5709S2608-A - (M702)
MOTEUR PAS A PAS ST5709S2608-A - (M702)
2 CM+9514525900 KUPPLUNG VOLLSTÄNDIG
CLUTCH COMPLETE
ACCOUPLEMENT COMPLET
3 CM+9514820851 AUSRICHTUNG POSTSCAN
POSTSCAN ALIGNMENT
ALIGNEMENT POSTSCAN
FLAT CABLE 4POL
CABLE PLAT 4POL
5 CM+9514545240 SCHRITTMOTOR VERD. 4T4018M2200A1 - (M612)
STEPPER MOTOR WIRED 4T4018M2200A1 - (M612)
MOTEUR PAS A PAS CABLE 4T4018M2200A1 - (M612)
6 CM+9514590100 LICHTSCHRANKE 1
LIGHT BARRIER 1
BARRIERE LUMINEUSE 1
=Assembly

SCANMODUL - TEIL 3
5146/0105 02-2007
02
05
02
04
(GS616)
06
01
03
(M622)
5148_0100_8030.CDR

SCANMODUL - TEIL 4
02-2007 CR 75.0 / (as
CR75.0 / Type 5146/0105 CR of
85-X
1 CM+9038961040 ZAHNRIEMEN, DIN 7721-6T2,5/55
TOOTHED BELT, DIN 7721 6 T2,5/55
COURROIE CRANTEE, DIN 7721 6 T2,5/55
2 CM+9514526874 MITNEHMER
DRIVER
GOUPILLE D'ENTRAINEMENT
3 CM+9514545240 SCHRITTMOTOR VERD. 4T4018M2200A1 - (M622)
STEPPER MOTOR WIRED 4T4018M2200A1 - (M622)
MOTEUR PAS A PAS CABLE 4T4018M2200A1 - (M622)
5 CM+9514620801 AUSRICHTUNG PRESCAN
PRESCAN ALIGNMENT
ALIGNEMENT PRESCAN
FLAT CABLE 4POL
CABLE PLAT 4POL
=Assembly

SCANMODUL - TEIL 4
5146/0105 02-2007
04
(M621)
05
03
(GS618)
06 09
06
07
(GS626)
(GS628)
D6522
D2514
D2853
02
03 01
(GS614)
08
5148_0100_8031.CDR

SCANMODUL - TEIL 5
02-2007 CR 75.0 / (as
CR75.0 / Type 5146/0105 CR of
85-X
TENSION SPRING
RESSORT DE TRACTION
2 CM+9514524113 SCHENKELFEDER
LEG SPRING
RESSORT A BRANCHES
4 CM+9514626603 ABHEBEMOTOR KOMPLETT - (M621)
LIFT MOTOR COMPLETE - (M621)
MOTEUR DE LEVAGE COMPLET - (M621)
5 CM+9514626701 ANTIEBSWELLE KOMPLETT
DRIVE SHAFT COMPLETE
ARBRE D'ENTRAINEMENT COMPLET
6 CM+9514645921 KABELBAUM FL 6-4-4POL
FLAT CABLE HARNESS 6-4-4POLE
FAISCEAU DE CABLE PLAT 6-4-4POLE
7 CM+9514690300 LICHTSCHRANKENSATZ - (GS626, GS628)
LIGHT BARRIER SET - (GS626, GS628)
JEU PHOTO CELLULE - (GS626, GS628)
FLAT CABLE 4POL
CABLE PLAT 4POL
FLAT CABLE 4POL
CABLE PLAT 4POL
=Assembly

SCANMODUL - TEIL 5
5146/0105 02-2007
06
D2873
D2514
D579
05
(GS202)
04
02
(GS206)
D706
D4338
07
01
(M212)
03
5148_0100_8032.CDR

ROTATIONSANTRIEB
ROTATION DRIVE
COMMANDE ROTATIVE
02-2007 CR 75.0 / (as
CR75.0 / Type 5146/0105 CR of
85-X
STEPPER MOTOR COMPLETE - (M212)
MOTEUR PAS A PAS COMPLET - (M212)
3 CM+9514619251 LICHTSCHRANKE VOLLSTÄNDIG
LIGHR BARRIER ASSY
BARRIERE LUMINEUSE COMPL.
SPACER
ECARTEUR
TOOTHED BELT
COURROIE CRANTEE
FLAT CABLE 4POL
CABLE PLAT 4POL
=Assembly

ROTATIONSANTRIEB
ROTATION DRIVE
COMMANDE ROTATIVE
Type / CR 85-X
5146/0105 (as of SN6000) 02-2007
16*
15
14*
07
11 01
04
08 09
05
12* 06
13
02
03
01 03
10 02
13
5146_0100_8033.CDR

CR MD 4.0 KASSETTE 35X35

CASSETTE CR MD 4.0 35X35
CASSETTES CR MD 4.0 35X35
02-2007 CR 75.0 / (as
CR75.0 / Type 5146/0105 CR of
85-X
1 CM+9830010032 REITER
SLIDE
CAVALIER
2 CM+9830010340 UMLENKTEIL
GUIDE PART
PARITE DE RENVOI
3 CM+9830010351 KLINKE
PAWL
CLIQUET
4 CM+9830010381 BLATTFEDER RECHTS
LEAF SPRING RHS
RESSORT A BRANCHES A DROITE
5 CM+9830010391 BLATTFEDER LINKS
LEAF SPRING LHS
RESSORT A BRANCHES A GAUCHE
6 CM+9830010440 SCHRAUBE
SCREW
VIS
7 CM+9830010552 ABWEISER BESCHICHTET
DEFLECTOR
DEFLECTEUR
8 CM+9830011310 ALULABEL (FILMERKENNUNG)
ALU LABLE (FILM DETECTION)
ETIQUETTE ALU (DETECTION DE FILM)
9 CM+9830030702 RIEGEL RECHTS VOLLSTÄNDIG
LATCH RHS COMPLETE
VERROU A DROITE COMPLET
10 CM+9830030802 RIEGEL LINKS VOLLSTÄNDIG
LATCH LHS COMPLETE
VERROU A GAUCHE COMPLET
11 CM+9830430110 SCHARNIER
HINGE
CHARNIERE
12 CM+9830460300 * BODEN VOLLSTÄNDIG
BOTTOM ASSY
FOND COMPL.
TENSION SPRING
RESSORT DE TRACTION
14 CM+9830461600 * DECKEL GESCHW.
COVER WELDED
COUVERCLE SOUDE
15 CM+9830461301 CHIPKARTENHALTER, KOMPL.
CHIP CARD HOLDER, COMPLETE
PORTE CARTE PUCE, COMPLET
16 CM+9999911460 * CR MD 4.0 GENERAL PLATE 35X35
CR MD 4.0 GENERAL PLATE 35X35
=Assembly


CASSETTES CR MD 4.0 35X35
5146/0105 02-2007
16*
15
14*
07
11 01
04
08 09
05
12* 06
13
02
03
01 03
10 02
13
5146_0100_8033.CDR

CR MD 4.0 KASSETTE 10"X12"

CASSETTE CR MD 4.0 10"X12"
02-2007 CR 75.0 / (as
CR75.0 / Type 5146/0105 CR of
85-X
HINGE
CHARNIERE
BOTTOM ASSY
FOND COMPL.
TENSION SPRING
RESSORT DE TRACTION
14 CM+9830861600 * DECKEL GESCHWEISST
COVER WELDED
COUVERCLE SOUDE
16 CM+9999911470 * CR MD 4.0 GENERAL PLATE 10X12"
CR MD 4.0 GENERAL PLATE 10X12"
=Assembly


5146/0105 02-2007
16*
15
14*
07
11 01
04
08 09
05
12* 06
13
02
03
01 03
10 02
13
5146_0100_8033.CDR


02-2007 CR 75.0 / (as
CR75.0 / Type 5146/0105 CR of
85-X
HINGE
CHARNIERE
BOTTOM ASSY
FOND COMPL.
TENSION SPRING
RESSORT DE TRACTION
COVER WELDED
COUVERCLE SOUDE
16 CM+9999911480 * CR MD 4.0 GENERAL PLATE 8X10"
=Assembly


5146/0105 02-2007
15
14*
07
11 01
04
08 09
05
12*
06
13
02
03
01 03
10 02
13
5146_0100_8036.CDR


02-2007 CR 75.0 / (as
CR75.0 / Type 5146/0105 CR of
85-X
HINGE
CHARNIERE
BOTTOM COMPLETE
FOND COMPLET
TENSION SPRING
RESSORT DE TRACTION
COVER WELDED
COUVERCLE SOUDE
15 CM+9831661301 CHIPKARTENHALTER ADC-C 15X30
CHIP CARD HOLDER
PORTE CARTE PUCE ADC-C
=Assembly


5146/0105 02-2007
17*
18* 16*
15
14*
07
11 01
04
08 09
05
12* 06
13
02
03
01 03
10 02
13
5146_0100_8037.CDR


02-2007 CR 75.0 / (as
CR75.0 / Type 5146/0105 CR of
85-X
HINGE
CHARNIERE
BOTTOM ASSY
FOND COMPL.
TENSION SPRING
RESSORT DE TRACTION
COVER WELDED
COUVERCLE SOUDE
16 10+9999911960 * CR MD 4.0 GENERAL SET SR 35X43
CR MD 4.0 GENERAL SET SR 35X43
CR MD 4.0 GENERAL SET SR 35X43
17 10+9999911930 * CR MD 4.0 GENERAL CASSETTE SR 35X43
CR MD 4.0 GENERAL CASSETTE SR 35X43
CR MD 4.0 GENERAL CASSETTE SR 35X43
=Assembly


5146/0105 02-2007
15
14*
07
11 01
04
08 09
05
12*
06
13
02
03
01 03
10 02
13
5146_0100_8036.CDR


02-2007 CR 75.0 / (as
CR75.0 / Type 5146/0105 CR of
85-X
HINGE
CHARNIERE
BOTTOM ASSY
FOND COMPL.
TENSION SPRING
RESSORT DE TRACTION
COVER WELDED
COUVERCLE SOUDE
=Assembly


5146/0105 02-2007
17*
18* 16*
15
14*
07
11 01
04
08 09
05
12* 06
13
02
03
01 03
10 02
13
5146_0100_8037.CDR


02-2007 CR 75.0 / (as
CR75.0 / Type 5146/0105 CR of
85-X
HINGE
CHARNIERE
BOTTOM ASSY
FOND COMPL.
TENSION SPRING
RESSORT DE TRACTION
COVER WELDED
COUVERCLE SOUDE
16 10+9999910790 * CR MD 4.0 GENERAL SET HR 24X30
CR MD 4.0 GENERAL SET HR 24X30
17 10+9999911940 * CR MD 4.0 GENERAL CASSETTE 24X30
CR MD 4.0 GENERAL CASSETTE 24X30
=Assembly


5146/0105 02-2007
17*
18* 16*
15
14*
07
11 01
04
08 09
05
12* 06
13
02
03
01 03
10 02
13
5146_0100_8037.CDR


02-2007 CR 75.0 / (as
CR75.0 / Type 5146/0105 CR of
85-X
HINGE
CHARNIERE
BOTTOM ASSY
FOND COMPL.
TENSION SPRING
RESSORT DE TRACTION
COVER WELDED
COUVERCLE SOUDE
16 10+9999911980 * CR MD 4.0 GENERAL SET HR 18X24
17 10+9999911950 * CR MD 4.0 GENERAL CASSETTE 18X24
=Assembly


Agfa Company Confidential CR75.0 CR 75.0
/ Type / CR 85-X(as of SN6000)
5146/0105 02-2007
16*
15* 14* 13
12*
10
01
05 06
11*
04
09
02
03
01
03
07
02
09
5148_0100_8041.CDR

CR MM3.0 MAMMO KASSETTE 18X24

CASSETTE CR MM3.0 MAMMO 18X24
02-2007 CR 75.0 / (as
CR75.0 / Type 5146/0105 CR of
85-X
1 CM+9830010032 REITER
SLIDE
CAVALIER
GUIDE PART
PARITE DE RENVOI
3 CM+9830010351 KLINKE
PAWL
CLIQUET
SCREW
VIS
LATCH RHS COMPLETE
LATCH LHS COMPLETE
TENSION SPRING
RESSORT DE TRACTION
HINGE
CHARNIERE
BOTTOM ASSY
FOND COMPL.
12 CM+9833061402 * DECKEL VOLLSTÄNDIG
COVER COMPLETE
COUVERCLE COMPLET
14 10+9999912130 * CR MM 3.0 MAMMO SET 18X24
CR MM 3.0 MAMMO SET 18X24
15 10+9999912150 * CR MM 3.0 MAMMO PLATE 18X24
CR MM 3.0 MAMMO PLATE 18X24
16 10+9999912170 * CR MM 3.0 MAMMO CASSETTE 18X24
CR MM 3.0 MAMMO CASSETTE 18X24
=Assembly


5146/0105 02-2007
16*
15* 14* 13
12*
10
01
05 06
11*
04
09
02
03
01
03
07
02
09
5148_0100_8041.CDR


02-2007 CR 75.0 / (as
CR75.0 / Type 5146/0105 CR of
85-X
HINGE
CHARNIERE
BOTTOM ASSY
FOND COMPL.
12 CM+9833161402 * DECKEL VOLLSTÄNDIG
COVER COMPLETE
COUVERCLE COMPLET
14 10+9999912140 * CR MM 3.0 MAMMO SET 24X30
15 10+9999912160 * CR MM 3.0 MAMMO PLATE 24X30
16 10+9999912180 * CR MM 3.0 MAMMO CASSETTE 24X30
=Assembly


Type / CR 85-X
5146/0105 (as of SN6000) 02-2007
15
14*
07
11 01
04
08 09
05
12*
06
13
02
03
01 03
10 02
13
5146_0100_8036.CDR

CR MD 4.0 KASSETTE 21X43 AS. (43X35)

CASSETTE CR MD 4.0 21X43 AS. (43X35)
02-2007 CR 75.0 / (as
CR75.0 / Type 5146/0105 CR of
85-X
GUIDE PART
PARITE DE RENVOI
2 CM+9830010351 KLINKE
PAWL
CLIQUET
3 CM+9830010381 BLATTFEDER RECHTS
LEAF SPRING RHS
RESSORT A BRANCHES A DROITE
4 CM+9830010391 BLATTFEDER LINKS
LEAF SPRING LHS
RESSORT A BRANCHES A GAUCHE
SCREW
VIS
LATCH RHS COMPLETE
LATCH LHS COMPLETE
HINGE
CHARNIERE
TENSION SPRING
RESSORT DE TRACTION
BOTTOM ASSY
FOND COMPL.
COVER WELDED
COUVERCLE SOUDE
=Assembly

CR MD 4.0 KASSETTE 21X43 AS. (43X35)

5146/0105 02-2007
5148_0100_8034.cdr

MODIFIKATIONSBAUGRUPPEN / ZUBEHÖR
MODIFICATION KITS / ACCESSORIES
KIT DE MODIFICATION / ACCESSOIRE
02-2007 CR 75.0 / (as
CR75.0 / Type 5146/0105 CR of
85-X
99 CM+9514690400 MAINTENANCE KIT
MAINTENANCE KIT
KIT DE MAINTENANCE
99 CM+9514611504 SERVICE-DISKETTENSATZ ACP_4007
SERVICE DISKETTE SET ACP_4007
JEU DE DISQUETTES SERVICE ACP_4007
99 EB+44060160 ADC DIAG, VME-TESTBOARD
ADC DIAG, VME-TESTBOARD
ADC DIAG, VME-TESTBOARD
99 CM+9514610550 TESTBILD CD AGFA V1.0
TEST PATERN CD AGFA V1.0
CD TEST IMAGE AGFA V1.0
99 CM+9514693000 * VERPACKUNG FÜR ADC-C PLUS
PACKING FOR ADC-C PLUS
EMBALLAGE POUR ADC-C PLUS
99 CM+9515510152 CU-FILTER VERPACKT
CU FILTER PACKED
FILTER CU EMBALLE
99 CM+9832010000 ADC TESTSHEET KASSETTE
ADC TESTSHEET CASSETTE
ADC TESTSHEET CASSETTE
99 CM+9999910070 VDO HAND-DRUCKMESSGERÄT
VDO HAND MANOMETER
VDO MANOMÈTRE
100 10+9999912190 * PROSAT WIPERS
PROSAT WIPERS
PROSAT WIPERS
=Assembly

MODIFIKATIONSBAUGRUPPEN / ZUBEHÖR
MODIFICATION KITS / ACCESSORIES
KIT DE MODIFICATION / ACCESSOIRE
5146/0105 02-2007
Empfohlene Ersatzteilsortimente
Ersatzteilsortimente repräsentieren eine Auswahl wichtiger Teile aus der Ersatzteilliste.
Sortimentskategorien
R 'Repair' Teilebedarf zur Reparatur des Geräts.

Dieses Sortiment sollte der Techniker im Auto mitführen "Car Stock".
Die Mengen decken den Bedarf für bis zu 10 Geräte.
Lokal individuelle Mengenanpassungen vornehmen in Abhängigkeit von:
- Anzahl der Geräte
- Größe des Servicegebiets
- Servicestruktur (zentral/dezentral)
- Bevorratungszeit
I 'Installation' Teilebedarf zur Installation des Geräts.

Dieses Sortiment sollte als Kofferlager zur Verfügung stehen.
Es enthält alle gerätespezifischen Teile die zusätzlich zu den Teilen des
Gerätelieferumfangs zur Durchführung einer Installation benötigt werden.
Die Mengen reichen für eine einzige Geräteinstallation.
M 'Maintenance' Teilebedarf zur Wartung des Geräts.

Dieses Sortiment sollte als Kofferlager zur Verfügung stehen.
Dieses Sortiment muss für eine Wartung zur Verfügung stehen.
Es enthält alle gerätespezifischen Teile die zur Durchführung einer Wartung nach
Wartungscheckliste benötigt werden.
Die Mengen reichen für eine einzige Wartung.
L 'Local stock' Extrem teure oder sperrige Teile die im Zentrallager des Landes anstatt im R-Sortiment
zur Verfügung stehen sollten.
Strategischer Bestand unabhängig von der Anzahl der Geräteinstallationen.
Falls diese Teile Bestandteil des Serviceabkommens sind müssen sie nach Verwendung
umgehend wieder auf Lager gelegt werden.


02-2007 CR 75.0 / (as
CR75.0 / Type 5146/0105 CR of SN6000) Agfa Company Confidential
85-X
Recommended Spare Parts Assortments

Spare Parts Assortments represent a selection of important parts out of the Spare Parts List.
Categories of Assortments
R 'Repair' Parts required to repair a machine.

This assortment should be available in the field service engineers` car stock
Quantity covers requirements for up to 10 machines.
Adapt the locally required individual amount depending on:
- number of machines
- extension of the service area
- service structure (centralized/decentralized)
- stockpiling
I 'Installation' Parts required to install a machine.

This assortment should be available in a suitcase.
It includes all machine specific parts required to perform
the installation in addition to the parts included in
the shipment.
Quantity covers one single machine installation
M 'Maintenance' Parts required to maintain a machine.

This assortment should be available in a suitcase.
This assortment must be available during a maintenance job,
it includes all machine specific parts required to perform a maintenance
according to the Maintenance check list.
Quantity covers one single maintenance.
L 'Local stock' Extremely expensive or bulky parts which should be kept

in the country central warehouse instead of the R assortment.
Strategic stock quantity is independent of the installed base.
If service contract obligations refer to these parts, they must be replenished
immediately.


Agfa Company Confidential CR75.0 CR 75.05146/0105
/ Type / CR 85-X(as of SN6000) 02-2007
Assortiments de pièces détachées

Les assortiments suivants représentent une sélection de pièces essentielles extraites de la liste de
pièces détachées.
Catégories d’assortiments
R 'Repair' Pièces requises pour la réparation de l’appareil.

Le technicien devrait avoir cet assortiment dans son véhicule ( = Carstock)
Cette quantité est suffisante pour la réparation de 10 appareils.
Adapter les quantités sur place d’après les critères :
- nombre d’appareils
- extension de la zone d’intervention
- structure du service technique (centralisation/décentralisation)
- temps d’approvisionnement
I 'Installation' Pièces requises pour l’installation de l'appareil.

Cet assortiment devrait être disponible dans une mallette.
Il contient toutes les pièces spécifiques à l’appareil requises pour effecteur l'installation en
plus des pièces incluses dans la fourniture.
La quantité recouvre les besoins pour l’installation d’un seul appareil.
M 'Maintenance' Pièces requises pour la révision de l’appareil.

Cet assortiment devrait être disponible dans une mallette.
Cet assortiment doit être disponible pendant la révision.
Il contient toutes les pièces spécifiques à l’appareil pour effecteur la maintenance en
fonction de la Maintenance check list.
Cette quantité est suffisante pour la révision d’un seul appareil.
L 'Local stock' Pièces encombrantes, extrêmement onéreuses qui devraient être stockées
dans le magasin central de votre pays à la place de l'assortiment R.
La réserve de pièces stratégiques ne dépend pas du nombre d’appareils installés.
Si le contrat de maintenance fait référence à ces pièces elles doivent être remplacées
immédiatement.


02-2007 CR 75.0 / (as
85-X
Bestellung von Sortimenten

Bestellung AGFA intern:
Code AH602A im EVS öffnen, Sortimentsnummer für das gewünschte Sortiment R, I, M oder L
eingeben und Einzelteile bestellen.
Bestellung durch AGFA Partner:

Das gewünschte Sortiment bei der zuständigen AGFA Vertretung mit Angabe der betreffenden
Sortimentsnummer R, I, M oder L bestellen.
Ordering of Spare Part Kits

AGFA internal orders:
Open Code AH602A in the EVS, enter the kit number for the required assortment R, I, M, or L and
order individual parts.
Orders of AGFA partners:

Order the required assortment via the responsible AGFA Agency listing the respective kit number of
assortment R, I, M, or L.
Commande d'assortiments
Commande interne à AGFA :
ouvrir le code AH602A dans EVS, écrire le numéro de l'assortiment souhaité comme R, I, M ou L et
passer commande des pièces.
Commande par les partenaires d'AGFA :

passer commande de l'assortiment souhaité auprès du dépositaire AGFA en charge en indiquant le
numéro de l'assortiment comme R, I, M ou L.
CM+051480100731 CR 85.0 Sortiment R Version 2

CM+051480100734 CR 85.0 Sortiment L Version 2


5146/0105 02-2007
Typenverzeichnis / Type List / List de Type
CR85-X 200 - 240 V 5148/0100

CR 75.0 FROM SN6000 5146/0105


02-2007 CR 75.0 / (as
85-X
Optionen / Options / Options
PROSAT WIPERS ETRTM
Nur über Vertrieb bestellbar / Can only be ordered through Sales / Passer commande uniquement par le service des ventes


5146/0105 02-2007
Copyright © 13.02.2007 DD+DIS092.06M Agfa-Gevaert HealthCare
Alle Rechte vorbehalten / All rights reserved / Tous droits réservés
Herausgegeben von / Published by / Edité par
Agfa-Gevaert HealthCare
D - 81539 München
Technische Änderungen vorbehalten

Technical modifications reserved
Sous réserve des modifications techniques
AGFA und der Agfa-Rhombus sind eingetragene Warenzeichen von Agfa-Gevaert HealthCare
AGFA and the Agfa-Rhombus are trade marks of Agfa-Gevaert HealthCare
AGFA et le logo Agfa sont des marques déposées de Agfa-Gevaert HealthCare

Imaging Services Accessories
CR 85-X
Type 5148/100
CR 75.0
Type 5146/105
(as of SN ≥ 6000)
► Content of Chapter 6: Accessories

This chapter contains the instructions for all accessories (options):
Document No. Contents Edition.

Revision
DD+DIS025.05E Technical Documentation for the CR User Station 4.0

DD+DIS180.05M Spare Parts List for the CR User Station n.a.


eq_06_accessories_toc_e_template_v02
Imaging Services Field Modifications
CR 85-X
Type 5148/100
CR 75.0
Type 5146/105
(as of SN ≥ 6000)
► Content of Chapter 7: Field Modifications

This chapter contains the instructions for all modifications due to technical changes
since production start:
Document No. Contents Edition.

Revision
DD+DIS203.06E Installation Instructions for Device Software ACP_4007 2.1


eq_07_field-mod_toc_e_template_v02
Imaging Services Field Modifications
CR 85-X
Type 5148/100
CR 75.0
Type 5146/105
(as of SN ≥ 6000)
Installation Instructions for

Digitizer Software ACP_4007

It provides the installation instructions for digitizer software ACP_4007.

Revision Date compared to previous Version 2.0
2.1 04-2007 • Added installation instructions for
ACPL1004 language files
Details see section 3.6 , page 14.
Document Title
Preceding Bulletin Release of ACPL1004 Language Files for Digitizer User
Interface of CR 85-X, DD+DIS088.07E


eq_07_field-modifications_e_template_v02
DD+DIS203.06E Field Modifications
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
the equipment.
on the product.


LIST OF CONTENTS
1 INTRODUCTION OF DIGITIZER SOFTWARE ACP_4007......................................................4

1.1 Purpose of the Modification ......................................................................................................4
1.2 CR Applications ........................................................................................................................4
1.3 Ex-Factory Installation ..............................................................................................................4
2 PREREQUISITES FOR INSTALLATION .................................................................................5

3 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ................................................................................................6
3.1 Making Installation Floppy Disks...............................................................................................6
3.2 Creating a Backup ....................................................................................................................7
3.3 Updating from Software ACP_4005..........................................................................................7
3.4 Updating from Software Versions ≤ ACP_3403........................................................................8
3.5 Installing on a corrupted or blank Hard Disk...........................................................................10
3.6 Installation of ACPL1004 Language Files...............................................................................14
3.7 Concluding the Installation......................................................................................................15
4 VERIFICATION OF SUCCESSFUL INSTALLATION.............................................................16


1 Introduction of Digitizer Software ACP_4007
1.1 Purpose of the Modification

The software version ACP_4007 incorporates a check of the internal configuration
values of the photomultiplier.
Therefore the update of digitizer software is required before replacement of the
photomultiplier.
See chapter 3.8 of the service manual for the software release information.
1.2 CR Applications
Digitizer software ACP_4007 can be used for the following
CR applications:
• General Radiography (GenRad),
• Mammography (Mammo),
• General Radiography 50 µm (Extremities), and
• Full Leg – Full Spine (FLFS)
The software cannot be used for radiotherapy applications.
1.3 Ex-Factory Installation

Software AP_4007 or higher is installed on CR 85-X digitizers with following
serial numbers:
SN = 1017, 1019, 1021, 1023, 1025, 1026, 1027, 1029, 1030, 1031,
1032, 1036, 1047, 1052 and 1060
SN > 1069


2 Prerequisites for Installation
REQUIRED TOOLS:
You need max. 8 empty formatted floppy disks with 1.44 MB capacity each:
• one for the backup of site specific data and
• 7 for the preparation of the installation set of floppy disks
if you obtained the digitizer software from MedNet.
For the installation on a blank hard disk you need additionally:

• CD-ROM with test images (CM+9 5145 3055 0),
• your service PC which is equipped with a terminal program,
• a serial connection cable (RS232) with Sub D plugs (see figure 1).
9 pins 25 pins
figure 1
REQUIRED TIME:
• approximately 30 minutes for the software upgrade or
• approximately 60 minutes for the installation on the blank hard disk.


3 Installation Procedure
3.1 Making Installation Floppy Disks
Execute these actions if you downloaded the digitizer software from MedNet.
Skip them if you obtained the software via the spare parts supply.
(1) Extract all files from the downloaded Zip file.

Among the extracted files is the Zip file ACP_4007.zip.
(2) Extract all files from ACP_4007.zip into an empty folder on the service PC.
Seven sub-folders are created there:

HDFORMAT
PORTEX1
PORTEX2
ACP4007_1_3
ACP4007_2_3
ACP4007_3_3
LANG_FILES
NOTE:
For each of these folders, a floppy disk with the same name is created in the following
steps.
(3) Insert an empty floppy disk.
(4) Select the floppy drive entry (A:) in the Windows Explorer.
(5) Right-click the floppy drive entry and select Properties.
(6) Select tab General and enter the corresponding folder name,
e.g. HDFORMAT.
(7) Click button <OK>.
(8) Copy the contents of the folder (e.g. HDFORMAT) from the service PC to the
floppy disk.
(9) Remove the floppy disk from the drive and label it with the folder name, e.g.
HDFORMAT.
(10) Repeat steps (3) to (9) for the other five floppy disks.
Result Now you have the required installation set of floppy disks.


3.2 Creating a Backup

Before you do the software update, create a backup floppy disk with the
machine specific data in case you have to restore it later
in case of failure of the software installation.
For this, execute these actions:
(1) Open the left front door of the digitizer.

You need access to the cPCI rack with floppy disk drive and <Reset> switch.
(2) Enter the Service menu on the digitizer keypad and select
Save on floppy / Machine specific data.
(3) Follow the guidelines on the digitizer display.
NOTE:
In the rare case that a backup floppy cannot be generated in this way, obtain the
out-of-factory backup data using this link:
http://intra.agfanet/BU/MI/MEDNET3.NSF/EN/factorybackupftp.htm
3.3 Updating from Software ACP_4005
Install from floppy / Software.
(2) Follow the instructions on the digitizer display.
(3) Close the front door and switch off/ on the digitizer.
Wait until the system is ready.
Result The digitizer software is installed.Proceed with section 3.7.


3.4 Updating from Software Versions ≤ ACP_3403
Install from floppy / Software.
(2) Insert the floppy disk labeled PORTEX1 into the disk drive of the digitizer.
(3) Press the <Reset> switch on the cPCI rack.
(4) Wait until the control LED of the floppy disk drive is off.
(5) Remove the floppy disk.
(6) Insert the floppy disk labeled PORTEX2 into the disk drive of the digitizer.
(8) Wait until the control LED of floppy disk drive is off.
NOTE:
Do not insert any other floppy disk!
WAITING TIME:
Wait approx. 2 minutes.
The files of the Portex operating system are installed.


(11) Insert the floppy disk labeled ACP4007_1_3 into the disk drive of the digitizer.
WAITING TIME:
Wait approx. 2 minutes.
The system extracts the ACP_4007 software.
(24) Close the front door and switch off/ on the digitizer.


Result Normally, the digitizer performs its self test and afterwards changes its state to Ready.
Proceed with section 3.7.
If the digitizer does not perform the self test, the software installation was not successful.
The cause is a corruption of the file system on the hard disk.
Perform the installation according to section 3.5.
3.5 Installing on a corrupted or blank Hard Disk
NOTE:
This procedure must be carried out only if the hard disk of the digitizer is corrupted or
has been replaced by a blank one.
In this case the hard disk must be formatted using the installation disk HDFORMAT.
(1) Disconnect the digitizer from the network.

This is necessary since a default IP-Address and hostname is configured.
(2) Connect your service PC to the RS232 port at the cPCI rack.
(3) Start the terminal program by opening Windows menu

Start / Programs / Accessories / Communication / HyperTerminal.
(4) Create a new connection and select your serial port (e.g., COM1).
(5) Set terminal settings to 9600 baud, Xon/Xoff, no parity, 8 bit, 1 stop bit.
(6) Press <ENTER>.

The digitizer prompt shell> appears.
(7) Insert the floppy disk labeled HDFORMAT into the disk drive of the
cPCI rack.


(9) Confirm partitioning/formatting of the hard disk on your terminal with ‘y’.
(10) Wait until the system prompt is displayed on the terminal.
(12) Insert the floppy disk labelled PORTEX2 into the disk drive of the digitizer.
NOTE:
Do not insert any other floppy disk!



The system extracts the ACP_4007 software.
(34) Wait until the digitizer is ready.
Install from floppy / Machine specific data.
(36) Follow the guidelines on the digitizer display.

Use the backup floppy disk you created in section 3.2.
NOTE:
Without restoring the device-specific parameters, an operation of the digitizer is
impossible.


(37) Restore the test image files from CD (CM+9 5145 3055 0) to the directory
E:\testimg on the digitizer.
(38) Generate the CPF file with the QS, the VIPS or the CCM tool. Please refer to the
service documentation, chapter 1, for details.
Install from floppy / CPF-File.
(40) Follow the instructions displayed on the digitizer display.

Have a floppy disk ready for the backup of device-specific parameters.
(41) Reconnect the digitizer to the network.
(42) Disconnect the service PC.
(43) Close the front door and switch digitizer power off/ on.
Result The digitizer performs its self test and afterwards changes its state to Ready. Proceed
with section 3.7.


3.6 Installation of ACPL1004 Language Files
NOTE:
ACPL1004 language files are installed ex factory on following digitizers. Then a
installation of the ACPL1004 language files is not necessary.
• CR 85-X Type 5148/100: SN ≥ 1937 , CW 15/2007
• CR 75.0 Type 5146/105: SN ≥ 6031 , CW 15/2007
To install ACPL1004 language files and to change the language of the digitizer user
interface perform following procedure:
(1) Ensure that the digitizer is switched on.
(2) Open Service menu on the local key pad of the digitizer.
(3) Choose
<INSTALL from floppy>
<language files>
(4) Open front doors of the digitizer.
(5) Insert floppy disk with ACPL1004 language files at disk drive of cPCI-Rack and
confirm with <;> on the local key pad.
(6) After a short while following message appears on the Service menu:
<Please remove the floppy and press ;>
Remove floppy disk and press ; to confirm.
(7) Following message appears in the Service menu:

<Do you want to change my user interface language>
To change the user interface language press ;.

To leave the menu without changing the language press :.
(8) Select user interface language from list and press ;.


(9) Exit Service menu by pressing :.
(10) When the system requests to confirm the changes press ;.
(11) Close the front door.
(12) Installation of ACPL1004 language files completed.
3.7 Concluding the Installation
NOTE:
Skip action (1) if the previous software version was ACP_1201 or higher.
(1) Scan or erase a cassette. The cassette doesn't need to be exposed.
(2) Open the left front door.
(3) Refresh your backup by following the guidelines of Service Menu topic Save on
floppy / Machine specific data.
(4) Close the front door.
NOTE:
If the version of the previous software was less than ACP_1007, perform IP Center and
Shading calibrations. Please refer to the service documentation, chapter 3.6.
NOTE:
If you use the digitizer for Mammography applications, enable “Mammo” manually in the
Service Menu of the digitizer.


4 Verification of successful Installation
Info / Device info.
(2) Check the entry Software.
Result If the entry Software is equal to ACP_4007, the software installation was successful.
Otherwise repeat the installation and closely follow the instructions in section 3.


Chapter 8
HEALTHCARE Manufacturing Standard
Imaging Services
Modifications
CR 85-X
Type 5148/100
CR 75.0
Type 5146/105
(as of SN ≥ 6000)

This document contains an overview of all the technical changes and their
chronological introduction as a production standard. This includes hardware and
software modifications.
Edition. Release Changes compared to previous version 2.0

Revision Date
2.1 12-2007 • Introduction of High Altitude Vacuum Pump
Details see section 1, page 4.
• Introduction of Oberon 3 Board
Details see section 2, page 4.
Document Title
n.a. n.a.


eq_08_modifications_e_template_v02
Agfa Company Confidential Copyright © 2007 HealthCare N.V.
DD+DIS378.05E Manufacturing Standard Modifications
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
the equipment.
on the product.


TABLE OF CONTENT
The following modifications of CR 85-X Type 5148/100 and CR 75.0 Type 5146/105
(as of SN ≥ 6000) are listed in chronological order, the latest modification on top of the
list.
timeline Modification Referenced Documents

2007
August 1. Introduction of High Altitude Vacuum Pump SB No. 04: DD+DIS278.07E,
Enclosure: DD+DIS151.07E
June 2. Introduction of Oberon 3 Board Enclosure: DD+DIS034.07E
April 3. Introduction of Language Files ACPL1004 SB No. 3: DD+DIS088.07E
February 4. Modification of cPCI-Rack n.a.
2006
October 5. Modification of the 5-fold Stepper Motor Board n.a.
July 6. Modification of Erasure Unit n.a.
May 7. Introduction of Digitizer Software ACP_4007 Chapter 3.8: DD+DIS202.06E,
Chapter 7: DD+DIS203.06E,
SB No. 2: DD+DIS201.06E
April 8. Introduction of Digitizer Software ACP_4005 Chapter 3.8: DD+DIS202.06E
SB – Service Bulletin


1 Introduction of High Altitude Vacuum Pump
Reason A modified vacuum pump has been introduced for the use of the
digitizer on sites between 2000 m and 4000 m above sea level.
Product(s) & The High Altitude Vacuum Pump is not part of series production and
Serial only available as upgrade kit for new installations or already installed
Number(s) digitizers as well as spare part for the replacement of modified
vacuum pumps, which are defective.
Part • Upgrade Kit “High Altitude Vacuum Pump for CR 75.0/CR 85-X”
Number(s) ABC Code: EZKFF
• Spare part “High Altitude vacuum pump”,
CM+9 5148 6230 0
Referenced • Service Bulletin No. 04, DD+DIS278.07E
Document(s)
• Enclosure - Replacement Instructions: High Altitude Vacuum
Pump for Use on Sites between 2000 m and 4000 m above Sea
Level, DD+DIS151.07E
2 Introduction of Oberon 3 Board
Reason In respect to the previous Oberon Board, the Oberon 3 Board is

RoHS compliant (Restriction of the use of certain Hazardous
Substances in electrical and electronic equipment).No functional
changes have been made.
Digitizer Software ACP_4007 or higher is required when using the
Oberon 3 board. The required Digitizer Software is in scope of the
spare part.
This spare part can be used in RoHS compliant and non-RoHS
compliant Digitizers.
Oberon 3 Board requires Digitizer Software ACP_4007 or higher.
Product(s) & CR 85-X Type 5148/100:
Serial
SN ≥ 2155, CW 25/2007
Number(s)
CR 75.0 Type 5146/105:

SN ≥ 6051, CW 25/2007
Part • Spare part “Oberon 3 Board”, CM+9 5146 1501 0
Number(s)
Referenced • Enclosure - Installation Instructions of the Oberon 3 Board,
Document(s) DD+DIS034.07E


3 Introduction of Language Files ACPL1004
Reason User interface language files have been released to ensure that
messages in the digitizer user interface are available in several
languages. Eleven languages can be used with the release of
ACPL1004 language files.
Product(s) & CR 85-X Type 5148/100:
Serial
SN ≥ 1937 , CW 15/2007
Number(s)
CR 75.0 Type 5146/105:

SN ≥ 6031 , CW 15/2007
Part • ACPL1004 language files can be obtained by Download
Number(s) from Mednet GSO Library:
Computed Radiography Æ CR Digitizers ÆCR 85-X Æ Freeware
• ACPL1004 language files are also in scope of the ACP_4007

Digitizer Software. CM+9 5146 1150 5
Referenced Service Bulletin No. 3,
Document(s) Release of language files for digitizer user interface of CR 85-X,
DD+DIS088.07E
4 Modification of cPCI-Rack
Reason The power supply unit has been modified to enable the use of hard
disks with higher voltage input.
The modified power supply unit is RoHS compliant.
Product(s) & SN ≥ 1666 , CW 05/2007
Serial
Number(s)
Part Following spare parts have been modified:
Number(s) • Spare part “cPCI-Rack, CM+9 5146 1400 6
• Spare part “cPCI-Rack assembled”, CM+9 5146 1405 7
• Spare part “PCI power supply”, CM+9 5146 1430 2
Referenced n.a.
Document(s)


5 Modification of the 5-fold Stepper Motor Board
Reason The fixation of the 5-fold stepper motor board has been changed by
introducing new clips to prevent bending of the board.
Product(s) & SN ≥ 1420, CW 41/2006

Serial
Number(s)
Part The new fixation and the board are included when ordering:
Number(s) • Spare part “slow scan 17:1 complete”: CM+9 5146 2220 7
• Spare part “slow scan 17:1 complete”: CM+9 5148 2220 2
• Spare part “chassis assy CAS 1”: CM+9 5146 5100 1
• Spare part “chassis assy CAS 2”: CM+9 5146 5400 1
Referenced n.a.
Document(s)
6 Modification of Erasure Unit
Reason Increase of cost effectiveness due to changed materials.

Predecessors can be used in case they are still available.
Product(s) & SN ≥ 1198, CW 30/2006

Serial
Number(s)
Part Spare part “erasure unit”: CM+9 5146 3500 2
Number(s)
Referenced n.a.
Document(s)


Reason Solution for:

Internal configuration values of the photomultiplier in
CR 85-X are now checked to be within the specified range.
Product(s) & The Digitizer Software is installed ex factory on following digitizers:
Serial
Number(s)
SN = 1017, 1019, 1021, 1023, 1025, 1026, 1027, 1029, 1030,
1031, 1032, 1036, 1047, 1052 and 1060
SN > 1069
Part Digitizer Software ACP_4007
Number(s) - Order Number: CM+9 5146 1150 4
or Mednet GSO Library:
Computed Radiography Æ CR Digitizers Æ
CR 85-X Æ Freeware
Referenced Chapter 3.8 of the CR 85-X Service Manual - Software Releases
Document(s) and Patches, DD+DIS202.06E
Chapter 7 of the CR 85-X Service Manual - Field Modifications,
DD+DIS203.06E
Service Bulletin No. 2, Release of Digitizer Software ACP_4007 for
CR 85-X, DD+DIS201.06E
Reason The digitizer software ACP_4005 for CR 85-X is based on the

software for the CR 75.0 digitizer.
Changes and solved bugs refer to the
predecessor CR 75.0 software, version ACP_3403.
Product(s) & First released software for CR 85-X.
Serial
Number(s)
Part Digitizer software ACP_4005
Number(s) Order Number: CM+9 5146 1150 3
Referenced Chapter 3.8 of the CR 85-X Service Manual - Software Releases
Document(s) and Patches, DD+DIS202.06E


Imaging Services Maintenance
CR 85-X
Type 5148/100
CR 75.0
Type 5146/105
(as of SN ≥ 6000)
Edition 2, Revision 0
CR 85-X CR 75.0
Type 5148/100 Type 5146/105
(as of SN ≥ 6000)
This documentation is separately available. Order No: DD+DIS020.07E.

eq_09_maintenance_e_template_v02
DD+DIS020.07E Maintenance
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
the equipment.
on the product.



This document describes all routines and tests to be carried out during maintenance.

Document Title
DD+DIS028.07E


LIST OF CONTENTS
1 GENERAL INFORMATION ......................................................................................................5

1.1 Maintenance Frequency ...........................................................................................................5
1.2 Required Time...........................................................................................................................6
1.3 Required Tools..........................................................................................................................6
1.4 Required Cleaning Material ......................................................................................................6
1.5 Required Spare Parts ...............................................................................................................7
2 MAINTENANCE STEP BY STEP .............................................................................................8

2.1 Diagnostics................................................................................................................................8
2.1.1 Questioning of the Customer ....................................................................................................8
2.1.2 Infocounter Analysis..................................................................................................................8
2.1.3 How to Evaluate the Infocounter...............................................................................................9
2.1.4 Clearing Infocounter................................................................................................................10
2.1.5 Visual Check ...........................................................................................................................10
2.2 Inside.......................................................................................................................................11
2.3 Cassette Unit...........................................................................................................................11
2.4 Power Unit...............................................................................................................................12
2.5 cPCI Rack ...............................................................................................................................13
2.6 Scan Unit.................................................................................................................................14
2.7 Transport Units .......................................................................................................................14
2.8 Erasure Unit ............................................................................................................................15
2.9 Cassettes ................................................................................................................................17
2.10 Image Plates ...........................................................................................................................17
3 CHECKING THE IMAGE QUALITY........................................................................................18

3.1 Test Cycles .............................................................................................................................18
3.2 Exposure of a Flatfield ............................................................................................................18
3.3 Evaluation of a Flatfield...........................................................................................................21
4 COMPLETION OF MAINTENANCE.......................................................................................22


1 General Information
NOTE:
These maintenance instructions must be considered confidential.
To ensure quality and functional reliability of the system all the points listed below
(minimum maintenance points) must be carried out.
• The maintenance points have been arranged in a chronologically suitable order to
make the work routines as efficient as possible.
The sequence of the maintenance points in the checklist (see appendix of this
chapter) is identical with these maintenance instructions.
• If there is a detailed description for a certain maintenance point in the service
documentation, this will be noted in the column "details".
• During the maintenance procedure always consider the safety instructions, see
TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION chapter 1/1.
• Please check if it is necessary to include country specific regulations as additional
maintenance points!
NOTE:
Only for Systems with DRA Contract (Direct Remote Access):
In systems with DRA Contract the infocounters are checked and evaluated in regular
intervals by the GSC. If there is an indication of an upcoming defect, this is noted in the
DRA Report and sent to the respective NSO with instructions for measures possibly
required on the machine.
Therefore we recommend to contact your NSO about this subject before maintenance, in
order to perform these recommended measures in addition to the "must" maintenance
points.
1.1 Maintenance Frequency
The maintenance has to be carried out:

• every 25 000 cycles or
• once every six months


1.2 Required Time
approximately 2 h incl. Quality Check
1.3 Required Tools
Order Number Description

CM+9 5155 1015 2 Cu filter
(for exposure of test images)
CM+9 5145 3055 0 CD with test images
commercially available service PC
commercially available flashlight
1.4 Required Cleaning Material

In addition to the standard equipment, the following cleaning substances are required:

CM+9 9999 0895 0 vacuum cleaner
CM+9 9999 0896 0 dirt bags for vacuum cleaner (10 x)
ABC-code: EFOJH ADC cleaner
CM+9 9999 9288 0
ABC-code: ETRTM PROSAT wipers for CR MM3.0 IP
Spare Part: 10+ 9 9999 1219 0
commercially available dust brush
commercially available lint-free cloth
commercially available soft dust brush


1.5 Required Spare Parts

The following assortment represents a complete copy of the
Maintenance Kit (CM+5146 1017 33)
according to the R I M L assortment categorization in the spare parts list:

CM+9 0450 6582 0 10 x erasure lamp, 100 W
CM+9 5145 9100 0 2 x roller (for cassette unit)
CM+9 5146 1799 2 2 x air filter


2 Maintenance Step by Step
2.1 Diagnostics
2.1.1 Questioning of the Customer
• Ask the customer for any problem that appeared since the last maintenance.
2.1.2 Infocounter Analysis
• Service PC to analyze the infocounter
(1) Insert an empty floppy in the floppy drive of

the cPCI rack,
see figure 1.
(2) In the service menu select
"Save on floppy"
with the key and press
(3) Select "Infocounter file" and press

(4) Remove the floppy from the floppy drive and
insert it in the Service PC.
(5) Unzip the file "5148_xxxx_icn.zip"
(xxxx stands for serial number)
(6) Start an editor (e.g. notepad or wordpad).
(7) Open the file 5146_reg09_011.crd
"\D_\infocounter\0\infocounter.txt" figure 1
(8) Evaluate the infocounter file.


2.1.3 How to Evaluate the Infocounter
Evaluation of infocounters.txt
What to check in the Comment

infocounter
1.1 Device Info: Serial Compare device serial number to chapter 8
number and “Manufacturing Standard Modification” and chapter 10
Installation date “Field Service Bulletins” to determine whether the device
is modified or requires a modification.
1.4 Software Info It is recommended to have the latest software installed.

Before you upgrade to a new software, make sure that
your hardware is up to date.
2.2 Throughput For throughput most important are the cycles per day.
They usually count between 50 and 200.
3.3 Hardware By comparing the status of the device with the available
Modification History “Field Modifications”, chapter 7, the exact hardware
status can be determined.
3.4 Software Check the software modification history to determine,

Modification History whether a recent software upgrade solved a problem, that
occurred quite often in the error list.
4.6 Laser Power Check that laser power is constant: no more than 1 mW
difference in between two entries. If the value is higher,
run diagnostic software and
scan & signals and check laser diode module.
4.7 Polygon Jitter If amplitude exceeded 300 milli-pixel, check accurately

Monitoring the image quality on the workstation.
The entries are only indications and can only be
interpreted as one symptom which is conducted to the
optic module.


Evaluation of infocounters.txt
What to check in the Comment
infocounter
5.3 Retries Retries lead to less throughput of the device. If the
fraction of retries exceeds 1%, compare with frequent
error codes.
5.7 Error History Check errors since last maintenance, how often they
appeared as well as the CBF (cycles between failures) of
these errors. This gives an overview of the current status
of the machine.
Compare frequently occurring errors with the error list in
chapter 3.3, and take actions.
5.8 Error List Relatives Troubleshoot these errors using the technical
and documentation, chapter 3.3, “Troubleshooting”.
5.9 Error List Total
2.1.4 Clearing Infocounter
(1) Clear the infocounters to refresh relative counters.
2.1.5 Visual Check
• Flashlight
(1) Check overall condition of the machine – outside and inside – for obvious changes
or damage.


2.2 Inside
• Vacuum cleaner
• Lint free cloth
(1) Vacuum the inside of the digitizer and wipe it.
2.3 Cassette Unit
• Dust brush
• Roller (CM+9 5145 9100 0)
• Toothed belt (CM+9 5145 5195 0)
Opener (1) Clean the opener mechanism with a soft

Mechanism
dust brush.
(2) Check roller (see small circle) for visible

wear and replace if necessary.
In any case replace the roller once a year
.
5146_reg02_000cdr
figure 2
Belt (3) Exchange the transport belt once a year.


2.4 Power Unit
• Soft cloth
• Air filter (CM+9 5146 1799 2)
Safety (1) Open the doors of the digitizer while the

Switch
machine is switched on.
(2) As soon as the left door is opened only a

little, all assemblies except the cPCI rack
and its fan must be deenergized.
514512AL.CDR
figure 3
Air Filter (3) Exchange air filter at the

right-side door by drawing it out of its hold
(see figure 4).
5146_reg09_007.cdr
figure 4


2.5 cPCI Rack
• Vacuum cleaner
• Soft cloth
• Air filter (CM+9 5146 1799 2)
General (1) Remove visible dust and dirt with the

vacuum cleaner.
cPCI Fan (2) Open the doors when the machine is

switched on.
The power supply of the cPCI rack and

its fan must still be on.
51 4
51
2E
C. C
D R
figure 5
Air Filter (3) Clean the grid of the fan with a soft
cloth.
(4) Exchange the air filter 2 by moving the

clamp 1 up for taking out and down after
putting in.
5146_reg09_01
figure 6


2.6 Scan Unit
• Soft cloth
• ADC Cleaner (if not available, use water)
• Discharge brush (CM+9 5145 2442 1)
Scan (1) Slide out the scan unit.

Rollers
(2) Clean the scan rollers on prescan and postscan side with ADC Cleaner.
CAUTION:
Risk of damaging the scan unit.
Do not remove the scan rollers. Clean the scan rollers in place by moving the slow scan
motor manually.
2.7 Transport Units

• Suction cups (CM+9 5145 6550 2)
Suction (1) Check position of the suction cups 1.

Cups 1
(2) Clean the suction cups with ADC
cleaner.
(3) In case of vacuum problems, check the

suction cups by bending up the edges
(check for tears) and replace if
necessary.
figure 7


2.8 Erasure Unit
• Soft cloth
• Dust brush
• 1 set of 10 pieces 100 W halogen erasure lamps:
Philips CAPSULEline Pro (CM+9 0450 6582 0)
Fan (1) Open the doors of the digitizer.
(2) Clean the grid of the fan with a soft

cloth and a dust brush.
5146_reg09_003.cdr
figure 8
Lamps (3) Remove the complete erasure unit.
(4) Remove the pane 4 (see figure 9).
(5) Remove all lamps 1.
(6) Dust the following parts:

- reflector
- input and output opening of the air stream (protection grid) 2 (see figure 9)
- KG2 filter 3 (see figure 9)
- outer front panel


CAUTION:
Risk of damage when using wrong cleaning method.
Do not use any fluid for cleaning of the inner side of the large glass plate since it is
coated with a gelatin layer.
(7) Check the KG2 filter 3 for damage and

replace if necessary.
(8) Insert new lamps every maintenance.

1
4 3 5
5146_reg02_021.cdr
figure 9
NOTE:
Do not touch the lamps with bare fingers!
Use a dry, soft cloth to insert the lamp.
(9) Check the pins 5 for damage and correct position.
(10) Re-insert the Erasure Unit.


2.9 Cassettes
• Aluminum label (CM+9 8300 1131 0)
Visual (1) Check the most frequently used

Check
cassettes and image plates for
damage. If damage is noticed, check
further cassettes.
(2) Check the following test points of the

cassette: ALU LABEL
- Outside condition
- Hinges
- Locking .CD
R
AA
- Opening leaf springs 51
46
09
- Aluminum label figure 10
(3) Attach missing aluminum label.
NOTE:
The digitizer needs the aluminum label to recognize ADC cassettes.
2.10 Image Plates
CAUTION:
Visual (1) Check if there are scratches on the

Check
surface.
(2) Check if edges are loose as an
indication for mechanical problems at
IP transport.


3 Checking the Image Quality
WARNING:
3.1 Test Cycles

(1) Carry out four test cycles with each format of the cassettes.
3.2 Exposure of a Flatfield

Expose an image plate of every format and evaluate all the images on the Processing
Station and a printer. Following, check the flatfield for homogenous field or stripes
criteria. The hard disk of the digitizer provides two flatfield samples for quality
comparison.
NOTE:
Repeat this procedure for all formats on site!
• Flatfield
(1) Print the flatfield sample provided by the digitizer:

• Start the service program.
• Select from the service menu
<Checks>
<Send flatfield>
<Calibration pattern>
<Banding pattern>
(2) Print the flatfields "Calibration" and "Banding" via the Processing Station (window
setting of 0.6, without changing the level setting).


Rotating
(3) Expose a new image plate: Anode x-ray tube
Cathode
• Place the cassette in length
direction to the
X-ray tube, see figure 11.
• Set the following exposure

parameters: OK not OK
- 12 mAs, 75 kVp, 1.3 m distance
figure 11
- Doses 10 µGy
(result of setting: 12 mAs,
75 kVp, 1.3 m distance)
- 1.5 mm Cu filter with small focus
• Turn cassette by 180°.
• Expose plate a second time by
using the same parameters.
NOTE:
Notice, that all exposure parameters are approximate values.
(4) Identify the cassette on the ID Station:

• In the <Patient name> field, type a name and a cassette format,
e.g. Flatfield 18 x 24.
• In the <First name> field, type the serial number of the digitizer,
e.g. SN1356.
• In the <Birth date> field, type the current date,
e.g. 21012005 (use date format ddmmyyyy for day/month/year).
• In the <Radiologist> list, click <SERVICE>.
• In the <Examination> list, click <system diagnosis>.
• In the <Sub-examination> list, click <Flatfield>.
• Confirm the Exposure class <200>.
NOTE:
Make sure that the outlined areas are filled in as shown in the example.


(5) Insert the cassette into the digitizer and print the image on a printer with a window
setting of 0.6 without changing the level setting.
figure 12


3.3 Evaluation of a Flatfield
(1) Inspect the developed image for homogeneity:

Compare the prints of the flatfield sample with your exposed flatfield at a light
box.
• If there are no lines visible or the effects are less than on the example, the
image quality is all right.
• If there are unacceptable effects, compare with the following sketches.
Calibration Blurred dark lines in slow scan direction on the

Lines flatfield
(see figure 13).
• Expose another flatfield and compare it
again with the sample.
If there are still unacceptable effects, you have
to redo shading calibration as described in
chapter 3.6.
Expose another flatfield and compare it again
with the sample.
figure 13
NOTE:
If there are still unacceptable effects, please contact the Support Center.
Banding Fine sharp white or gray lines in fast scan

direction on the flatfield
(see figure 14).
• Check polygon monitoring entries and
diagnostic images.
figure 14
NOTE:
If there are still unacceptable effects please contact the Support Center.


Dust Fine sharp lines in slow scan direction on the

flatfield
(see figure 15).
• Check if scanner is dusty. In case of, use the
scan brush to remove it. Expose another
flatfield and compare it again with the sample.
figure 15
NOTE:
If there are still unacceptable effects please contact the Support Center.
4 Completion of Maintenance
(1) Confirm the maintenance by signing the checklist.

(2) Make a backup of the system on floppy.
(3) Inform the customer about what was done during the maintenance and which repairs
need to be done in next future.


Page intentionally left blank for printout.


Published by
D - 81539 München
Germany


Chapter 9
HEALTHCARE Maintenance
Imaging Services
Maintenance Checklist
CR 85-X
Type 5148/100
CR 75.0
Type 5146/105
(as of SN ≥ 6000)

This document contains the Maintenance Checklist.

Document Title
DD+DIS028.07E


eq_09_maintenance-checklist_e_template_v02
Maintenance
DD+DIS020.07E Maintenance Checklist
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
the equipment.
on the product.


Maintenance
1 Maintenance Checklist
Work Instruction for order no. SN Film cycles
The maintenance has to be carried out:

Once every six months or every 25 000 cycles
NOTE:
Maintenance must be carried out according to the maintenance instructions
DIS020.07E
Maintenance Step by Step Done

Diagnostics • Ask customer about problems
• Read out the infocounters, analyse them and clear
them afterwards
• Check the overall condition visually
Inside • Vacuum the inside and wipe it
Cassette Unit • Clean opener mechanism

• Check roller for visible wear and exchange it if
necessary
• Exchange belt once a year
Power Unit • Check electrical function of safety switch

• Exchange air filter
cPCI Rack • Remove dust and dirt

• Check electrical function of the cPCI-Rack fan
• Clean grid of the fan and exchange air filter


Maintenance
Maintenance Step by Step Done

Scan Unit • Clean scan rollers with ADC cleaner
(do not remove!)
Transport Units • Check position of suction cups and clean them with
ADC cleaner
Erasure Unit • Clean grid of the fan

• Remove dust from reflector, input and output
opening of air stream, KG2 filter, outer front panel
• Check the KG2 filter
• Exchange lamps every maintenance
Cassettes • Check the following items of the cassette:

outside condition, hinges, locking, opening leaf
springs, aluminum label
• Attach missing aluminum labels
Image Plates • Check if there are scratches on the surface

• Check if edges are loose
Checking Image Quality Done

General • Check the last 20 to 40 images on the CR QS station
Carry out test cycles, four with each format

• Expose a flatfield

• Print flatfield sample provided by the digitizer

• Evaluate the flatfield and carry out respective actions

Completion of Maintenance Done

General • Confirm the maintenance
• Make a backup of the system on floppy
• Inform the customer about maintenance and which
repairs are necessary


Maintenance
Remarks:
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
............................................................. .........................................................
Date / Signature Service Technician Customer


Service Information Bulletin
HEALTHCARE No. 3 of Bulletin
Imaging Services
Document no.: DD+DIS088.07E

CR 85-X
Type 5148/100
CR 75.0
Type 5146/105 (as of SN ≥ 6000)
This bulletin is for information only
Release of ACPL1004 Language Files for Digitizer User Interface

of CR 85-X
Task
Timing Category
Apply at all sites
Apply at affected sites
Next service as listed below
Optional to improve
functionality of product
Purpose of this document

• This Service Bulletin informs the Field Service Engineer that with the release of
ACPL1004 language files eleven languages are available for the
CR 85-X digitizer user interface.
• It informs about the installation of the language files and how the language can be
changed.
• This issue is based on product modification number 38994.
ACPL1004 language files are installed ex factory on following digitizers:

• CR 85-X Type 5148/100: SN ≥ 1937
• CR 75.0 Type 5146/105: SN ≥ 6031
Use, dissemination, distribution or reproduction of this bulletin by unauthorized personnel is not permitted and may be unlawful.
04-2007 Document Node ID: 15357277

global_service_bulletin_template_v01
Agfa Company Confidential Copyright © 2007 Agfa-Gevaert NV
Service Information Bulletin DD+DIS088.07E
1 Introduction
ACPL1004 User interface language files have been released to ensure that messages in the digitizer
Language user interface are available in several languages.
Files for
User Interface Following 11 languages are available with the release of ACPL1004 language files.
released
Available
languages Language Language File Name
Danish cop_DA.lng
Dutch cop_NL.lng
English cop_EN.lng
Finnish cop_FI.lng
French cop_FR.lng
German cop_DE.lng
Italian cop_IT.lng
Norwegian cop_NO.lng
Portuguese cop_PT.lng
Spanish cop_ES.lng
Swedish cop_SV.lng
IMPORTANT:
On digitizers with following Serial Numbers
• CR 85-X Type 5148/100 as of SN ≥ 1937
• CR 75.0 Type 5146/105 as of SN ≥ 6031
ACPL1004 language files are pre-installed ex factory on the digitizer and needn’t be installed
by the Field Service Engineer. To change the user interface language refer to section 3.2,
page 5.
Page 2 of 5 CR 85-X Type 5148/100 No. 3 of Bulletin

Agfa Company Confidential CR 75.0 Type 5146/105 (as of SN ≥ 6000)
DD+DIS088.07E Service Information Bulletin
2 Prerequisites
TOOLS:
• 1 empty floppy disk to store the ACPL1004 language files on.
SOFTWARE:
• Digitizer Software ACP_4007 or higher must be installed on the digitizer.
If Digitizer Software ACP_4007 (CM+9 5146 1150 5) is obtained ACPL1004 language
files are in scope of delivery.
• The “ACPL1004 Language Files” can be obtained by download from

MedNet GSO Library:
Computed Radiography Æ CR Digitizers Æ CR 85-X Æ Freeware
The MedNet zip-file consists ACPL 1004 language files and this
Service Bulletin, DD+DIS088.07E.
NOTE:
Before visiting the site, ensure that the ACPL1004 language files are stored unzipped on an
empty floppy disk.
3 Solution
REQUIRED TIME:
approximately 15 minutes (if Digitizer Software ACP_4007 is already installed)
NOTE:
ACPL1004 language files are installed ex factory on following digitizers.
• CR 85-X Type 5148/100: SN ≥ 1937
• CR 75.0 Type 5146/105: SN ≥ 6031
Then a installation of the ACPL1004 language files is not necessary. How to change
the user interface language is described in section 3.2, page 5.
No. 3 of Bulletin CR 85-X Type 5148/100 Page 3 of 5

Service Information Bulletin DD+DIS088.07E
3.1 Installation of ACPL1004 Language Files on the Digitizer
To install ACPL1004 language files and to change the language of the digitizer user interface
perform following procedure:
(3) Check whether ACP_4007 is installed on the digitizer by choosing

<Info>
<Device info>
If ACP_4007 or higher is installed proceed with step 4. If a software version lower

than ACP_4007 is installed, ACP_4007 or higher is required and must be installed
first.
(4) Choose
<INSTALL from floppy>
<language files>
(5) Open front doors of the digitizer.
(6) Insert floppy disk with ACPL1004 language files at disk drive of cPCI-Rack and
confirm with <;> on the local key pad.
(7) After a short while following message appears on the Service menu:
<Please remove the floppy and press ;>
Remove floppy disk and press ; to confirm.
(8) Following message appears in the Service menu:

<Do you want to change my user interface language>
To change the user interface language press ;. To leave the menu without
changing the language press :.

Page 4 of 5 CR 85-X Type 5148/100 No. 3 of Bulletin

Agfa Company Confidential CR 75.0 Type 5146/105 (as of SN ≥ 6000)
DD+DIS088.07E Service Information Bulletin
(12) Close front doors.

(13) Installation of ACPL1004 language files completed.
3.2 Changing User Interface Language on the Digitizer

To change the language of the digitizer user interface perform following procedure:
(3) Choose <CONFIGURE>

<User terminal language>
(7) Change of user interface language completed.
4 Solution Verification
• Check, whether correct language is shown in user interface of digitizer.

Result: Correct language shown in user interface.
5 Version history
Version Change Date

1.0 Initial Release 04-2007
No. 3 of Bulletin CR 85-X Type 5148/100 Page 5 of 5

HEALTHCARE Service Bulletin
Global Services Organisation No. 2
Document No.: DD+DIS201.06E
CR 85-X
Type 5148/100
Digitizer Software ACP_4007 is available
Task
Urgency Classification Subject
Next Service Required* Cure for PowerHelp Complaint
Problem affects serial number(s) / batch(es)
As Required Recommended
listed below
Information Only
* Commercial related activities e.g. preventive corrective action or commercial goodwill reason
Purpose of this Document

It introduces the new digitizer software ACP_4007 and describes the prerequisites for
the installation.
The document includes the software release information.
The software is installed ex factory on following digitizers:

Digitizer Type Serial Numbers
CR 85-X (Type 5148 / 100) SN = 1017, 1019, 1021, 1023, 1025,
1026, 1027, 1029, 1030, 1031,
1032, 1036, 1047, 1052 and 1060
SN > 1069
For an overview of all Service Bulletins refer to the Order List in MedNet.
The controlled version of this bulletin resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this bulletin is uncontrolled.
2006-06-30
Agfa Company Confidential Copyright © 2006 Agfa-Gevaert Healthcare
Service Bulletin DD+DIS201.06E
1 Introduction
The software version ACP_4007 is available for the digitizer CR 85-X.
It incorporates a check of the internal configuration values of the photomultiplier.

Therefore the update of digitizer software is required only if the photomultiplier is
replaced.
See section 5 for the software release information.
Supported The digitizer software ACP_4007 can be used for the following
CR Applications CR applications:
• General Radiography (GenRad)

• Mammography (Mammo)
• General Radiography 50 µm (Extremities)
• Full Leg – Full Spine (FLFS)
The software cannot be used for radiotherapy applications.
2 Prerequisites
REQUIRED SPARE PART:

Get the digitizer software ACP_4007
• by download from MedNet:

GSO Library / Computed Radiography / CR Digitizers / CR 85-X / Freeware /
CR 85-X – Software – Device Software ACP_4007
• or via spare parts supply.
Order Number: CM+9 5146 1150 4
In both cases the installation instruction, DD+DIS200.06E, is included.
Page 2 of 5 CR 85-X No. 2

Agfa Company Confidential Type 5148 2006-06-30
DD+DIS201.06E Service Bulletin
REQUIRED TOOLS:
maximal seven empty formatted floppy disks with 1.44 MB capacity each:
• one for the backup of site specific data and
• six for the preparation of the installation set of floppy disks
if you obtained the digitizer software from MedNet.
REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION:
• Enclosure “Installation Instructions for Digitizer Software ACP_4007”
(DD+DIS200.06).
3 Solution
PROCEDURE & REQUIRED TIME
Task Duration
(1) Prepare installation floppy disks.

(2) Create a backup of the digitizer.
(3) Update digitizer software.
(4) Conclude the installation.
(5) Verify successful software update.
Estimated Time to Complete approximately 60 min.
For a detailed description of the tasks refer to the installation instructions

(DD+DIS200.06E) which are included in the software delivery.
4 Solution Verification
Verify the successful installation according to the procedure given in the

installation instructions (DD+DIS200.06E).
No. 2 CR 85-X Page 3 of 5

2006-06-30 Type 5148 Agfa Company Confidential
5 Release Information for Software ACP_4007

5.1 Changed Functionality compared to Version ACP_4005
Internal configuration values of the photomultiplier in CR 85-X are now checked to be

within the specified range.
The changes do not affect the digitizer operation and the service.
5.2 Open Bugs
User Interface

Image Processing

The cause is that the photomultiplier signal (SAL) for very low signal levels does
not follow the Gaussian distribution.

"Pixel FIFO full condition detected. Pixels were lost."

Agfa Company Confidential Type 5148 2006-06-30
DD+DIS201.06E Service Bulletin
Repair and Maintenance

info counter.
Workaround: Press the <Reset> switch at the cPCI rack after the installation of
each hardware modification floppy disk.
Workaround: Perform IP Center calibration and Shading calibration.

Mammo is disabled.
Workaround: Enable Mammo manually in the Service menu.
No. 2 CR 85-X Page 5 of 5

2006-06-30 Type 5148 Agfa Company Confidential
HEALTHCARE Service Bulletin
Global Services Organisation No. 1
Document No.: DD+DIS230.06E
CR 85-X
Type 5148/100
New Spare Part “Reader with Antenna” available

Task
Urgency Classification Subject
Next Service Required* Cure for PowerHelp Complaint:
Problem affects serial number(s) / batch(es)
As Required Recommended
listed below
Information Only
* Commercial related activities e.g. preventive corrective action or commercial goodwill reason
Purpose of this document:

• This Service Bulletin gives information about the new spare part
“Reader with Antenna” for the CR 85-X digitizer.
• It replaces spare parts “GSS BSM Mifare Serial Reader” and “feed gate glued”
• For an overview of all Service Bulletins refer to the Order List in MedNet.
2006-06-14
1 Introduction
Subject “Reader with Antenna” has been introduced as a new spare part for the
CR 85-X digitizer.
It replaces the following spare parts which are no longer available via spare part channel:
• GSS BSM Mifare Serial Reader (CM+9 0486 1351 0)
• feed gate glued (CM+9 5145 1395 0)
2 Prerequisites
SPARE PARTS
• “Reader with Antenna” can be ordered via spare part channel under:
CM+9 5146 7010 0
• The scope of delivery for the spare part is as follows:
- GSS BSM Serial Reader
- feed gate glued (= antenna)
- flat cable 6 pole
- self-latching shaft
- spacer
- enclosure to the spare part (DD+DIS190.06E)
TOOLS:
For the assembly of the “Reader with Antenna” no tools are required.
3 Assembly of the Spare Part

For the installation instructions of the spare part refer to the document in scope
(DD+DIS190.06E).

Agfa Company Confidential Type 5148/100 2006-06-14
Imaging Services Installation Planning
CR 85-X
Type 5148/100
CR 75.0
Type 5146/105
(as of SN ≥ 6000)
Edition 2, Revision 0
CR 85-X CR 75.0
Type 5148/100 Type 5146/105
(as of SN ≥ 6000)
This documentation is separately available. Order No: DD+DIS021.07E.

eq_11_install-planning_e_template_v02
DD+DIS021.07E Installation Planning
1 2 3
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
the equipment.
on the product.


1 2 3

This document contains all planning data including the required measures to be carried
out on site prior to the machine delivery.
This chapter is divided into:
• construction planning data
• technical connection and performance data
• safety instructions, listing of certificates

Document Title
DD+DIS028.07E


1 2 3
LIST OF CONTENTS
1 SAFETY REGULATIONS .........................................................................................................5

1.1 Installation Regulations.............................................................................................................5
1.2 Certificates ................................................................................................................................6
1.3 Radio Interference Suppression ...............................................................................................7
2 SCOPE OF DELIVERY AND ACCESSORIES.........................................................................8

3 SYSTEM OVERVIEW...............................................................................................................9
4 MACHINE DIMENSIONS AND TRANSPORT PATH .............................................................10
5 CLIMATIC AND AMBIENT CONDITIONS..............................................................................12
6 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS ..............................................................................................14
6.1 External Fuse Protection.........................................................................................................14
6.2 Power Connection...................................................................................................................14
6.3 Connection Cables..................................................................................................................14
6.4 Network Connection................................................................................................................14
7 SPECIFICATIONS..................................................................................................................15
7.1 Type Definition ........................................................................................................................15
7.2 Electrical Data .........................................................................................................................15
7.3 Packing Dimensions ...............................................................................................................16
7.3.1 Package ..................................................................................................................................16
7.3.2 Weights ...................................................................................................................................16
7.3.3 Transport Conditions...............................................................................................................16
8 INSTALLATION PLANNING CHECKLIST..............................................................................17

8.1 Checklist..................................................................................................................................18
9 FORM TO FILL IN THE NETWORK PARAMETERS .............................................................19


1 2 3
NOTE:
This document describes the Installation Planning of the Digitizers
• CR 85-X Type 5148/100
• CR 75.0 Type 5146/105 (as of SN ≥ 6000).
For the Installation Planning of other CR components please refer to MedNet GSO
Library: Computed Radiography /CR Workstation Software
1 Safety Regulations
1.1 Installation Regulations
Electrical installations in the installation room must be in compliance with:

• IEC 60364 (e.g. for Germany: VDE 0100) regulations for Europe,
• NEC for USA / Canada.
Prior to any electrical installation, the local regulations for electrical installations have to
be consulted as well.
A ground fault circuit interrupter (GFCI) is recommended, but not compulsory.
Mains Connection via plug and socket.


1 2 3
1.2 Certificates
• The CR 85-X Type 5148/100 and CR 75.0 Type 5146/105 (as of SN ≥ 6000) are in
compliance with EG regulation 93/42/EEC (Medical device directive).
• The CR 85-X Type 5148/100 and CR 75.0 Type 5146/105 (as of SN ≥ 6000)
comply with:
The general safety regulations:

- EN 60601-1: 1990 + A1: 1993 + A2: 1995
- IEC 601-1: 1988 + A1:1991 + A2: 1995
- IEC 60601-1-1: 2000/ EN 60601-1-1:2001
- IEC 60601-1-2: 2001
- UL 2601-1 Second Edition
- CAN/CSA 22.No.601.1-M90
The laser safety regulations:

- EN 60825: 1993 + A2: 2001
- DHHS/FDA 21 CFR, Parts 1040.10 and 1040.11
- ANSI Z 136-1980


1 2 3
1.3 Radio Interference Suppression

It is hereby certified that the CR 85-X Type 5148/100 and CR 75.0 Type 5146/105
(as of SN ≥ 6000) have interference suppression according to EN 55011: 1998 Class B
as well as FCC Rules CR47 Part 15 Class A (North-America).
CAUTION: For USA only:

This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency
energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the service
manual, may cause interference to radio communication.


1 2 3
2 Scope of Delivery and Accessories
Pieces Description
1 Digitizer
1 base plate
1 installation instructions
1 installation report
1 CR 85-X user manual information
1 certificates
6 floppies
1 UTP network cable (2 x RJ45 connection)
1 Allen key, size 8
1 connection cable (Europe: CEE(7) VII 250 V/16 A)
1 connection cable (USA, Japan: Nema 6-15 P)
2 adjustable bases, riveted


1 2 3
3 System Overview
rk
two
ne
on
ly
5158_chap11_002
figure 1
The above example shows the digitizer connected to a WIN XP based

CR Quality System (CR QS).
It may as well be connected to a Unix based ADC System (VIPS Processing Station).


1 2 3
4 Machine Dimensions and Transport Path
Free space as shown in the drawing must be
Less space may result in longer repair times!
Required free space for the ventilation,
Operation side, required free space for

reserved for repair and maintenance.
A Power and Ethernet connection
186 cm (73.28 In)

84 cm (33.09 In)
B replacement and servicing of
Digitizer
CR85-X
B
A
complete modules.
5 cm 61 cm (24.03 In)
(1.97 In)
106 cm (47.76 In)
dimensions in cm
3 cm 1 cm (1.182 In 0.39 In)
138 cm (54.37 In)
84 cm (33.09 In)
68 cm (26.79 In)
93 cm (36.64 In)
115 cm (45.31 In)
5148_Chap11_001.cdr
figure 2
1 2 3
NOTE:
A 1:1 template of the machine's footprint can be ordered under DD+DIS141.98E
It must be possible to transport the digitizer through all hallways and doors up to the
installation site.
The smallest machine dimension is 84 cm (34”).
The machine dimensions are 142 cm x 84 cm x 115 cm (56” x 34” x 46”) (HxWxD).
Once the machine is unpacked, it can be moved to the installation site on four mounted
rollers.
To remove the machine off the pallet a minimum space of 100 cm x 500 cm
(40” x 197”) is required.
NOTE:
Make sure that the floor covering is solid enough to stand the weight of the digitizer.


1 2 3
5 Climatic and Ambient Conditions
NOTE:
All specifications in this chapter apply on unpacked digitizer.
Temperature and Humidity

Ambient Temperature 20 °C min. / 68 °F min.
30 °C max. / 86 °F max.
20 °C ideal / 68 °F ideal
Rate of Change of Temperature 0.5 °C per min. / 0.9 °F per min.
Relative Humidity 15 % min.
(at 25°C / 77°F ambient temp.) 80 % max.
40-50 % ideal
Light Tightness
Tightness SALMIN still met at 2500 Lux ambient light
NOTE:
The digitizer must not be operated in direct sunlight exposure.


1 2 3
Floor Conditions
Base digitizer stands on a metal plate, 2 mm
(0,08 In) thickness
Horizontal Alignment digitizer works without leveling, horizontal
alignment is not required. Nevertheless, the
digitizer should be run preferably in a horizontal
position.
Take care that the digitizer can not tilt at the
installation site.
Magnetic Fields
Max. permissible Magnetic Field according to EN 61000-4-8: Level 5
in the Room
Emissions
Noise Level during scanning max. 65 dB (A)
stand-by mode / idle max. 46 dB (A)
Heat Dissipation 0.8 kWh / 2730 BTU per hour
at max. throughput with 35x43 cm IP


1 2 3
6 Electrical Connections
6.1 External Fuse Protection
Fuse Rated Voltage (single phase)

max. line fuse 16 A 240 V +/- 10 %
max. line fuse 16 A 230 V +/- 10 %
max. line fuse 15 A 208 V +/- 10 % (e.g. USA)
max. line fuse 15 A 200 V +/- 10 % (e.g. Japan)
6.2 Power Connection

Single phase connection, operable on 50 Hz and 60 Hz.
The digitizer has an automatic voltage selector. Voltage is adapted automatically as
soon as the machine is switched on. The selected voltage is displayed on a LED at the
inner side of the right door.
6.3 Connection Cables

Two cables are included as standard delivery:
• USA/Japan: Nema 6-15 P
• Europe: CEE(7)VII 250 V/16 A
6.4 Network Connection

UTP network cable, 5 m (197”) long, (2 x RJ45 connection)


1 2 3
7 Specifications
7.1 Type Definition
Digitizer Type
CR 85-X 5148/100
CR 75.0 Type 5146/105 (as of SN ≥ 6000)
7.2 Electrical Data
Rated Voltage [~V] 230 V – 240 V (16 A)

200 V – 208 V (15 A)
Frequency [Hz] 50 / 60
Power Consumption [W] Standby approx. 300 W
Maximum approx. 1700 W (= 8.5 A)
Leakage Current
264 V, 50 Hz < 0.5 mA
132 V, 60 Hz < 0.3 mA
(center tab, USA)
Typical Current Consumption for CR 85-X*

Type 5148 Standby IP-Handling Handling and
erase
Current by 200 V < 1,5 A < 2,5 A <9A
Current by 208 V < 1,5 A < 2,5 A < 8,5 A
Current by 230 V < 1,5 A <2A < 8,5 A
* The maximal current is the erasure of IPs. The erasure time depends on
X-ray dose and IP size.


1 2 3
7.3 Packing Dimensions
7.3.1 Package
Packed on a pallet the size is:

Height 159 cm (62.64”)
Width 100 cm (39.4”)
Depth 132 cm (52”)
7.3.2 Weights
Digitizer without Package approx. 320 kg

Digitizer with Package approx. 450 kg
7.3.3 Transport Conditions
Temperature 0 °C / 32 °F for 72 hrs.

+55 °C / 131 °F for 96 hrs.
Relative Humidity 15 % to 80 %


1 2 3
8 Installation Planning Checklist
In order to avoid any unnecessary delays during the installation and the machine start-
up, the following points of the checklist below should be carried out prior to the
installation.
Check and discuss all the required measures for the installation by means of this
checklist. Remarks on the individual items may be made on the back of the list.
We ask you to give this checklist to your local Agfa representative.
Customer: .....................................................................................................
....................
Department: .....................................................................................................
....................
System .....................................................................................................
components: ....................
.....................................................................................................
....................
.....................................................................................................
....................
.....................................................................................................
....................
.....................................................................................................
....................
Desired .......................... Signed: .............................................

installation date: .......................... Signature
.......
Remarks:


1 2 3
8.1 Checklist
Subject Prepared: OK
Required external Fixed connection via an all-pole main switch or

Connections connection via plug and socket approx. 30 cm
(12 In) from the floor.
Cables:
USA/Japan: Nema 6-15P
Europe: CEE(7)VII 250V/16A
Mains Connection Appointment with the house electrician or

authorized electrician for the mains connection has
been made
Network Connection Ethernet connection (Twisted pair) prepared
Remote Access Remote Access must be guaranteed!
Transport Path Transport to the installation site, unpacking and

taking the machine off the pallet must be done by
the carrier.
Transport path (≥ 84 cm (≥34”)
Way:
..................................................................................
........................
Free space for taking the machine off the pallet
defined? (5 x 1 m) (197” x 40”)
Place:
..................................................................................
.......................


1 2 3
9 Form to fill in the Network Parameters
Digitizer Example 1st Digitizer 2nd Digitizer Remarks

Hostname adcc1
ip_addr. 192.9.200.199
Subnet_mask
default router
AE_title ADCC1
Station Name * ADCC1
CR QS Example 1st Server 2nd Server Remarks

1 Station Station
Server Station
Hostname adc_qs
ip_addr. 192.9.200.202
subnet_mask
default router
AE_title ADC_QS
Station Name * ADC_QS
1
or ADC (VIPS) Processing Station.
= main components
CR QS Example 1st Client 2nd Client Remarks

Client Station 2 Station Station
hostname qc206
ip_addr. 192.9.200.206
Subnet_mask
default router
2
or ADC Preview Station


1 2 3
ID - Station Example 1st ID-Station 2nd ID-Station Remarks

hostname id207
ip_addr. 192.9.200.207
Subnet_mask
default router
AE_title ID207
Station Name * ID207
Hard Copy Example 1st HCP 2nd HCP Remarks

Printer
hostname mg1
ip_addr. 192.9.200.201
Subnet_mask
default router
AE_title ADC_LR1
Station Name * ADC_LR1
PACS Example 1st Archive 2nd Archive Remarks

Archive Station Station Station.
hostname simas1
ip_addr. 192.9.200.101
Subnet_mask
default router
AE_title SIMAS1
Station Name * IMPAX
*) Friendly name (Station name) appears in the USER interface


1 2 3
Intentionally left blank


Published by
D - 81539 München
Germany


Imaging Services Glossary
CR 85-X
Type 5148/100
CR 75.0
Type 5146/105
(as of SN ≥ 6000)

This document contains explanations of product specific terms and abbreviations used
in this service documentation.

Document Title
DD+DIS028.07E


eq_12_glossary_e_template_v02
DD+DIS378.05E Glossary
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
the equipment.
on the product.


1 Glossary
Term Short Description

µGy Micro Gray – x-ray dose
1Gy= 0.87 x 10 –2 J/kg
A / D Converter Analog Digital Converter; the part that translates an analog
signal into a digital signal, which can be handled by computers.
ADC Agfa Diagnostic Center
AE – title Application Entity
AOS Adonis Operating System
Operating system for Agfa CPU's (Gemini, Goliath, David)
APIP Agfa Picture Archiving Protocol
AUI Attachment Unit Interface (External „Box“ to connect to a
network)
AS Archive Station
BOL Begin Of Line; Sensor for exact positioning the scan surface
along the x-axis. A PIN diode is hit by the laser beam before it
reaches the image plate. The Pin diode creates a digital signal,
called begin of line signal. The distance (time) between this
signal and the IP must be adjusted.
BOS Begin Of Scan;
Browser Software that provides an interface to the World Wide Web
BSP Boot Support Package: boot program for Agfa CPU's
Calibration Procedure on ADC to make a homogeneous exposure look like
one on film. Algorithm to counterbalance irregularities in the
scanner of ADC.
CAS Clinical Application Specialist
CCM Configuration and Customization Manager (Tool to edit the
configuration file adc.cpf)
CHM Cassette Handling Module
Collimation Determination of the region in the image where the interesting
data is at. On that region the image processing is applied..
Controller Is connected ahead the laser recorder. The controller is
responsible for the image reception from the diagnostic
equipment, the image processing, layout of the images on the
film, and image transmission to the machine.
cPCI compact Peripheral Component Interconnect – bus system
used in CR85-X



CPF – file Customization Parameter File; file that contains settings for all
parameters that can be modified to configure an ADC System
according to local needs.
CPU Central Processing Unit.
CR Computed Radiography
CR Quality Agfa’s CR Modality workstation software
System
CU-Filter Copper Filter, used for control of image quality
DAC Digital Analog Converter
Decomposition The original image is being split up in a set of bandpass-filtered
images
Diagnostic Logger Tool on ADC to keep a lot of reduced images with the
corresponding image data on the HD.
DICOM Digital Imaging and COmmunications in Medicine;
Dose, x-ray dose = kV x mA x sec see also µGy = Micro Gray

Dosimeter Device to measure x-ray dose
DR Direct Radiography
DRA Direct Remote Access (external product name: AGFATEC
LINK)
Dynamic Range Exposure range in which ADC can get usable image data.
Ethernet A network standard for the hardware and data link levels.
FSE Field Service Engineer
FTP File Transfer Protocol.
The Internet service that transfers files from one computer to
another. (Program used for transmission of files in the Internet)
Grid to reduce scattered radiation
to increase sharpness
GSC Global Support Center
GUI Graphical User Interface
HT power supply High Tension power supply
HCP Hard Copy Printer
HDD Hard Disk Drive
Heel Effect inhomogeneous exposure



HiRes High Resolution: pixel size = 100 micrometer
HIS Hospital Information System
Histogram graphical display of the distribution of gray levels
HUB (Ethernet) box to interconnect network hosts with Twisted Pair cable. Also
called concentrator.
HUB (in AGFA Switchbox (Hard- or Software) which switches or multiplexes
devices) different channels, e.g. AMDI and Service Channel.
I/O BUS Input / Output BUS.
System consisting of a defined cable, cable connection, and
signal for the parallel transmission of control data. The machine
uses a bus system of 8 V level and 26 parallel lines.
ID Station IDENTIFICATION Station
IMOS IMAGE MONITOR SOFTWARE -Æ succession for SMA
Internet The global computer network, composed of thousands of Wide
Area Networks (WANs) and Local Area Networks (LANs), that
uses TCP/IP to provide world-wide communication to homes,
schools, businesses, and governments. The World Wide Web
runs on the Internet.
IP for ADC: Image Plate (phosphor plate)
IP Image Processing
IP (Internet Protocol) Internet software that divides data into
packets for transmission over the Internet. Computers must run
IP to communicate across the Internet. See also TCP.
IP-Address (Internet Protocol Address) The standard method which
identifies an internet connected computer.
Java A general-purpose programming language created by Sun
Microsystems. Java can be used to create Java applets. A Java
program is downloaded from the Web server and interpreted by
a program running on the machine containing the Web browser.
Java applet A short program written in Java that is attached to a World Wide
Web page and executed by the browser machine.
JavaScript A cross-platform, World Wide Web scripting language
developed by Netscape Communications. JavaScript code is
inserted directly into the HTML page.
LAN Local Area Network. Network technology, designed to connect
computers over short distances.
It is possible to connect the LAN with the Internet or to make a
configuration into an intranet.
Laser Light Amplification by Stimulated Emission of Radiation:



LCD Liquid Crystal Display
LED Light Emitting Diode; Semi conductor emitting light
Leeds Phantom Image Plate to check the technical image quality of the ADC.
The Leeds Phantom was developed for Agfa by the University
of Leeds.
Low Pass Filtering Butterworth filter in SAB – board to eliminate frequencies > 250
kHz.
LUT Look Up Table
MD – Plate AGFA MD Æ Medium Definition Image Plate
MFA Machine Factor A
Machine specific value indicating the photo multiplier sensitivity
MFA is the log of the PM high voltage which results in a scan
average level SAL1800 at a given dose of 1mR (~20 µGy) and
a speed class 200
MFB Machine Factor B
MIMOSA Medical IMage Operating System Agfa; Agfa's workstation
operating software
MODEM MODULATOR DEMODULATOR – device to connect via
telephone line to another computer.
Monitor – level lowest software level on CPU (like BIOS on DOS systems)
stored on EEPROM
mR milli Röntgen, measure for x-ray dose
1 mR corres. 8.7 µGy
MS-Board Multy Supply Board; is part of the Power Unit, detects supply
voltage, controls the mechanical periphery of the digitizer and
protects the stepper motor boards.
MUSICA MUltiple Scale Image Contrast Amplification;
Agfa's image processing software
Network location In a URL, the unique name that identifies an Internet server. A
network location has two or more parts, separated by periods,
as in my.network.location. Also called host name and Internet
address.
Node Nodes in the I/O bus system = printed circuit board in the I/O
bus.
Nullmodem RS 232 (RS242) cable with crossed Transmit / Receive Line
NVE Name value file editor; editor system for parameter



NX NX is Agfa’s new standalone CR workstation for:
image acquisition, identification, image processing and image
transmission of digitized images received from a digitizer
It prepares these images for diagnostic use and sends them to
a printer, an archive or a diagnostic station
OBERON board CPU in Agfa digitizers, successor of ARIEL board
OLUT Output Look-Up Table
OS Operating System
Password A text string that allows a user access to an Internet service, if
the service requires it.
Photomultiplier Photo Multiplier Tube: opto – electronical sensitive device to
Tube (PMT) convert light (laser emission) in current and with a I / V –
Converter into voltage
Pixel Scanning point on the film or plate. A maximum of 2048 per line
may be read by the Photomultiplier.
Preview Monitor displays the image and the name of the patient.
This monitor enables to roughly check whether the exposure
was successful.
PRID PREVIEW and ID Station, installed on one PC, used on older
CR systems, current CR QS systems use the ID viewer
software
PS Processing Station
Pyramidal Image Image file format of images on VIPS
Quantisation compression of image files
RAM Random Access Memory
volatile main memory of computers
RAM – DISK virtual harddisk simulated in the CPU main memory
Gemini RAM-Disk contains all the machine dependent
parameters, e.g. stepper motor steps, info counters
REM Tool Debugging tool for AOS logfiles
Reset Machine reset into a defined machine status. Various checking
routines are carried out during a reset.
RIS Radiology Information System
ROI Region Of Interest
ROM Read Only Memory
RS232 interface Serial interface which converts computer internal parallel
information into serial bits, and vice versa.



SAL Scan Average Level
Digitized photo multiplier signal of an average of several
hundred scanned lines
Range SAL0 – SAL4095 (12bit)
SCP SOFTCOPY Tool
SCSI Small Computer Systems Interface – interface to connect
peripherals to computers
(e.g. HDD, CD-ROM)
Server A computer that shares its resources, such as printers and files,
with other computers on the network.
Service interface RS232 standard interface for the connection of the Service PC.
Shading position dependent sensitivity calibration; calibration of each
Calibration pixel in a line
Shell User Interface of the VME – AOS
Slowscan Transport Direction of Image Plate through the scan unit. The
direction stepper motor speed is calculated such that the distance
between two scan lines equals the distance between two pixels
in a line.
Speed Class (SC) Dose=1mR + SC100 => D=1 above fog + base
A film-screen-system with speed class 100 which is exposed
with a dose of 1mR results in a density 1 above fog+base.
Square Root Signal ∼ .
Compression
Method to quantisize Signal in 12 similar block sizes
Standard Res Standard Resolution: pixel size = 150 micrometer
Subnet number A part of the internet address which designates a subnet
TCP Transmission Control Protocol. Internet networking software
that controls the transmission of packets of data over the
Internet. Among its tasks, TCP checks for lost packets, puts the
data from multiple packets into the correct order, and requests
that missing or damaged packets be resent. Computers must
run TCP to communicate with World Wide Web servers.
TCP/IP Transport Control Protocol / Internet Protocol. Common
Protocol for Networks. Used in the Internet
Text Field Part of the film displaying patient, hospital and image
processing information



UI User Interface; part of a computer program that handles
interaction with the user.
UPS Uninterruptible Power Supply
URL Uniform Resource Locator; address code for multimedia
documents.
UTP - cable Unshielded Twisted Pair (Network transfer medium) cable.
Cable to connect to a computer network.
VIPS Viewing and Image Processing Station
VME bus Versa Module Europe bus Bus system from Motorola (used in
ADC Digitizers)
Bus for the parallel image data transmission. 16 bit bus.
W/L Window and Leveling of digital images.
X-Rite Automatic density measuring instrument manufactured by X-
densitometer Rite.


CR 85-X
Document Number:
Service
DD+DIS378.05E Type 5148/100 Documentation
2nd Edition
CR 75.0
Type 5146/105
(as of SN > 6000)
CR 85-X
Document Number:
Service
DD+DIS378.05E
Type 5148/100 Documentation

2nd Edition
CR 75.0
Type 5146/105
(as of SN > 6000)
CR 85-X
Document Number:
Service
DD+DIS378.05E

2nd Edition
CR 75.0
Type 5146/105
(as of SN > 6000)
CR 85-X
Document Number:
Service
DD+DIS378.05E

2nd Edition
CR 75.0
Type 5146/105
(as of SN > 6000)

CR85-X - Manual - 2007-12-07 3.0

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CR85-X - Manual - 2007-12-07 3.0

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

CR85-X - Manual - 2007-12-07 3.0

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

HEALTHCARE ReadeMeFirst

How to print and add Comments

1 Printing single Pages, Chapters or the complete Manual

1.1 Printing single Pages or Chapters

2007-05-10 printed in Germany

1.2 Printing the complete Service Manual

2.1 How to export your Comments

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

Revision 0 How to print and add Comments Page 2 of 3

(3) Select “Options - Export Selected Comments”

2.2 How to import Comments

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

Revision 0 How to print and add Comments Page 3 of 3

02-2007 printed in Germany Document Node ID: 10028251

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

Edition 2, Revision 0 CR 85-X Type 5148/100 Chapter 0 / 2

► Purpose of this document

Edition. Release Changes

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

Edition 2, Revision 0 CR 85-X Type 5148/100 Chapter 0 / 3

Controls, Connections and Set Up Procedures

3 Repair and Service

3.1 Machine specific Safety and Repair Information

3.2 Machine specific Tools, Software Tools and Auxiliary Equipment

4 Reference and Circuit Diagrams

5 Spare Parts List

8 Manufacturing Standard Modifications

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

Edition 2, Revision 0 CR 85-X Type 5148/100 Chapter 0 / 4

This documentation uses:

CAUTION: Possible dangerous situation: Light injuries or damage to the

Not-safety relevant notes

NOTE: • Indicates advice to facilitate the following step or action without

Actions Way of writing Sample

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

Edition 2, Revision 0 CR 85-X Type 5148/100 Chapter 0 / 5

1 About this Manual

2nd Edition CR 85-X Type 5148/100 – CR 75.0 Type 5146/105

Note that the CR 85-X / CR 75.0 Type 5146/105 Service Documentation

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

Edition 2, Revision 0 CR 85-X Type 5148/100 Chapter 0 / 6

Download This Service Documentation is available on the MedNet GSO Library.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

Edition 2, Revision 0 CR 85-X Type 5148/100 Chapter 0 / 7

Further features of the digitizer include:

• The digitizer permits assigning the status “emergency” to an image. An

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

Edition 2, Revision 0 CR 85-X Type 5148/100 Chapter 0 / 8

AGFA and the Agfa-Rhombus are trademarks of Agfa-Gevaert NV

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

Agfa Company Confidential

Order List for Documentation CR 85-X

Order number for a complete Service Manual:

Order number Edition

DD+DIS378.05E Complete Service Manual 2

Order numbers for separately available chapters of the Service Manual:

Order number Contents Revision Approval Date

DD+DIS180.05M Chapter 06: Spare parts List: n.a. 2007-03-20

Access to MedNet GSO Library: